Skip to main content

Full text of "Report to Congress on the mutual security program"

See other formats


hSHRA 

3  9999_0o3i^iaB 


gflfiMJDmnm 

gSHHsfe 

iSiilllilBf 


11111 


*a5fi 


m 


3sr* 


rF 


"Bi 


civ?..  *  9  3  3  5...  7..IA3  6 


>£. 


I  95  I 

19^4 


83d  Congress,  1st  Session 


House  Document  No.  226 


/\ejw/ii  fa  (Jffffftogg 


the 


MUTUAL  SECURITY  PROGRAM 


■\qm 


job  the  six  months  ended 
$une  30,  /9S3 


83d  Congress,  1st  Session House  Document  No.  226 


Report  to  Congress 

on  the 

Mutual  Security  Program 


June  30, 1953 


PRESIDENT'S  LETTER  OF  TRANSMITTAL 

To  the  Congress  of  the  United  States: 

I  am  transmitting  herewith  the  Report  on  the  Mutual  Security  Program 
covering  operations  during  the  6  months  ended  June  30,  1953,  in  furtherance 
of  the  purposes  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951,  as  amended. 

In  the  Mutual  Security  Program  we  find  tangible  expression  of  our  belief 
that  the  safety  and  self-interest  of  this  Nation  are  inextricably  tied  in  with  the 
security  and  well-being  of  other  free  nations. 


The  White  House, 

August  17,  1953. 


in 


CONTENTS 

Page 

President's  Letter  of  Transmittal in 

Chapter  I.  A  Program  for  Long-Term  Security 1 

II.  Europe 13 

III.  The  Near  East  and  Africa 28 

IV.  South  Asia  and  the  Far  East , 36 

V.  American  Republics 50 

VI.  Other  Parts  of  the  Program 57 


CHAPTER  I 


A  Program  for  Long-Term 

Security 


THE  first  half  of  1953  was  a  period  of  concrete 
achievement  for  the  Mutual  Security  Pro- 
gram. It  was  a  period  of  intensive  policy  reexami- 
nation and  forward  planning,  of  operational  over- 
haul and  streamlining,  and  of  encouraging  progress 
in  free  world  defense  and  development. 

A  New  Look  at  Mutual  Security 

The  present  administration  assumed  the  reins 
of  government  on  January  20,  1953.  On  that 
date,  it  assumed  also  a  solemn  obligation  to  the 
American  people  to  reexamine  most  carefully  the 
entire  complex  of  existing  arrangements  for  their 
security.  The  Mutual  Security  Program  for  build- 
ing the  defenses  and  resources  of  the  free  world 
stood  particularly  high  on  the  list  of  those  ar- 
rangements. For  this  reason,  a  fresh  and  searching 
look  was  focused  on  our  mutual  security  operations 
with  other  nations. 

The  new  Director  for  Mutual  Security,  Harold 
E.  Stassen,  promptly  initiated  an  intensive  review 
of  mutual  security  aims,  methods,  and  working 
activities.  Concurrently,  the  basic  concepts  and 
undertakings  of  the  program  were  carefully  an- 
alyzed by  the  National  Security  Council  in  rela- 
tion to  our  country's  whole  security  structure  and 
financial  capabilities. 

The  Director  also  enlisted  the  help  of  a  special 
group  of  55  outstanding  leaders  of  American 
industry  and  finance  in  surveying  all  phases  of  the 
program  in  14  countries  which  have  accounted 
for  the  largest  expenditures  in  recent  years.  These 
businessmen,  who  served  without  compensation, 
visited  Europe,  the  Near  East,  and  Far  East  to 
make  an  on-the-spot  study  of  actual  operations 
at  the  local  levels. 


The  evaluation  survey  resulted  in  a  number  of 
valuable  recommendations  designed  to  streamline 
our  foreign  operational  procedures,  cut  down  du- 
plication and  overlapping,  and  eliminate  blurred 
delegations  of  authority. 

The  Secretaries  of  State,  Defense,  and  Treasury 
and  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security  held  numer- 
ous personal  discussions,  both  in  this  country  and 
abroad,  with  high  officials  of  our  partner  nations 
to  achieve  a  first-hand  exchange  of  views  on 
today's  vital  military  and  economic  issues.  These 
leaders  of  the  Administration  also  took  part  in 
the  Paris  meeting  of  the  North  Atlantic  Council 
which  laid  down  current  military  plans  for  western 
defense. 

In  short,  the  whole  fabric  of  our  worldwide 
security  objectives  and  operations  was  closely 
examined. 

Where  We  Stand 

As  a  result  of  their  review  of  security  operations 
and  overall  foreign  policy  objectives,  top  adminis- 
tration officials  reached  certain  fundamental  con- 
clusions. It  is  upon  these  conclusions  that  the 
present  Mutual  Security  Program  is  built. 

The  Threat  of  Growing  Soviet  Power 

The  United  States  continues  to  be  seriously 
threatened  by  Soviet  military  and  political  ex- 
pansionism. There  is  no  real  evidence  that  this 
threat  has  diminished  or  will  diminish  within  the 
foreseeable  future.  The  Soviet  Union  retains  the 
capacity  for  aggression,  and  it  has  demonstrated 


aggressive  intentions  on  numerous  occasions  in 
the  recent  past.  Its  future  intentions  remain  an 
uncertain  quantity. 

The  Soviet  Union  and  its  satellites,  including 
the  mainland  of  China,  occupy  about  13  million 
square  miles' — almost  one-fourth  of  the  earth's 
surface.  This  vast  spread  of  Soviet-dominated 
territory  has  enough  manpower  and  natural  re- 
sources to  enable  the  Soviet  bloc  to  develop  an 
economic  base  matching  our  own. 

There  is  every  evidence  that  the  industrial  out- 
put of  the  Soviet  bloc  is  growing  rapidly.  Results 
of  a  recent  study  by  the  United  Nations  Economic 
Commission  for  Europe  show  that,  at  the  present 
pace  of  expansion,  the  Soviet  Union  by  1960  will 
be  producing  at  least  as  much  of  the  major  raw 
materials  as  the  seven  most  industrialized  coun- 
tries of  Western  Europe.  By  1955,  Soviet  plans 
call  for  the  production  of  more  oil  than  Western 
Europe  is  currently  consuming.  Even  today,  the 
U.  S.  S.  R.  is  estimated  to  be  turning  out  annually 
more  than  twice  the  steel  it  produced  per  year 
to  fight  the  last  war. 

The  Soviet  Union  continues  to  maintain  the 
largest  armed  force  in  peacetime  history.  General 
Eidgway  has  recently  publicly  reported  that  the 
Soviet  Army  has  approximately  175  active  divi- 
sions. The  Soviet  Air  Force  has  some  20,000 
front-line  aircraft,  with  a  large  aircraft  reserve. 
The  Navy  includes  more  than  350  submarines, 
many  of  the  latest  type.  Army  strength  of  the 
European  satellites  has  grown,  in  the  postwar 
years,  from  45  to  over  75  divisions.  Advanced 
types  of  jet  fighters,  long-range  bombers,  and 
heavy  tanks  continue  to  roll  off  Soviet  production 
lines  in  large  numbers.  Meanwhile,  the  possibil- 
ities of  Russia's  ever-growing  capabilities  for 
atomic  attack  should  be  kept  in  the  forefront  of 
our  defense  planning. 

Since  the  death  of  Stalin,  the  Soviet  Union  has 
made  certain  gestures  which  have  aroused  the 
hopes  of  the  peoples  of  the  world  for  a  reduction  of 
tension  and  a  restoration  of  general  peace.  But 
these  gestures  have  been  accompanied  by  insig- 
nificant concrete  actions.  However  fervently  the 
free  peoples  may  hope  for  peace,  it  would  be  sui- 
cidal to  base  our  policies  and  programs  on  these 
hopes,  without  solid  evidence  of  Soviet  good  faith. 
Until  conditions  for  genuine  peace  have  been 
firmly  established,  the  security  of  the  free  world 
must  depend  upon  its  strength. 


The  Soviet  threat  is  not  military  alone,  but  po- 
litical and  economic  as  well.  The  Communist 
imperialists  seek  constantly  to  capitalize  on  the 
internal  weaknesses  of  free  nations  and  have  dem- 
onstrated their  ability,  through  political  and 
economic  subversion,  to  seize  new  territories 
without  engaging  the  Soviet  armies. 

Added  Threats  to  World  Peace 

Coalitions  for  resistance  to  aggression  and  the 
strengthening  of  defenses  constitute  the  first 
requirements  for  survival  and  progress.  But  such 
measures  are  inescapably  tied  in  with  the  eco- 
nomic advancement  and  development  of  free 
nations.  Enduring  military  strength  cannot  be 
built  on  a  shaky  economic  foundation.  Nor  can 
freedom  itself  live  for  long  in  an  atmosphere  of 
social  stagnation  and  marginal  living  standards. 

Poor  productivity,  narrow  markets,  underde- 
veloped resources,  lack  of  technical  abilities,  in- 
adequate diet,  insufficient  output,  high  incidence 
of  disease,  low  literacy  rates,  weak  public  ad- 
ministration, instable  government — wherever  these 
exist,  they  offer  attractive  opportunities  to  Com- 
munist expansion  and  put  a  powerful  check  on  the 
forward  movement  of  free  people  everywhere. 

A  program  for  the  security  of  the  free  world 
must  embrace  measures  to  help  remove  these 
stumbling  "blocks  and  clear  the  path  to  a  better 
future  for  all. 

Healthy,  strong  and  progressive,  our  partner 
nations  can  constitute  a  tremendous  asset  to  the 
spiritual  and  material  strength  of  the  free  world. 
Neglected,  weakened  and  subverted,  they  can  be 
the  means  of  tearing  the  free  world  asunder. 

Our  Security  Depends  on  Mutual  Security 

American  security  is  inseparable  from  the  secu- 
rity of  other  free  nations.  We  are  linked  with 
other  free  peoples  not  only  by  common  ideals, 
but  also  by  mutual  needs.  Our  nation  cannot 
stand  alone.  It  is  strong  and  powerful,  but  it  is 
not  omnipotent. 

The  cold  fact  is  that  our  rapidly  expanding 
economy  has  outgrown  our  resource  base.  Our 
industrial  output  is  almost  altogether  dependent 
on  outside  sources  for  tin,  mica,  asbestos,  natural 
rubber,  chrome,  nickel,  manganese,  cobalt,  and 
other  vital  materials.  Without  these  imports,  our 
economy  would  rapidly  shrivel  up.     In  addition, 


235593—53 2 


we  are  the  world's  largest  importer  of  copper, 
lead,  and  zinc.  Even  crude  petroleum  and  iron 
ore — once  traditional  symbols  of  American  self- 
sufficiency — are  now  on  our  list  of  net  imports. 

Further  Communist  expansion  into  new  areas 
of  the  free  world  would  not  only  strike  at  Ameri- 
can economic  health  but  would  also  add  enor- 
mously to  the  military  and  economic  potential  of 
the  aggressor.  Whenever  any  country  falls  victim 
to  Russian  domination,  its  farms,  factories,  and 
raw  materials  are  automatically  subtracted  from 
the  side  of  the  free  world  and  are  harnessed  to  the 
Soviet  war  machine.  Thus,  the  aggressor  becomes 
stronger  and  the  United  States  becomes  weaker. 
If  such  a  process  were  permitted  to  continue,  it  is 
inevitable  that  the  Soviet  Union  would  eventually 
become  more  powerful  than  the  United  States. 
We  would  then  face  an  uphill  fight  for  survival. 

Our  Allies  Provide  Needed  Strength 

Aside  from  America's  interest  in  preventing  the 
population  and  resources  of  other  nations  from 
being  added  to  the  Soviet  war  potential,  we  also 
recognize  that  many  of  these  nations  can  make 
a  substantial  positive  contribution  to  our  own 
defense.  They  have  the  manpower,  industrial 
production,  technical  skills,  and  natural  resources 
which  might  prove  to  be  the  decisive  factor  in 
deterring  or  resisting  aggression. 

It  is  no  longer  realistic  to  consider  America's 
security  position  solely  in  terms  of  our  national 
defense  facilities.  Any  determination  of  the  size 
of  the  military  forces  required  to  protect  this 
country  in  event  of  war  must  depend  in  great 
part  upon  the  size  and  quality  of  the  military 
forces  under  the  control  of  allied  nations.  The 
amount  of  money  which  America  must  spend  each 
year  for  defense  purposes  is  directly  related  to  the 
extent  of  the  defense  efforts  made  by  our  partners 
abroad.  The  adequacy  of  our  protection  can  only 
be  measured  by  assessing  the  total  strength  of  the 
free  world.  Therefore,  where  America  can  con- 
tribute to  building  the  strength  of  other  free 
nations  without  serious  sacrifice  of  its  own 
strength,  the  net  result  is  to  enhance  the  overall 
security  of  the  American  people. 

United  States  military  and  economic  assistanca 
can  maximize  the  contributioa  of  other  nations 
to  the  overall  defense  of.  the  free  world.  Many 
free  nations  possess  some  of  the  things  needed  to 


develop  and  maintain  effective  defense  forces,  but 
lack  other  things.  For  example,  a  nation  may 
have  brave  soldiers  but  lack  equipment.  It  may 
be  able  to  produce  small  arms  and  ammunition 
but  unable  to  product  tanks,  planes  or  electronic 
equipment.  Or  again,  a  nation  may  possess 
factories  capable  of  producing  certain  modern 
weapons  but  be  unable  to  activate  these  factories 
because  of  economic  difficulties. 

A  program  of  American  assistance,  carefully 
adapted  to  the  needs  of  the  individual  country, 
can  often  supply  the  "missing  link"  in  the  defense 
structure  and  permit  that  country  to  achieve 
modern,  balanced  forces.  Thus,  because  the 
United  States  pays  only  a  part  of  the  cost,  the 
total  defense  power  made  possible  by  American 
assistance  is  far  greater  than  could  be  produced 
by  the  same  expenditure  of  money  and  resources 
for  other  purposes. 

For  the  foregoing  reasons,  it  is  evident  that 
what  we  make  available  to  other  nations  in  mili- 
tary equipment,  economic  resources  and  technical 
help  is  not  a  "give-away  program,"  but  is  a  sound 
and  high-yielding  investment  in  national  safety. 
International  security  expenditures  represent  less 


International  Security  Programs  Made  Up  8  Percent 
Of  Our  Total  Budget  In  The  Last  Fiscal  Year 

U.  S.  Budget 
Fiscal  Y« 

Expenditures  1 
jar  1953 

/..:■■.  .'Other      V.'": 
M:':'.':'-:':'-:':':  OCM  '.'■••':'::':':':::: 
International      #:.-               . 
Security         m- 
Programs       I 

\ 

wF^  y ' 

^^■ta^,      ^^r 

1  Estimated 

than  10  percent  of  our  national  budgetary  expendi- 
tures. In  terms  of  the  total  effort  of  the  free 
world  the  cost  is  small,  but  in  terms  of  increased 
strength  the  dividends  are  enormous. 

Where  We  Are  Heading 

Mutual  Security  Aims  Redefined 

The  direction  of  our  leadership  is  determined  by 
the  nature  of  the  problem  before  us.  The  problem 
of  achieving  mutual  security  is  many-sided.  The 
Mutual  Security  Program  must,  accordingly,  press 
forward  on  all  fronts  with  these  key  objectives: 

First. — To  attain  and  maintain  within  the 
framework  of  democratic  institutions  the  defensive 
strength,  political  stability,  and  economic  growth 
which  is  necessary  for  the  free  world. 

Second. — To  build  for  the  United  States  and  our 
partner  nations  an  effective  counterforce  against 
totalitarian  aggression,  pacing  the  necessary 
military  buildup  so  that  it  does  not  outstrip  our 
collective  economic  capabilities.  For  us,  as  well 
as  our  allies,  a  judicious  balance  must  be  main- 
tained between  the  mflitary  effort  and  economic 
stability. 

Third. — To  strengthen  the  efforts  of  the  peoples 
of  the  free  world  in  realizing  their  full  capabilities 
for  developing  their  resources  within  expanding 
economies  and  stable  political  situations.  This 
applies  particularly  to  the  economically  under- 
developed areas  where  a  sound  economic  founda- 
tion is  essential  for  the  growth  of  democratic 
institutions.  Only  in  this  way  can  we  jointly  root 
out  those  conditions  which  invite  subversion, 
weaken  the  will  for  freedom,  and  imperil  the 
survival  of  democracy. 

Fourth. — To  strengthen  the  efforts  towards 
regional  political,  military,  and  economic  integra- 
tion, thereby  broadening  the  base  of  our  collective 
strength. 

Finally. — To  retain  at  all  times  the  initiative 
for  peace.  The  Mutual  Security  Program  is  proof 
in  being  that  the  United  .States  leads  with  genuine 
deeds — not  merely  words — in  the  determined 
quest  for  world  peace. 

In  moving  toward  these  objectives,  the  needs 
and  problems  of  the  United  States  and  other 
nations  of  the  free  world  must  always  be  con- 
sidered from  a  global  standpoint.  Action  in  one 
area  of  the  world  must  be  weighed  in  relation  to 
reactions  in  other  areas.     It  is  equally  essential 


that  the  United  States  operations  to  carry  out 
these  programs  be  administered  in  such  a  manner 
that  maximum  value  is  attained  for  the  funds  and 
effort  expended. 

Planning  for  the  Long  Pull 

Mutual  security  planning  must  be  of  a  long- 
range  nature.  Just  as  we  have  no  evidence  that 
the  threat  to  our  security  has  diminished,  neither 
can  we  predict  a  date  on  which  this  threat  may 
reach  maximum  proportions. 

Any  program  so  far-reaching  in  purpose  and  so 
vital  to  national  safety  and  well-being  calls  for 
integrated  and  carefully  thought  out  planning. 
Obviously,  we  cannot  proceed  efficiently  with  a 
patchwork  of  disjointed  ideas  or  a  series  of 
emergency  improvisations.  Nor  is  it  good  policy 
to  operate  with  day-to-day,  blow-hot-blow-cold 
methods  in  meeting  conditions  that  promise  to  be 
with  us  for  a  number  of  years. 

What  plans  we  make  should  be  designed  so 
that  the  efforts  of  the  United  States  and  our  allies 
can  be  carried  forward  with  maximum  efficiency 
and  minim um  strain  over  a  sustained  period. 
This  means  building  steadily  at  a  pace  our 
respective  economies  can  bear  without  breaking. 

We  simply  cannot  aim  for  a  fixed  target  by  a 
fixed  date,  as  if  we  were  preparing  for  a  D-day  of 
our  own  making.  We  have  no  aggressive  intent. 
The  potential  threat  to  our  security  is  both 
immediate  and  long  term.  We  must  move  for- 
ward with  flexibility  of  action  and  continuity  of 
purpose.  Only  in  this  way  can  deep-rooted  and 
lasting  results  be  achieved. 

A  Period  of  Achievement 

The  first  6  months  of  the  year  witnessed  a 
number  of  noteworthy  accomplishments  in  our 
Mutual  Security  Program  which  measurably 
advanced  the  objectives  of  free  world  security. 

Tightening  the  Framework. — It  was  evident 
to  the  Administration  that  the  organizational  and 
administrative  structure  through  which  the  Mu- 
tual Security  Program  had  been  operated  needed 
thorough  revision.  Organizational  arrangements 
for  the  conduct  of  foreign  affairs  had  been  built 
upon  numerous  separate  statutes.  This  resulted 
in  a  scattering  of  programs  within  the  Executive 
Branch.     The  new  Administration  found  consid- 


erable  duplication  and  conflict  of  responsibilities 
and  powers  in  existing  activities  aimed  at  provid- 
ing military,  economic,  and  technical  assistance  to 
foreign  countries.  Therefore,  it  was  essential  to 
take  steps  to  tighten  lines  of  responsibility,  pre- 
vent duplication,  and  promote  operating  efficiency. 

On  June  1,  by  Executive  order,  the  President 
transferred  to  the  jurisdiction  of  the  Director  for 
Mutual  Security  the  operating  responsibilities  for 
certain  United  States  technical  assistance  pro- 
grams, formerly  vested  in  the  Secretary  of  State. 
The  Director  also  assumed  operating  functions 
with  respect  to  United  States  participation  in  in- 
ternational programs  of  technical  assistance,  relief 
and  rehabilitation,  and  refugees. 

Simultaneously,  the  President  announced  a  plan 
for  reorganizing  the  departments  of  the  United 
States  Government  concerned  with  the  conduct  of 
its  affairs  overseas.  The  plan  reaffirmed  the  his- 
toric responsibility  of  the  Department  of  State  as 
the  agency  responsible  for  the  development  and 
control  of  foreign  policy  and  relations  with  foreign 
governments.  It  also  reasserted  the  responsibility 
of  the  Chief  of  Diplomatic  Mission  for  providing 
effective  coordination  of,  and  policy  direction  with 
respect  to,  all  United  States  Government  activities 
in  a  foreign  country.  This  reorganization  plan 
became  effective  on  August  1,  1953. 

The  new  organization  regroups  foreign  assistance 
and  related  economic  operations  within  a  single 
agency,  the  Foreign  Operations  Administration. 
The  Office  of  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security 
and  the  Mutual  Security  Agency  are  abolished, 
and  the  functions  transferred  to  the  FOA.  The 
Office  of  the  United  States  Representative  in 
Europe  is  also  abolished.  A  new  United  States 
mission  (United  States  Mission  to  NATO  and 
European  Regional  Organizations)  is  established. 
The  chief  of  the  mission  reports  to  and  receives 
instructions  from  the  Secretary  of  State.  Repre- 
sentatives of  the  Secretary  of  Defense,  Secretary 
of  Treasury,  and  the  Director  of  the  FOA  are 
included  in  this  mission. 

This  reorganization  measure  has  been  designed 
to  achieve  more  unified  direction  and  integrated 
operation  of  foreign  assistance  programs,  as  well 
as  substantial  economies  and  greater  efficiency 
of  operation. 

Our  Global  Military  Shipments  Acceler- 
ated.— The  value  of  shipments  of  mditary 
weapons  and  equipment  to  our  allies  continued  to 


rise  at  an  accelerating  rate.  Shipments  in  the  first 
half  of  1953  were  almost  two-thirds  higher  than 
during  the  preceding  6  months.  Security  restric- 
tions do  not  permit  publication  of  details  by 
specific  area,  but  on  a  global  basis  the  major 
items  delivered  since  the  beginning  of  the  program 
through  May  3 1 ,  1953 ,  included : 

81.328    electronics    and    signal    equipment 
items. 

26,564  tanks  and  combat  vehicles. 

140,865  motor  transport  vehicles. 

25,234  artillery  pieces. 

19,855,000  rounds  of  artillery  ammunition. 

510  Navy  vessels. 

4,126  aircraft. 

Almost  1.5  million  small  arms  and  machine 

guns   were   shipped,    along   with   about   738 

million  rounds  of  small  arms  and  machine  gun 

ammunition. 

Military  shipments  to  Indochina  were  made  on 

a  high  priority  basis  and  included  vital  artillery 

pieces,   military    vehicles,    and    certain   types   of 

necessary  aircraft. 

In  Latin  America,  Brazil,  Uruguay,  and  the 
Dominican  Republic  ratified  the  necessary  agree- 
ments to  make  them,  eligible  for  United  States 
military  assistance. 

Increased  Defense  Efforts  in  Europe. — Our 
European  allies  have  continued  to  increase  then- 
defense  expenditures  for  troop  pay,  materiel, 
construction,  and  other  military  purposes.  Since 
the  signing  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  in  1949, 
our  allies  have  increased  the  level  of  their  annual 
expenditures  by  120  percent.  Estimated  Euro- 
pean NATO  defense  expenditures  for  the  1952-53 
fiscal  year,  according  to  the  NATO  Secretary- 
General,  are  nearly  $12  billion,  as  against  a  little 
more  than  $5  billion  in  1949-50.  Moreover, 
Western  Europe's  production  of  major  military 
materiel  for  the  year  ended  June  30,  1953,  totaled 
more  than  $3  billion,  a  fourfold  increase  over 
pre-Korean  levels. 

Offshore  Procurement. — The  end-items  pro- 
duced and  shipped  from  the  United  States  are 
being  augmented  by  the  offshore  procurement 
program.  During  the  first  half  of  1953,  this 
program  gained  momentum  in  Europe,  enabling 
the  European  nations  to  produce  an  increasing 
quantity  of  military  equipment  and  supplies  in 
their  own  factories.  Through  June  30,  1953,  about 
$2.2  billion  had  been  awarded  to  the  European 


United  States  weapons  and  equipment  for  our  Allies  ready  for  shipment  under  the  Mutual  Security  Program. 


countries  in  offshore  procurement  contracts  by  the 
United  States  military  services.  In  addition, 
nearly  $38  million  worth  of  offshore  procurement 
contracts  for  materiel  were  awarded  in  Japan  and 
Formosa. 

More  Strength  for  NATO. — Expanding  defense 
efforts  in  Europe,  while  adding  appreciably  to 
NATO's  defense  capacity,  have  placed  an  increas- 
ing strain  on  European  national  resources.  This 
was  one  of  the  major  problems  confronting  the 
NATO  cabinet  ministers  at  the  eleventh  ministerial 
meeting  of  the  North  Atlantic  Council  held  in 
Paris  in  April.  The  United  States  delegation  at 
this  meeting  was  led  by  the  Secretary  of  State, 
and  included  the  Secretary  of  Defense,  the 
Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  and  the  Director  for 
Mutual  Security. 

In    reaching    agreement    on    a    firm    military 


program  for  1953  and  a  provisional  program  for 
1954,  the  NATO  ministers  adopted  measures  to 
get  greater  strength  by  less  costly  and  more 
practicable  means.  It  was  agreed  that  military 
needs  must  be  kept  in  balance  with  economic 
realities,  thus  reducing  the  danger  of  excessive 
strain  on  the  budgets  of  the  NATO  countries, 
including  our  own. 

The  program  adopted  provides  for  a  continuing, 
gradual  buildup  in  the  number  of  NATO  forces, 
and  at  the  same  time  calls  for  greater  emphasis  on 
the  quality  of  existing  forces.  Appreciable  im- 
provements in  quality  will  be  attained  through  bet- 
ter organization  and  training,  and  better  equip- 
ment. Reserves  of  supplies  and  materials  will  be 
increased.  It  is  estimated  that  quantitative  in- 
creases plus  qualitative  improvements,  in  combi- 
nation, will  increase  the  overall  combat  effective- 


<*^WNI 


Land,  sea  and  air  forces  of  six  NATO  nations — Turkey,  Greece,  Italy,  the  United  States,  France  and  Great 
Britain — combine  to  launch  a  simulated  early  morning  assault  on  Lebedos  Bay,  Turkey. 


ness  of  NATO  forces  by  as  much  as  30  percent 
during  the  current  year. 

At  the  April  meeting,  the  NATO  ministers  also 
reached  agreement  on  short-term  and  long-term 
plans  for  financing  NATO  airfields,  bases,  com- 
munications, and  other  facilities  used  in  common 
by  forces  of  different  NATO  countries,  and  re- 
affirmed the  Council's  support  of  the  Treaty  which 
will  establish  a  European  Defense  Community. 

Europe's  Dollar  Position  Improved. — Most 
Western  European  countries  have  recently  suc- 
ceeded in  improving  their  dollar  payments  posi- 
tions. This  favorable  development,  however,  was 
to  a  large  extent  counterbalanced  by  the  fact  that 
the  reduction  in  the  dollar  gap  was  achieved 
primarily  through  enforced  restrictions  on  imports 
rather  than  through  an  expansion  of  exports. 


Action  by  the  Coal  and  Steel  Community. — 

The  European  Coal  and  Steel  Community  moved 
into  gear.  On  February  10,  1953,  tariffs  and 
quantitative  restrictions  on  coal  movements  were 
removed.  On  May  1,  the  first  steps  were  taken  to 
open  officially  the  common  market  for  steel. 

Suspension  of  Economic  Aid  to  the  Nether- 
lands, Iceland,  and  Denmark. — In  January,  the 
Netherlands  Government  announced  that,  after 
careful  consideration  of  the  economic  position  of 
the  country,  it  had  decided  not  to  request  fur- 
ther defense-support  aid.  This  accomplishment  is 
especially  noteworthy  in  view  of  the  increase  in 
the  Dutch  defense  effort  in  NATO  since  Korea. 
The  United  States  will  continue  its  program  of 
direct  military  aid  in  the  form  of  arms  and  equip- 
ment for  Dutch  military,  naval,  and  air  forces. 


8 


Technical  assistance  programs  will  also  be  con- 
tinued. 

In  May,  the  Icelandic  Government  also  sug- 
gested the  suspension  of  further  economic  aid. 
At  the  same  time,  it  expressed  its  deep  apprecia- 
tion for  the  effective  and  most  welcome  help  which 
was  given  to  Iceland  in  its  time  of  need.  The 
Minister  of  Commerce  described  in  great  detail, 
over  the  radio  and  in  the  press,  the  great  debt 
owed  the  United  States  by  Iceland  for  this  very 
material  economic  aid. 

In  June,  the  Danish  Government,  too,  proposed 
the  suspension  oi  defense-support  aid  in  view 
of  its  improved  financial  position.  Denmark's 
achievement  in  rebuilding  its  economic  strength 
after  the  Nazi  occupation  of  World  War  II  is  con- 
crete evidence  of  both  the  Danish  people's  own 
great  efforts  and  the  effectiveness  of  our  assistance 
programs. 

Three  more  names  were  thus  added  to  the  list  of 
those  countries  *  which  have  been  enabled  to  re- 
gain their  strength  to  the  point  where  United 
States  economic  aid  could  be  suspended. 

Wheat  to  Pakistan. — Famine  faced  Pakistan  as 
a  result  of  two  successive  years  of  heavy  drought. 
Grave  economic  difficulties  prevented  the  country 
from  financing  the  necessary  wheat  imports  by 
loan  as  it  did  in  1952. 

To  aid  the  Pakistani  people  in  then  time  of  need, 
the  United  States  made  available  up  to  1  million 
tons  of  wheat  from  surplus  stocks.  About  700,000 
tons  are  being  provided  immediately  on  a  grant 
basis.  The  necessary  legislation  was  enacted  on 
June  25,  exactly  15  days  after  the  President's 
emergency  request.  The  first  shipload  of  wheat- 
left  on  June  26,  and  additional  shipments  are 
being  made  as  rapidly  as  possible. 

Mutual  Development  and  Technical  Assist- 
ance.— United  States  leadership  hi  seeking  world 
peace  and  progress  goes  beyond  the  pressing 
necessity  to  manufacture  weapons,  expand  armies, 
and  construct  military  barriers  to  aggression. 
Under  the  program  for  mutual  development  and 
technical  assistance,  we  are  helping  other  free 
nations  to  increase  the  output  of  food,  raw  ma- 
terials and  finished  goods,  to  gain  better  health 
and  education,  to  improve  methods  of  transporta- 
tion and  public  administration,  and  generally  to 


1  Belgium-Luxembourg,  Ireland,  Portugal,  and  Sweden. 


raise  their  living  standards. 

There  are  at  present  over  2,000  American  tech- 
nicians in  various  parts  of  the  world.  These 
experts  are  working  side  by  side  with  the  people 
of  our  partner  countries  in  all  vital  fields  of  de- 
velopment and  training  from  labor  productivity 
in  Iran  or  livestock  production  in  Honduras  to 
disease  control  in  India  and  thermal  power  genera- 
tion in  Formosa.  Closely  connected  with  these 
technical  assistance  measures  are  the  essential 
commodities  and  machinery  we  are  providing  to 
help  the  participating  countries  achieve  stronger 
economies  which  ultimately  can  be  put  on  a  self- 
supporting  basis. 

Emphasis  for  the  Next  Year. — For  the  fiscal 
year  1954,  new  funds  totaling  $4.5  billion  were 
appropriated  for  the  Mutual  Security  Program. 
In  addition  to  this  amount,  the  Administration  was 
authorized  to  carry  over  $2.1  billion  which  was 
unobligated  from  appropriations  of  previous  fiscal 
years. 

The  bulk  of  the  new  funds — $3.2  billion — was 
earmarked  for  military  assistance.  A  little  under 
$900  million  was  appropriated  for  defense-financing 
purposes,  such  as  $85  million  each  to  Britain  and 
France  to  back  up  their  NATO  military  produc- 
tion, and  a  special  fund  of  $400  million  for  the 
Indochina  campaign.  A  special -weapons  item 
of  $50  million  was  made  available  to  encourage  the 
designing  and  initial  production  of  new  special 
weapons  to  be  used  in  the  mutual  defense  program. 
About  $350  million  was  appropriated  for  develop- 
ment and  technical  assistance  programs,  primarily 
for  free  Asia  and  the  Near  East. 

Appropriations  for  multilateral  organizations 
totaled  almost  $80  million.  The  largest  share  of 
this  amount,  $51  million,  will  be  contributed  to 
the  United  Nations  Korean  Keconstruction 
Agency.  The  remainder  will  be  used  for  such 
purposes  as  children's  welfare,  movement  of  mi- 
grants, and  international  technical  assistance 
programs. 

The  Mutual  Security  Program  takes  into  ac- 
count the  fact  that  the  scope  of  the  present  threat 
is  world-wide,  although  the  emphasis  of  the  threat 
may  shift  from  one  region  to  another  as  free  world 
defenses  are  probed  for  weak  spots.  Mutual  se- 
curity operations  therefore,  are  geared  to  build  a 
security  structure  which  will  guarantee  the  great- 
est possible  strength  for  the  free  world  as  a  whole. 


Most  Of  Our  Foreign  Aid  Is  Now  For  Direct  Military  Purposes 


(Billions  of  Dollars) 


U.  S.  Gross  Foreign  Aid 


Total  Aid 


0 
1946 


Non-  Military 


1947 


1948 


1949 


1950 


1951 


1952 


1953 


1954' 


'  Grants  and  loans 

3  Estimate  for  the  Mutual  Security  Progrs 


In  drawing  up  the  new  fiscal  year's  program, 
emphasis  was  shifted  more  toward  Asia  and  the 
Pacific.  Including  the  special  assistance  for 
Indochina,  about  37  percent  of  the  new  funds  for 
the  1954  program  will  be  for  Asia,  compared  with 
14  percent  in  the  previous  fiscal  year.  The 
European  program  will  drop  from  73  percent  of 
the  total  funds  in  1953,  to  50  percent  in  1954. 

Aid  Cannot  Do  It  Alone 

While  it  is  clear  that  the  strength  needed  by 
other  free  nations  cannot  be  developed  and  main- 
tained without  substantial  American  assistance,  it 
is  equally  clear  that  the  Mutual  Security  Program 
alone  cannot  do  the  whole  job.  Other  measures 
are  necessary,  and  it  is  important  that  the  Mutual 
Security  Program  and  our  foreign  relations  as  a 
whole  be  conducted  in  such  a  way  as  to  facilitate 
the  taking  of  these  measures. 

First,  the  countries  of  the  free  world  need  to 
attain  a  greater  degree  of  cooperation  among 
themselves.     In    particular,    it    is    evident    that 


economic  stability  and  the  effective  use  of  defense 
resources  in  Western  Europe  depend  to  a  consider- 
able extent  upon  European  unification.  The 
United  States  has  consistently  supported  meas- 
ures aimed  at  the  integration  of  Western  Europe 
and  has  been  encouraged  by  the  progress  demon- 
strated by  such  bodies  as  the  Organization  for 
European  Economic  Cooperation,  the  European 
Payments  Union,  and  the  European  Coal  and 
Steel  Community.  At  present,  the  United  States 
Government  is  giving  strong  support  to  the  treaty 
creating  a  European  Defense  Community,  now 
before  the  European  parliaments  for  ratification. 
Second,  it  is  clear  that  the  economic  health 
required  for  political  and  social  stability  and  for 
a  sustained  defense  effort  depends  largely  upon 
expanding  trade  among  the  free  nations.  Just 
as  a  human  being  must  exhale-  as  well  as  inhale 
in  order  to  live,  so  must  a  nation  export  as  well 
as  import  to  survive.  To  keep  their  economies 
functioning  properly,  the  countries  of  Western 
Europe  must  turn  to  outside  sources  for  needed 
machinery,  wheat,  cotton,  tobacco,  timber,  chem- 


10 


icals,  and  consumer  durables.  Money  for  such 
imports  can  be  earned  only  by  selling  to  overseas 
buyers. 

In  1938  Western  Europe  carried  on  two-way 
trade  with  Soviet  Russia  and  what  are  now  the 
European  satellites  in  the  amount  of  roughly 
$1.8  billion.  In  1952,  they  had  reduced  that  trade, 
in  comparable  prices,  to  $700  million — a  drop  of 
more  than  60  percent.  Japan's  trade  with  the 
China  mainland  in  1938  was  20  percent  of  its 
total  trade;  today,  it  is  merely  a  trickle — less  than 
one-half  of  1  percent. 

Since  we  expect  the  European  countries  and 
Japan  to  continue  to  curtail  their  exports  to 
Iron  Curtain  countries,  we  must  help  them  find 
other  markets  and  sources  of  supply.  We  must 
reexamine  also  the  numerous  restrictions  which 
deny  many  European  and  Japanese  manufacturers 
the  opportunity  to  enter  our  markets. 

Moreover,  unreasonable  administrative  barriers 
against  goods  of  other  nations  work  against  the 
overall  economic  interests  of  the  United  States. 
American  farmers  and  businessmen  currently  sell 
abroad  about  $15  billion  annually  of  agricidtural 


and  industrial  products.  Unless  other  nations 
can  earn  their  way  by  selling  us  their  cheeses, 
woodpulp,  nonferrous  metals,  silks,  linens,  china- 
ware,  and  perfumes,  these  same  farmers  and  busi- 
nessmen must  be  prepared  to  see  their  world 
markets  shrink  up  accordingly.  The  curtailment 
of  foreign  markets  in  many  cases  would  mean  not 
only  lower  sales  but  very  likely  a  reduction  of 
receipts  below  the  break-even  point. 

Third,  there  is  general  agreement  that  private 
investment  capital  is  a  vital  ingredient  in  any  plan 
for  building  the  economies  of  other  free  nations, 
especially  in  the  underdeveloped  countries.  With 
private  capital,  these  countries  in  Asia,  Africa,  and 
our  own  hemisphere  can  turn  their  own  resources 
to  better  advantage  in  advancing  their  economic 
development. 

The  countries  themselves  can  take  steps  to 
supplement  indigenous  private  venture  capital. 
They  can  seek  private  capital  from  the  more 
industrialized  countries  of  Europe,  from  Japan, 
and  from  the  United  States  by  reducing  the  haz- 
ards to  investment  from  abroad.  Inequitable  tax 
statutes,  expropriation  risks,  unreasonable  employ- 


American  Farmers  And  Businessmen  Depend  Heavily  On  Foreign  Markets 


(Percent  of  U.  S.  Production)' 


60 


IOO 


Rice 


Cotton 


Wheat 


Tobacco 


Tractors 


Machine 
Tools 


Each  symbol  equals  five  percent 
1  Baled  on  3-year  average,  19501952,  except  tractors,  1948-1951. 


265593— Sa- 


il 


ment  controls  and  exchange  restrictions  are 
factors  which  drive  away  the  prospective  investor. 
The  efforts  of  the  countries  to  promote  a  more 
favorable  investment  climate  are  being  assisted 
by  the  Mutual  Security  Program  in  several  ways. 
Advice  is  given  in  the  preparation  of  investment 
laws  and  codes.  Investment  opportunities  are 
disseminated  to  the  United  States  business  com- 
munity. The  guaranty  program  offers  investors 
protection  against  loss  from  expropriation  and 
inconvertibility.  Contracts  with  private  firms 
demonstrate  to  the  people  of  the  underdeveloped 
areas  that  proper  utilization  of  then  resources  by 
responsible  companies  that  have  the  necessary 
technical  knowledge  and  financial  means  will  bring 
lasting  benefit  in  terms  of  higher  living  standards 
and  greater  national  strength.  Extending  tech- 
nical assistance,  improving  health  conditions,  and 
modernizing  government  fiscal  procedures — all 
these  activities  being  carried  forward  under  the 
Mutual  Security  Program  are  helping  to  bring 
about  a  better  climate  for  foreign  investment. 


Freedom,  Peace,  and  World 
Prosperity 

Mankind  would  be  blessed  indeed  if  all  the 
purpose  and  planning,  the  effort  and  resources  that 
now  go  to  hammer  out  the  weapons  of  war  could 
be  put  into  a  great  common  effort  to  improve  the 
hard  lot  of  the  less  privileged.  Unhappily,  there 
is  no  magic  formula  to  brew  instant  peace. 

As  long  as  the  forces  of  aggression  threaten  to 
chain  free  men  to  the  sordid  ambitions  of  world 
domination,  so  long  must  the  free  nations  persist 
in  their  collective  efforts  to  build  defensive 
strength. 

The  United  States  and  its  allies  seek  a  way  of 
security,  security  with  strength  that  will  eventually 
force  an  end  to  the  cold  war  and  at  the  same  time 
keep  us  prepared  for  any  turn  of  circumstances, 
security  that  will  bring  greater  progress  and  pros- 
perity to  the  whole  world.  With  the  Mutual 
Security  Program,  we  are  pursuing  the  best  means 
to  achieve  our  objective. 


12 


CHAPTER  II 


EUROPE 


IN  support  of  United  States  foreign  policy- 
objectives,  the  main  effort  of  the  Mutual 
Security  Program  in  Western  Europe  is  to  develop 
modern,  well-equipped  military  forces  that  will 
stand  beside  our  own  armed  forces  to  deter,  but 
if  necessary  to  check,  any  aggressive  thrusts  by 
the  Soviet  Bloc. 

For  the  United  States,  the  defense  of  Europe  is 
more  than  a  question  of  friendship  or  sympathy 
for  other  free  people.  It  is  also  a  question  of 
keeping  the  free  world's  present  advantage  in 
resources  and  capabilities.  In  blunt  terms,  West- 
ern Europe  holds  the  key  to  today's  balance 
of  economic  power.  Its  pool  of  skilled  manpower 
is  the  greatest  on  earth.  The  capacity  of  its 
industrial  plant  is  indispensable  to  our  own 
industrial  superiority. 

Steel  and  coal,  for  example,  are  the  muscle  and 
sinews  of  war.  In  steel  production,  the  United 
States  and  its  European  allies  now  have  a  lead 
of  more  than  3  to  1  over  the  Soviet  Bloc,  including 
Communist  China.  With  all  Europe  in  Kussian 
hands,  the  Soviet  Bloc  would  gain  the  edge.  In 
coal  output,  our  combined  advantage  is  now  nearly 
2  to  1,  but  if  Russia  could  move  into  the  rest  of 
Europe  the  ratio  would  reverse  to  better  than 
1  to  2  in  favor  of  the  Soviet  Bloc. 

The  conclusion  is  clear.  As  long  as  our  Euro- 
pean allies  stay  free  and  strong,  they  can  make  an 
invaluable  contribution  to  the  defense  of  the  free 
world.  The  chances  for  peace  are  thereby  strength- 
ened. With  Europe's  industrial  might  har- 
nessed to  an  imperialistic  power,  this  country 
would  be  placed  in  the  greatest  peril. 

In  the  interest  of  reinforcing  Western  Europe's 
ability  to  defend  and  support  itself,  the  Mutual 
Security  Program  also  has  important  political  and 
economic  objectives. 


Politically,  it  stands  ready  to  support  European 
measures  for  intergovernmental  or  supra-govern- 
mental cooperation.  These  measures,  grounded  in 
a  common  purpose  and  carried  out  by  common 
institutions,  can  do  much  to  uproot  the  influences 
which  undermine  democratic  processes  and  impede 
progress. 

Economically,  it  seeks  to  accelerate  the  growth 
of  Western  Europe's  production  base  and  the 
achievement  of  a  single  European  market.  An 
expanding  European  economy  will  bring  higher 
living  standards,  greater  stability,  and  more 
defensive  strength  for  the  long  run. 

Outside  the  NATO  countries,  our  efforts  in 
Western  Europe  are  directed  toward  helping 
Austria,  Germany,  Spain,  and  Yugoslavia  to 
achieve  a  greater  measure  of  economic  strength 
and  the  ability  to  resist  aggressive  pressures. 

Military  Defense 

NATO 

The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization 
(NATO)  is  an  indispensable  element  in  the  free 
world's  defense  structure.  NATO  stands  today 
as  one  of  the  strongest  bulwarks  against  Com- 
munist aggression.  The  source  of  its  strength  lies 
in  the  close  association  and  the  collective  power 
of  14  of  the  free  world's  most  industrialized  and 
advanced  nations. 

Two  devastating  world  wars  grew  out  of  piece- 
meal attacks  in  Europe  by  an  imperialistic  power. 
Twice  in  our  lifetime,  we  have  been  shown  how 
utterly  futile  it  is  for  free  men  to  go  separate  ways 
in  the  face  of  a  common  danger. 

NATO  is  a  determined  effort  to  profit  from  the 
bitter  experience  of  the  past.  Under  NATO,  the 
United  States  and  Canada  have  welded  an  alli- 


13 


ance  with  Western  Europe  based  on  the  pledge 
that  aggression  anywhere  in  the  treaty  area  will 
be  regarded  as  an  attack  upon  all  the  members. 

This  attempt  to  put  teeth  into  free-world  warn- 
ings against  seizure  by  force  represents  a  bold 
departure  in  our  foreign  policy.  Never  before 
this  treaty,  had  we  in  a  time  of  peace  agreed  to 
defend  an  Eastern  Hemisphere  country  in  case  of 
attack,  and  never  before  in  peacetime  had  we 
joined  with  other  nations  in  active  measures  to 
develop  stronger  mutual  defenses.  This  commit- 
ment to  help  put  down  aggression  wherever  it 
might  occur  in  the  Atlantic  community  was  made 
within  the  framework  of  the  United  Nations 
Charter. 

NATO  has  gradually  evolved  into  a  smoothly 
functioning  coalition  whose  military  forces  are 
integrated  under  a  single  command.  The  Organ- 
ization provides  for  intergovernmental  cooperation 
in  planning  national  defense  contributions  and  in 
developing  harmonious  political  policies. 


Now,  military  and  civilian  officials  of  the  NATO 
countries  jointly  study  military  requirements  and 
economic  capabilities.  Together,  the  representa- 
tives of  these  nations  produce  a  realistic  program 
for  the  buildup  of  forces. 

During  April  of  this  year  at  a  meeting  in  Paris, 
the  ministers  of  14  countries  concluded  the  1952 
Annual  Review  of  the  NATO  Program.  This 
meeting  climaxed  9  months  of  intensive  study  by 
the  NATO  International  Staff,  the  NATO  mili- 
tary agencies,  and  the  major  military  commands. 
Agreement  was  reached  on  a  firm  military  pro- 
gram for  1953  and  a  provisional  program  for  1954. 
It  was  also  agreed  to  schedule  a  meeting  for 
October  1953  to  determine  firm  goals  for  1954  and 
provisional  goals  for  1955  and  1956. 

The  force  goal  agreements  for  1953  and  1954 
point  up  one  development  in  particular.  Em- 
phasis has  shifted  from  numerical  increases  in 
forces  to  qualitative  improvements  in  actual  com- 
bat effectiveness.     Public  attention  in  the  past 


: 

MCimiF' '"*%! iii  flr 

v 

B^MM 

>; 

-,                    .A 

%.. -. 

Six  155-mm.  self-propelled  guns — part  of  a  shipment  to  France  under  the  United  States  program  for  mutual 
defense  assistance. 


14 


has  been  focused  primarily  upon  numbers  of 
ground  divisions,  but  such  numbers  are  deceptive. 
Divisions  vary  greatly  in  fighting  capabilities, 
ability  to  mobilize  reserves,  strength  of  supporting 
units,  stocks  of  ammunition,  and  numerous  other 
factors.  A  single  fully  manned,  well-trained  com- 
bat division  is  worth  several  with  poor  battle 
efficiency. 

It  is  estimated  that  compared  with  1952,  at- 
tainment of  the  1953  force  goals,  combined  with 
the  greater  quality  emphasis,  will  result  in  a  30 
percent  increase  in  NATO  combat  effectiveness. 
In  ground  forces,  there  will  be  a  moderate  growth 
in  major  units  plus  heavy  emphasis  on  support 
forces.  There  will  also  be  a  substantial  increase 
in  the  number  of  combat  aircraft,  together  with 
necessary  airfields,  supporting  installations,  and 
communications  systems.  Naval  plans  call  for 
more  support  both  in  major  combatant  vessels 
and  in  the  critical  minesweeper  and  escort  types. 
For  security  reasons,  it  is  not  possible  to  disclose 
the  precise  figures  agreed  upon  by  the  North  At- 
lantic Council. 

Infrastructure. — "Infrastructure"  is  the  term 
used  to  identify  the  network  of  military  facilities 
in  any  country  which  is  available  to  support  the 
operations  of  integrated  NATO  forces.  Under 
the  NATO  program,  agreement  has  been  reached 
to  date  covering  financing  agreements  totaling 
approximately  $1.3  billion  from  the  contribution 
of  all  nations  concerned  for  airfields,  fuel  supply 
facilities,  telecommunications,  naval  installations, 
racial ,  and  similar  items.  These  arrangements  will 
fill  the  estimated  needs  of  forces  in  being  by 
December  1954.  The  total  United  States  con- 
tribution, including  obligations  to  date,  is  expected 
to  amount  to  approximately  $534  million  or  about 
41  percent;  however,  since  it  has  been  agreed  that 
the  United  States  shall  not  be  required  to  pay  taxes 
in  Europe,  our  actual  contribution  will  be  approxi- 
mately $470  million  or  about  36  percent. 

The  $1.3  billion  total  program  through  1954  is 
divided  into  four  annual  segments  or  "slices."  The 
fourth  slice  agreed  upon  by  the  North  Atlantic 
Council  amounted  to  about  $407  million.  Mutual 
defense  fimds  to  meet  the  United  States  share  of 
this  last  segment  were  included  in  the  fiscal  year 
1954  Mutual  Security  Program  legislative  request. 

In  addition  to  the  four  slices,  the  North  Atlantic 
Council  agreed  to  plan  on  up  to  $700  million  of 
additional  infrastructure  in  the  1954-56  period. 


Utilization  of  this  amount  is  to  be  conditioned 
upon  demonstrated  requirements  based  on  forces 
to  be  created  in  the  next  3  years. 

Progress  in  actual  construction  has  greatly 
improved  in  the  past  year.  Almost  two-thirds  of 
the  total  number  of  airfields  programmed  are  now 
sufficiently  advanced  to  be  put  into  use  in  an 
emergency. 

The  European  Defense  Effort 

There  is  clear-cut  evidence  of  a  steady  year-by- 
year  buildup  in  the  defense  effort  of  the  European 
countries.  In  terms  of  fiscal  years,  from  1950  to 
1953  the  European  NATO  coimtries  increased 
their  defense  expenditures  by  more  than  120 
percent. 

These  mounting  defense  expenditures  are  re- 
flected in  an  overall  increase  in  the  number  of 
armed  forces  of  the  NATO  coimtries.  In  1949,  the 
present  European  members  of  NATO  had  a  total 
of  approximately  2,450,000  men  under  arms  in 
all  parts  of  the  world.  Lord  Ismay,  Secretary 
General  of  NATO,  recently  reported  that  the 
global  figure  has  risen  to  nearly  3,300,000.  This 
figure  exceeds  the  combined  forces  of  all  these 
countries  in  1938,  a  year  when  most  of  the  major 
European  powers  were  rearming. 

Despite  many  unforeseen  difficulties,  it  is  note- 
worthy that  the  NATO  coimtries  came  remarkably 
close  to  reaching  the  1952  goals  projected  at 
Lisbon.  These  goals — which  excluded  Greek  and 
Turkish  forces — called  for  50  divisions,  4,000  front- 
line aircraft,  and  over  1,600  ships  by  the  end  of 
1952. 

By  December  of  1952,  the  division  goals  were 
virtually  attained,  although  only  about  half  of  the 
reserve  divisions  were  up  to  standard  in  strength, 
equipment,  and  training.  This  shortfall,  however, 
will  be  made  up  this  year.  The  goal  for  aircraft 
was  also  largely  met,  but  ground-support  and  flight 
training  were  below  planned  requirements.  The 
naval  goals  were  filled.  The  goals  for  the  end  of 
1953  are  several  divisions  and  several  hundred 
combat  aircraft  and  naval  vessels  above  the  Lis- 
bon goals.  Most  of  the  planes  will  be  modern  jet 
types.  Similarly,  in  a  key  naval  item  like  mine- 
sweepers, the  total  available  for  European  forces 
will  be  almost  75  percent  greater  than  the  number 
in  existence  in  mid-1952. 

An  increasing  proportion  of  the  European  de- 
fense budgets  is  being  devoted  to  major  materiel 


15 


1  Based  on  expenditures  for  self-financed  production 
of  major  materiel  in  NATO  countries 


and  construction — the  military  hardware  and 
facilities  needed  for  equipping  and  expanding 
combat  forces.  Dining  the  buildup  period,  the 
United  States  supplied  most  of  the  initial  equip- 
ment of  European  units  and  enabled  the  Europeans 
to  devote  a  greater  share  of  their  resources  to  the 
raising  and  training  of  forces.  European  defense 
production  and  construction  has  gained  momen- 
tum, however,  and  in  fiscal  year  1954,  of  every 
$10  to  be  spent  for  defense  by  European  NATO 
countries,  almost  $4  will  go  for  major  materiel  and 
construction,  compared  with  only  $2  prior  to 
Korea. 

For  the  12  months  ended  June  1953,  European 
NATO  expenditures  for  the  production  of  major 
materiel — aircraft,  artillery,  combat  vehicles,  am- 
munition, ships,  and  other  heavy  items  of  equip- 
ment— rose  to  more  than  $3  billion.  This  level 
represents  a  fourfold  increase  over  the  pre-Korean 
level  of  expenditures  for  defense  production. 

Offshore  Procurement 

It  has  become  increasingly  apparent  that  in  ad- 
dition to  raising  and  equipping  troops,  adequate 


preparation  for  defense  of  the  Atlantic  community 
involves  the  development  of  a  strong  mobilization 
base  in  Europe.  In  case  of  war,  equipment  in  the 
hands  of  troops  and  in  reserve  stocks  would  last 
only  a  few  weeks  or  months,  and  the  ability  to  sus- 
tain combat  would  depend  to  a  considerable  extent 
upon  the  rate  of  output  of  critical  items  from 
European  production  resources.  Therefore,  since 
August  1951,  the  United  States  has  been  carrying 
out,  as  an  integral  part  of  its  end-item  program, 
an  offshore  procurement  program  designed  to  ex- 
pand the  defense  production  base  in  Europe. 

In  the  aggregate,  offshore  procurement  con- 
tributes to  meeting  buildup  and  reserve  require- 
ments at  a  lower  cost  than  procurement  solely 
from  United  States  production.  The  savings 
realized  on  certain  items  obtained  overseas  out- 
weigh whatever  higher  costs  there  may  be  for  other 
foreign-produced  items,  so  that  on  balance  a  sub- 
stantial net  advantage  results  from  procurement 
abroad. 

In  achieving  the  primary  objective  of  helping 
to  build  a  European  mobilization  base,  offshore 
procurement  makes  a  special  contribution  to  de- 


16 


velopmg  defense  production  on  a  selective  basis, 
particularly  for  ammunition  and  high  consumption 
rate  spare  parts.  Furthermore,  the  program  em- 
phasizes the  procurement  of  those  items  needed  in 
the  post-buildup  period  and  reduces  accordingly 
Europe's  dependence  on  the  United  States  for 
future  requirements. 

From  the  economic  standpoint,  offshore  pro- 
curement helps  to  conserve  United  States  domestic 
materials  and  industrial  resources.  It  also  eases 
the  foreign  payments  position  of  European  nations 
by  furnishing  needed  amounts  of  dollar  exchange 
and  by  cutting  down  the  dollar  drain  otherwise 
incurred  in  the  purchase  of  spare  parts  from  the 
United  States.     Finally,  it  aids  in  the  improve- 


ment   of    technology    and    productivity    abroad. 

The  military  services  of  the  Department  of 
Defense  awarded  over  $1.5  billion  in  contracts  to 
European  countries  in  fiscal  year  1953.  This  was 
in  addition  to  about  $630  million  of  contracts 
placed  in  the  preceding  12  months.  Contracts 
covered  ammunition,  naval  vessels,  jet  fighter  air- 
craft, tanks,  artillery  pieces,  radio  and  radar  equip- 
ment and  a  wide  range  of  other  materiel,  including 
spare  parts  for  weapons,  vehicles,  and  aircraft. 

Concurrently  plans  have  been  formulated  which 
provide  further  encouragement  and  incentive  for 
United  States  industry  to  engage  in  the  interna- 
tional procurement  program.  Participation  by 
American  business  includes  license  agreements  for 


A  British-made  Centurion  tank,  manufactured  under  the  offshore  procurement  program,  being  delivered  to  the 
Netherlands.  Under  a  $90  million  offshore  procurement  contract  placed  by  the  United  States  with  Great 
Britain,  Centurions  like  this  are  being  produced  for  Holland  and  Denmark  to  strengthen  NATO  defenses. 


17 


the  production  in  Europe  of  United  States-type 
equipment  such  as  aircraft,  jet  engines,  and  spare 
parts.  Where  United  States  companies  already 
have  affiliates  in  Europe,  as  in  the  automotive  field, 
it  is  natural  that  these  affiliates  should  be  the  best 
sources  of  spare  parts  for  items  manufactured  by 
the  United  States  parent  company. 

U.  S.  Participation  in  North 
Atlantic  Defense 

Military  aid  shipments  for  our  European  allies 
during  the  first  6  months  of  1953  averaged  $294 
million  monthly,  compared  to  an  average  of  $177 
million  in  the  previous  6-month  period.  To  a 
large  extent,  the  higher  rate  of  shipments  in  recent 
months  is  due  to  the  substantial  acceleration  in 
deliveries  of  long  lead-tune  items  which  were  con- 
tracted for  under  earlier  programs.  Jet  aircraft 
have  been  coming  off  production  lines  in  increasing 
numbers,  as  have  tanks  and  critical  electronics 
equipment.  The  Navy,  moreover,  has  begun 
deliveries  of  auxiliary  minesweepers  from  United 
States  construction. 

Through  June  30,  1953,  the  value  of  materiel 
shipped    as    grant    aid    to    European    countries 


(excluding  Greece  and  Turkey)  totaled  $4.6 
billion.1  This  amount  included  about  $450  mil- 
lion of  items  shipped  from  excess  stocks.  The 
balance  was  charged  to  appropriations. 

During  his  trip  to  Europe  in  January,  Director 
for  Mutual  Security,  Harold  E.  Stassen,  conferred 
with  the  NATO  commands  regarding  estimated 
delivery  rates  of  materiel  to  NATO  forces  during 
the  remainder  of  1953.  Based  upon  these  con- 
versations, a  list  of  items  reflecting  most  urgent 
needs  was  compiled.  Subsequent  expediting  ac- 
tions were  initiated  to  raise  deliveries  of  critical 
items  above  earlier  schedules. 

The  Defense-Support  Program 

Supplementing  military  weapons  assistance,  the 
Mutual  Security  Program  for  NATO  countries  has 
provided  mainly  raw  materials,  machinery,  and 
equipment  which  in  part  were  used  directly  for  the 
manufacture  of  military  goods  in  Europe.  These 
defense-support  items  were  also  used  in  heavy 


1  Includes  approximately  $300  million  of  materiel  held 
in  United  States  storage,  packed  and  marked  for  mutual 
assistance,  awaiting  delivery  orders. 


Military  Aid  Shipments  To  Western  Europe  Rose  Sharply  In  1953 


300 


(Millions  of  Dollars) 


The  Trend  by  Years 


(Monthly  Averages  in 
Millions  of  Dollars)1 


10 

1953 


'  Value  of  materiel  supplied  exclusive  of  charges  for  repair  and  rehabilitation  of 
excess  stocks  and  packing,  handling  and  transportation.    Includes  value,  of  excess  stocks. 


1  March- December 
3  January-June 


18 


industries — such    as    steel,    transportation,    and 
power — to  backstop  defense  production. 

During  the  6  months  ended  June  30,  1953,  the 
total  value  of  paid  shipments  for  defense  support 
and  economic  aid  for  Western  Europe  (NATO 
countries,  Austria,  Germany,  and  Yugoslavia)  was 
$726  mdlion.  The  value  of  paid  shipments  for  the 
entire  fiscal  year  amounted  to  $1,434  million. 


The  Defense  Support  Program  For  Europe  Was  Made 
Up  Mainly  Of  Industrial  Equipment  And  Materials 

(Paid  Shipments,  Fiscal  year  Ended  June  30,  1953) 
The  Commodity  Program 

(Millions  of  Dollars) 

600 


1 

t       ,«,:4 

Food 


Raw  Mor.     Machinery  Fue 

B  Semi.  Fin.  a  Vehicles 
Goods 

The  Major  Recipients 

(Millions  of  Dollars)1 
0  100  200  300 


Feed  a 

Fert.liier 


Yugo- 
slavia 


Germany 

(Fed,  Rep) 


Turkey 

Nether- 
lands 


Includes  paymenis  for  freight,  services  and  EPU 


Through  the  European  industrial  projects  pro- 
gram, economic  and  defense-support  aid  furnished 
by  the  United  States  has  in  part  gone  into  re- 
habilitation,   expansion,    and    modernization    of 


Western  Europe's  basic  industries  and  public 
utilities. 

The  facilities  which  have  expanded  directly 
through  purchases  of  dollar-financed  imports  of 
equipment  and  materials,  and  in  some  cases 
through  United  States  technical  services,  now 
constitute  a  vital  segment  of  Western  Europe's 
defense  mobilization  base.  These  facilities  in- 
clude key  producers  such  as  the  SOLLAC  and 
USINOR  steel  mills  in  France. 

The  SOLLAC  project,  now  about  three-fourths 
completed,  will  be  one  of  the  largest  continuous 
strip  steel  mills  on  the  European  continent. 
Located  in  the  heart  of  France's  iron  ore  region, 
SOLLAC  operations  will  be  designed  to  produce 
hot-  and  cold-rolled  strips  of  the  type  needed  for 
the  manufacture  of  jeeps,  military  trucks,  and 
armored  vehicles.  Another  project  affiliated  with 
SOLLAC  provides  for  the  expansion  of  the  plate 
and  slabbing  mill  at  Dilligen  in  the  Saar.  Com- 
pletion of  these  facilities  will  provide  France  for 
the  first  time  with  a  domestic  source  of  medium 
and  heavy  open-hearth  armored  plates  of  the 
type  required  for  the  construction  of  tanks  and 
naval  vessels. 

Other  key  steel  projects  undertaken  with  the 
aid  of  United  States-furnished  equipment,  mate- 
rials, and  technical  services  are  located  in  Austria, 
Belgium,  Italy,  the  Netherlands,  and  the  United 
Kingdom. 

Counterpart  Funds 

Each  European  country  receiving  defense-sup- 
port assistance  under  the  Mutual  Security  Pro- 
gram deposits  in  a  special  account  local  currency 
equivalent  to  the  dollar  value  of  aid  provided  on 
a  grant  basis.  These  deposits  are  known  as 
counterpart  funds.  After  a  portion2  is  trans- 
ferred for  United  States  use,  the  remaining  funds 
are  available  to  the  depositing  countries  to  finance 
programs  approved  by  the  United  States. 

Since  the  beginning  of  the  defense-support 
period  on  July  1,  1951,  counterpart  funds  have 
been  released  primarily  to  advance  the  defense 
buildup  of  the  NATO  countries.  From  that  date 
through  June  30,  1953,  all  counterpart  releases  to 


2  Generally,  5  percent  of  counterpart  funds  deposited 
to  match  dollar  aid  obligatedjprior  to  June  20,  1952,  and 
10  percent  after  that  date,  pursuantjto  the  provisions  of 
the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1952. 


265593—53- 


19 


European  countries  totaled  $2,596  million.  Euro- 
pean counterpart  releases  were  equivalent  to  $327 
million  in  the  6  months  ended  June  30,  1953,  and 
$929  million  for  the  full  fiscal  year.  Of  the  last 
amount,  $531  million  was  channeled  into  military 
projects  such  as  the  production  and  procurement 
of  major  military  materiel,  and  the  construction 
of  military  airfields,  naval  bases,  army  bases,  and 
other  defense  installations.  Other  defense-sup- 
port activities  financed  with  counterpart  funds 
include  the  expansion  of  manufacturing,  agricul- 
ture, electric  power  output  and  mining;  and  the 
construction  of  housing  for  workers  in  essential 
industries. 


The  Bulk  Of  European  Counterpart  Funds 
Was  Approved  For  Military  Purposes 
During  The  Past  Fiscal  Year 

Approvals  for  Withdrawal 
July  1,  1952-June  30,1953 


$929  Million  ' 

(In  Dollar  Equivalents) 


During  the  half  year  ended  June  30,  1953,  the 
equivalent  of  $56  million  of  counterpart  deposits 
was  reserved  for  the  United  States.  These  funds 
are  used  mainly  to  cover  the  cost  of  acquiring 
strategic  materials  for  our  national  stockpile  and 
for  developing  production  of  raw  materials  in 
overseas  areas.  Other  uses  include  overseas 
local  currency  costs  of  administering  the  Mutual 


Security  Program  and  certain  local  currency 
operating  expenses  connected  with  technical 
assistance  projects  and  informational  activities. 

Economic  and  Political 
Developments 

Economic  Progress 

The  outstanding  feature  of  "Western  Europe's 
economy  since  the  beginning  of  1951  has  been  the 
leveling  off  of  overall  industrial  production.  Total 
output  has  moved  within  a  range  circumscribed  by 
the  seasonal  variations  which  are  characteristic 
of  European  production.  For  the  first  5  months 
of  this  year,  average  production  was  142  percent 
of  the  1948  base — only  3  percent  above  the  level 
of  the  corresponding  period  in  1951,  and  1  percent 
over  the  same  period  a  year  ago. 

The  composite  picture  of  output,  however, 
obscures  some  shifts  in  the  pattern  of  European 
production.  Heavy  industries — those  which  con- 
tribute most  importantly  to  defense  production — 
have  continued  to  expand  at  a  moderate  rate. 
Offsetting  these  gains  were  declines  in  soft  goods 
lines.  Textile  production,  which  typifies  the 
trend  in  consumer  goods  output,  was  hardest  hit, 
although  some  recovery  has  been  in  evidence  since 
the  middle  of  1952. 

Farm  production  for  the  crop  year  1952-53  is 
expected  to  duplicate  the  postwar  peak — 15  per- 
cent above  prewar  output — reached  in  the  previous 
year.  Despite  these  sizable  gains,  farm  produc- 
tion per  capita  barely  exceeds  prewar  levels. 
Normal  population  gains  and  the  large  influx  of 
refugees  from  Eastern  Europe  almost  offset  the 
benefits  of  higher  agricultural  output. 

An  important  aspect  of  Western  Europe's  eco- 
nomic situation  in  recent  months  has  been  the 
improvement  in  its  external  balance  of  payments, 
especially  with  the  dollar  area.  This  improvement, 
however,  is  due  mainly  to  national  restrictions  on 
the  use  of  foreign  exchange  reserves  and  to  the 
leveling  off  of  production,  both  of  which  acted  to 
reduce  imports.  It  is  due,  further,  to  the  favor- 
able shift  in  terms  of  trade — that  is,  the  average 
prices  for  Europe's  imports  have  in  recent  months 
been  falling  faster  than  the  prices  received  for 
exports. 

With  the  improved  balance  of  payments  posi- 
tion, gold  and  dollar  reserves  have  been  rising  in 


20 


most  countries,  although  they  are  still  very  low 
in  comparison  with  the  volume  of  trade.  Gold 
and  short-term  dollar  assets  of  European  OEEC 
countries  (excluding  Switzerland)  at  the  end  of 
May  1953  were  $8.1  billion,  a  distinct  improvement 
over  the  March  1952  low  point  of  $6.3  billion. 
The  increase  in  reserves  was  particularly  note- 
worthy in  the  United  Kingdom,  Germany,  and 
the  Netherlands. 

Wage  and  price  trends  have  been  generally 
stable.  Wholesale  prices  fell  moderately  during 
1952,  and  in  most  countries  continued  to  decline 
in  the  first  half  of  1953.     Cost  of  living  prices 


showed  little  change,  and  on  the  whole,  held  close 
to  their  post-Korean  peaks. 

In  retrospect,  Western  Europe  has  made  im- 
pressive gains  during  the  past  several  years  in 
expanding  its  productive  capacity,  in  restoring 
order  to  its  war-damaged  economy,  and  in  re- 
building its  export  trade.  Considerable  progress 
has  also  been  made  in  reducing  the  dollar  deficit. 
Nevertheless,  the  dollar  gap  is  still  large  and  re- 
mains the  most  intractable  economic  problem  of 
the  area.  This  persistence  of  the  dollar  deficit 
was  highlighted  in  the  recent  fourth  annual  report 
of  the  OEEC.     It  was  described  as  an  obstacle  to 


Economic  Developments  In  Western  Europe 

Industrial  Production  Has  Leveled  Off 


The  Annuol 
i8o  |-|         Trend 

,,=    137    138 
113    " 


1949 '50    51    '52 


(Index:  1948  =   100) 


Nol  adjusted  (or  seasonal  variation 
I  I  I  I  I 


JFMAMJJASOND 


Trade  Gap  With  U.  S.  Has  Narrowed 


IV" 

-Exports  to   U.S.- 


I   i   .  I   ,   i   I   i  ,1   i 





I    .    .   I   .   .   I   .  . 


1950 


1951 


1952 


1953 


Prices  are  Stable  or  Declining 


160 
150 
140 
130 
120 
110 
100 

(Index:  J 

jne 

1950  =  100) 

Wholesale  Prices 

\^    France 

/       \    /    /*" 

:x    /""Vx 

•1 

i        ^  £_s:  v\J3ermon>'   -■ — 

Ji 

ss—,^  Netherlands 

if/ 

.  .  1  .  .  1  .  .  1  .  . 

Italy 
,  ,1  ,  ,  1  ,  ,  1,  , 

_,_■.!  ,  , 

1950 

1951                         1952                1953 

Hard  Currency  Reserves  are  Up  Moderately 


(Billions  of  Dollars) 

Gold  and  Short-Term  Dollar  Assets 


I  Other  OEEC   Countries 


United   Kingdom 


1950 


1951 


1952 


1953 


1  May  data 

3  Excluding  Switzerland 


21 


economic  progress,  forcing  the  adoption  of  re- 
strictive measures,  which  in  turn,  limit  the  possi- 
bility of  expanding  production  and  productive 
capacity. 

The  OEEC  report  emphasized  the  necessity  for 
a  plan  of  action  which  would  lead  to  a  solution  of 
the  dollar  problem.  Such  a  plan,  it  was  indicated, 
"must  provide  for  the  maintenance  and  develop- 
ment of  a  Europe  able  to  attain  its  basic  ob- 
jectives without  American  economic  aid." 

Economic  Conferences 

Representatives  of  the  United  States  and  of  the 
Organization  for  European  Economic  Cooperation 
concluded  on  April  16,  a  week  of  intensive  explora- 
tory discussions  on  the  common  economic  and 
financial  problems  of  the  North  Atlantic  area. 
The  delegates  stressed  the  urgent  need  for  action 
along  particular  lines. 

In  substance,  it  was  agreed  that  the  task  facing 
Europe  is  to  continue  the  cooperative  efforts  which 
have  already  produced  important  results.  Al- 
though the  total  volume  of  European  exports  to 
the  rest  of  the  world  is  about  two-thirds  above  the 
prewar  level,  dollar  earnings  from  exports  must 
be  still  further  increased.  To  that  end,  and  in 
order  to  meet  other  vital  needs,  especially  in  the 
field  of  defense,  European  production  and  pro- 
ductivity must  be  increased.  European  exports 
should  be  made  more  competitive.  In  addition, 
further  efforts  should  be  made  to  reduce  trade 
restrictions,  both  among  the  European  countries 
themselves  and  with  the  rest  of  the  world. 

It  was  pointed  out  that  the  United  States  could 
play  a  role  in  promoting  conditions  for  the  expan- 
sion of  world  trade  and  payments  by  measures  in 
the  fields  of  commercial  policy,  foreign  investment, 
and  raw  materials.  The  European  countries 
have  a  great  interest  in  increasing  exports  to  our 
country,  so  as  to  reduce  the  present  payments  im- 
balance. United  States  investment  abroad  could 
assist  in  making  possible  a  freer  international 
trade  and  payments  system.  It  would  be  useful, 
moreover,  if  ways  could  be  found  to  moderate  the 
widespread  disturbances  caused  by  violent  fluctu- 
ations in  the  prices  of  raw  materials. 

Communist  Strength 

At  the  present  time,  Communist  strength  in 
the  Western  European  countries  receiving  United 
States  aid  is  considerably  weaker  than  during  the 


immediate  postwar  years.  Today,  the  Com- 
munist Party  has  no  representation  in  the  British 
Parliament,  has  lost  ground  steadily  in  national 
and  local  elections,  and  plays  an  insignificant  role 
in  the  trade  union  movement.  In  Western  Ger- 
many, Communist  voting  strength  has  decreased 
to  4  percent  of  the  electorate,  and  the  Party's 
influence  in  trade  union  affairs  is  relatively 
unimportant.  Party  membership,  parliamentary 
representation,  and  influence  in  trade  unions  have 
also  declined  substantially  in  the  Benelux  coun- 
tries, Norway  and,  Denmark. 

In  France  and  Italy,  however,  recent  political 
developments  leave  little  room  for  complacency. 
There  exist  in  these  countries,  the  strongest  Com- 
munist Parties  in  the  free  world,  and  the  Com- 
munists have  substantially  retained  their  voting 
strength. 

It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  most  of 
the  Communist  votes  in  France  and  Italy  are 
protest  votes  against  unsatisfactory  living  con- 
ditions and  unpopular  political  measures.  Actual 
Communist  Party  membership  is  only  a  small 
percentage  of  Communist  vo  ting  strength.  Never- 
theless, so  long  as  the  Communists  can  command 
widespread  popular  support,  the  stability  and 
effectiveness  of  democratic  governments  will  suffer, 
and  the  danger  of  an  eventual  seizure  of  power  by 
the  Communists  cannot  be  ignored.  This  danger 
would,  of  course,  be  aggravated  by  any  serious 
deterioration  of  economic  conditions.  These  facts 
indicate  the  importance  of  continued  United 
States  attention  to  Europe's  economic  position, 
and  emphasize  the  importance  of  the  principle 
enunciated  by  Secretary  of  State  Dulles  with 
respect  to  maintaining  a  realistic  balance  between 
military  efforts  and  economic  capabilities. 

Toward  European  Unity 

European  progress  in  economic  unification  and 
political  federation  is  an  essential  element  in 
providing  increased  strength,  and  it  is  the  policy 
of  the  United  States  Government  to  support 
measures  directed  toward  European  integration. 

The  movement  toward  unity  in  Europe  aims 
at  the  elimination  of  national  economic  barriers 
so  that  there  can  be  a  freer  flow  of  trade  and  a 
more  efficient  use  of  European  manpower  and 
materials.  It  aims  at  coordinating  and  recon- 
ciling national  policies  and  programs  that  might 


22 


otherwise  conflict.  It  aims  also  at  the  pooling  of 
military  forces  in  order  to  create  stronger  defenses. 
In  both  NATO  and  OEEC  there  has  been  an 
intensive  process  of  mutual  examination  of  na- 
tional economic  problems  and  capabilities.  There 
has  been  increasing  evidence  of  a  willingness  to 
make  policy  readjustments  in  light  of  the  common 
need  in  matters  which  have  traditionally  been 
considered  to  be  questions  of  domestic  concern 
alone.  Within  NATO,  the  process  of  reviewing 
one  another's  programs  and  achieving  harmoniza- 
tion of  national  policies  is  being  extended  through 
the  Annual  Review  and  the  exchange  of  views 
on  current  political  problems  of  common  interest. 
Another  example  of  cooperation  achieved  through 
INATO  is  the  NATO  International  Staff's  work 
on  coordinated  defense  production  programming. 

European  Defense  Community 

It  has  been  noted  already  that  NATO  possesses 
a  large  part  of  the  world's  industrial  power.  But 
one  very  important  industrial  nation  of  Europe 
is  missing  from  the  Western  defense  system — the 
Federal  Republic  of  Germany.  There  is  no  ques- 
tion that  Germany's  manpower,  skills,  resources, 
and  industrial  facilities  are  of  the  utmost  im- 
portance to  any  satisfactory  plan  for  European 
defense. 

Events  of  the  past  half  century  have  made 
many  of  the  peoples  of  Western  Em-ope  extremely 
reluctant  to  accept  the  reestablishment  of  a 
German  national  army,  even  though  they  may 
recognize  the  value  of  a  German  defense  contri- 
bution. The  solution  to  this  intricate  problem 
was  largely  thought  out  by  the  leaders  of  the 
continental  European  governments.  A  plan  was 
drawn  up  which,  in  essence,  would  restore  German 
sovereignty,  but  allow  Germany  to  rearm  only  as 
an  integral  part  of  a  supranational  European 
Defense  Community. 

In  addition  to  Western  Germany,  the  EDO 
would  embrace  France,  Italy,  Belgium,  Luxem- 
bourg, and  the  Netherlands.  It  would  operate 
within  the  general  framework  of  NATO,  and  its 
common  army  would  be  under  the  supreme  NATO 
command.  A  Treaty  embodying  this  plan  was 
drawn  up  and  signed  by  the  six  participating 
nations  on  May  27,  1952. 

The  United  States  has  vigorously  supported 
the  EDC  plan  as  the  best  means  of  achieving  an 
adequate    defense    system    in    Western    Europe. 


However,  there  have  been  many  obstacles  to  the 
approval  of  EDC,  and  final  parliamentary  action 
has  suffered  repeated  delays.  Aware  of  the 
seriousness  of  this  situation,  Secretary  of  State 
Dulles  and  Mutual  Security  Director  Stassen 
visited  each  of  the  EDC  countries  shortly  after 
taking  office  and  surveyed  at  first  hand  the  likeli- 
hood of  the  Communitj-'s  coming  into  being. 
Shortly  thereafter,  Mr.  David  Bruce  was  ap- 
pointed United  States  Representative  to  the 
six-nation  community.  In  addition  to  represent- 
ing the  United  States  in  the  Coal  and  Steel  Com- 
munity, he  will  also  act  as  the  President's  observer 
on  matters  relating  to  the  proposed  EDC  and  the 
European  Political  Community.  During  March 
and  April,  leaders  of  various  EDC  countries 
visited  Washington,  and  the  importance  of  EDC 
was  discussed  in  their  talks  with  the  President 
and  Secretary  of  State. 

As  a  result  of  these  steps,  EDC  received  new 
impetus.  Germany's  two  legislative  bodies  have 
already  ratified  the  treaty,  and  the  French, 
Belgian,  Dutch,  and  Luxembourg  Governments 
have  presented  the  treaty  to  their  parliaments. 
Consideration  by  Italy  was  delayed  by  the  spring 
elections.  Governmental  reorganization  has  also 
delayed  action  in  France. 

Action  on  EDC  by  the  European  parliaments  is 
influenced  by  various  political  factors,  some  of 
them  extremely  delicate.  In  so  sweeping  and 
far-reaching  an  enterprise,  it  is  only  natural  that 
European  legislators  wish  to  consider  thoroughly 
the  implications  of  giving  up  control  over  national 
defense  to  a  supranational  authority.  However, 
executive  officials  of  the  European  governments 
have  been  unwavering  in  their  support  of  EDC, 
and  it  is  hoped  and  expected  that  the  European 
parliaments  will  take  favorable  action  to  complete 
this  important  project  without  undue  delay. 

The  European  Coal  and  Steel  Community 

On  February  10,  1953,  as  previously  scheduled, 
tariffs  and  quantitative  restrictions  on  the  move- 
ment of  coal  among  the  six  countries  of  the 
European  Coal  and  Steel  community  were  removed. 
This  was  followed  on  May  1  by  the  opening  of  the 
common  steel  market. 

Each  product  in  the  common  market  has 
presented  different  problems  for  the  community. 
In  the  coal  and  steel  industries,  the  high  authority 
of  the  community  acted  in  accordance  with  the 


23 


convention  to  the  treaty,  to  avoid  an  abrupt  shift 
to  free  trade  which  might  bring  serious  hardships, 
notably  to  the  high-cost  Belgian  coal  industry 
and  the  Italian  steel  industry.  To  deal  with  the 
Belgian  coal  problem,  the  high  authority  imple- 
mented the  provisions  made  in  the  treaty  for  a 
coal  equalization  fund  to  operate  during  the  5- 
year  transitional  period.  This  fund  is  to  be  raised 
by  levies  on  the  coal  and  steel  products  of  the 
low-cost  producers  in  the  community,  and  paid 
to  the  high-cost  segment  of  the  Belgian  producers. 
These  subsidies  are  to  taper  off  according  to  the 
speed  with  which  the  Belgian  industry  can  adjust 
to  the  new  situation. 

The  solution  for  Italian  steel  takes  a  different 
form.  This  industry  is  to  have  the  benefit  of  a 
rather  gradual  transition  to  free  competition. 
The  tariffs  protecting  the  industry  are  to  be 
eliminated  by  stages  over  the  5-year  period, 
instead  of  all  at  once.  With  the  exception  of  the 
special  provisions  for  Italy,  steel  prices  were  left 
free  with  the  opening  of  the  common  market. 

In  the  case  of  iron  ore,  the  high  authority  felt 
that  the  slight  disturbances  that  might  result  from 
the  institution  of  the  common  market  were  worth 
risking.  Accordingly,  the  free  market  for  iron  ore 
went  into  effect  without  any  transitional  measures. 

Although  the  community  has  not  been  in  exist- 
ence long  enough  for  a  full  appraisal  of  its  effec- 
tiveness, it  is  clear  that  it  has  successfully  overcome 
many  of  the  obstacles  that  stood  in  the  way  of  its 
developing  from  a  blueprint  into  a  functioning 
reality.  In  the  common  market,  there  has  been  a 
very  distinct  movement  away  from  the  restrictive 
policies  that  have  previously  dominated  European 
coal  and  steel,  and  toward  a  greater  play  of  market 
forces  in  production  and  distribution. 

European  Political  Community 

Plans  are  being  considered  for  linking  the  coal 
and  steel  community  and  the  defense  community 
within  a  European  Political  Community.  The 
political  community  would  absorb  the  institutions 
provided  under  the  coal-steel  and  European  de- 
fense treaties  in  a  more  general  political  framework 
so  that  there  would  be  a  single  set  of  European 
institutions  having  supranational  authority.  In 
the  draft  treaty,  which  has  now  been  prepared  by 
an  ad  hoc  assembly  of  the  coal  and  steel  commu- 
nity, provision  is  made  for  a  directly  elected  Euro- 
pean assembly.    The  treaty  would  also  charge  the 


political  community  with  the  task  of  progressively 
establishing  the  free  movement  of  goods,  capital, 
and  persons  within  the  community  countries. 

Trade  Liberalization 

As  a  direct  result  of  the  European  Payments 
Union,  restrictive  bilateral  payments  agreements 
were  eliminated  as  the  usual  way  of  doing  business 
in  intra-European  trade.  A  multilateral  and  non- 
discriminatory system  of  payments  was  inherent 
in  the  adoption  of  EPU. 

Substantial  progress  has  also  been  made  in  the 
lifting  of  quantitative  import  restrictions.  All 
EPU  creditors  3  and  Italy  have  lifted  quotas  on  85 
percent  or  more  of  their  nongovernment  imports 
from  other  European  countries.  Ireland,  Den- 
mark, and  Norway  have  liberalized  75  percent  or 
more  of  their  imports.  France  and  the  United 
Kingdom  had  achieved  a  very  substantial  degree 
of  liberalization  during  the  first  18  months  of 
EPU,  but  were  later  forced  to  reimpose  quota 
restrictions.  At  the  present  time,  such  quotas 
limit  all  of  France's  intra-European  trade,  and  42 
percent  of  Great  Britain's. 

EPU  has  contributed  greatly  to  the  expansion  of 
intra-European  trade  and  payments.  In  1952, 
the  volume  of  trade  of  the  EPU  area  (which  in- 
cludes the  entire  Sterling  Bloc  and  accounts  for 
about  60  percent  of  world  trade)  was  almost  half 
again  as  great  as  in  1949.  EPU  has  provided  an 
effective  payments  mechanism  for  all  merchandise 
trade  as  well  as  for  all  invisible  transactions,  and 
OEEC  members  have  recently  agreed  to  continue 
the  Union  for  another  year. 


The  concept  of  European  unity  is  thus  finding 
expression  in  a  variety  of  organizational  forms. 
Encouragement  by  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment, in  some  cases  supplemented  by  financial 
assistance,  has  assisted  in  the  development  of  these 
principal  integrating  organizations. 

Although  progress  toward  unification  since 
World  War  II  is  striking  from  a  historical  view- 
point, further  evolution  is  necessary — in  some 
cases,  urgently  so.  In  seeking  to  promote  the 
integration  of  Europe,  however,  the  United  States 
can  be  most  successful  if  it  encourages  and  assists 
the  adoption  of  measures  that  are  European  in 

3  Benelux  countries,  Germany,  Portugal,  Sweden,  and 
Switzerland. 


24 


Trade  Liberalization  In  Western  Europe 


As  of  June  30, 1953 

(Percentage  of  Trade  Liberalized) 
1 00 


90 


80 


70 


60 


:  Liberalized  Trade  I 


-  —  - 


I  Non-Liberalized  Trade 


■a 

Pi 

lol 


sn;s: 

SOt* 


5%ib.% |93 


55% 


Austria,  Iceland,  Greece,  Turkey 


40  50  60  70 

Each  Country's  Proportional  Part  of  Total  Intra-European  Trade 


I00 


origin.  If  the  movement  toward  unity  is  to  have 
deep  and  lasting  effect,  it  will  be  because  the 
Europeans  themselves  believe  this  is  the  best  way 
to  go  forward. 

Other  Programs  in  Europe 

Spain 

In  January  1953,  the  final  portion  of  the  $62.5 
million  appropriated  by  the  Congress  in  the  fall 
of  1950  for  loans  to  Spain  was  committed.  Almost 
60  percent  of  the  loans  approved  was  for  capital 
development  of  manufacturing,  power,  transpor- 
tation, and  mining  facilities.  The  balance  has 
been  used  to  finance  the  import  of  commodities 
such  as  wheat,  cotton,  coal,  fertilizer,  and  tinplate. 

In  view  of  Spain's  strategic  importance  to  the 
general  defense  of  Western  Europe,  the  United 
States  is  negotiating  bilateral  arrangements  with 
the  Spanish  Government  which  will  contribute  to 
the  strength  of  the  common  defense  against  pos- 
sible aggression.  These  negotiations  were  opened 
in  April  1952. 

The  agreements  currently  under  active  negotia- 


tions include:  (1)  the  extension  of  economic  and 
technical  assistance ;  (2)  an  agreement  with  respect 
to  military  aid;  and  (3)  the  use  by  the  United 
States  of  Spanish  air  bases  and  naval  facilities. 
Funds  authorized  by  the  Congress  will  be  made 
available  to  Spain  upon  satisfactory  conclusion  of 
these  agreements. 

Overseas  Territories 

The  dependent  overseas  territories  of  the  Euro- 
pean NATO  countries  play  an  important  role  in 
efforts  to  maintain  free  world  security.  The 
strength  and  internal  growth  of  these  territories 
can  permit  their  peoples  to  achieve  increasing 
security  and  self-sufficiency,  to  protect  their 
interests  with  less  reliance  on  outside  assistance, 
and  gradually  to  attain  a  more  stable  position  in 
the  free  world  community. 

The  territories  provide  strategic  bases  and 
supply  the  United  States  and  Europe  with  critical 
materials,  the  production  of  which,  although 
expanding,  has  failed  to  keep  pace  with  growing 
industrial  requirements.  Their  political  stability, 
which  is  so  essential  to  our  national  objectives  and 


25 


interests,  depends  in  a  large  measure  upon  our 
assisting  in  creating  an  environment  in  which  the 
native  peoples  will  feel  that  their  aspirations  can 
best  be  served  by  associating  and  cooperating 
with  the  nations  of  the  free  world. 

Augumenting  the  self-help  measures  instituted 
by  the  European  countries  and  their  dependencies, 
the  United  States  since  1949  has  furnished  finan- 
cial and  technical  support  for  development  pro- 
jects. This  assistance  has  enabled  the  overseas 
territories  to  expand  their  efforts  in  exploration, 
in  port  and  transportation  development,  and  in 
the  improvement  of  other  facilities  which  are 
needed  to  attract  further  United  States  and  other 
foreign  private  investment  in  materials  production. 

During  fiscal  year  1953,  the  equivalent  of  $14.2 
million  from  the  United  States  portion  of  counter- 
part funds  has  been  committed  for  basic  materials 
development  projects,  and  $692,000  has  been  com- 
mitted for  technical  assistance  in  the  overseas 
territories,  mainly  in  Africa.  In  no  instance  are 
funds  made  available  if  either  the  Export  Import 
Bank  or  the  International  Bank  for  Reconstruc- 
tion and  Development  is  prepared  to  finance  a 
project  under  consideration. 

In  addition,  two  African  territories  of  the  United 
Kingdom  will  benefit  from  aid  extended  under  the 
provisions  of  the  mutual  security  legislation  which 
relate  to  the  promotion  of  free  enterprise.  Nego- 
tiations provide  that  the  equivalent  of  $562,500 
of  United  Kingdom  counterpart  funds  will  be  used 
in  Africa  to  expand  the  activities  of  existing  credit 
institutions  in  making  credit  available  to  local 
small-business  men. 

Productivity 

While  Western  European  output  is  increasing 
in  absolute  terms,  it  is  not  holding  its  own  in  the 
rate  of  increase  relative  to  the  other  large  produc- 
ing areas  of  the  world. 

To  cope  with  the  problems  of  lagging  produc- 
tivity, the  members  of  the  OEEC  Council  have 
set  up  a  European  Productivity  Agency.  Its 
charter,  approved  on  June  17,  1953,  provides  that 
the  Agency  "shall  be  guided  by  the  principles  that 
competition  should  be  encouraged  while  any  busi- 
ness practices  which  result  in  decreased  production 
and  higher  prices  should  be  discouraged;  that  the 
benefits  obtained  through  an  increase  in  produc- 
tivity should  be  shared  to  the  mutual  benefit  of 
consumers,   owners,   and  workers;   and  that   co- 


operation of  management  and  labor  organizations, 
where  there  is  goodwill  on  both  sides,  will  promote 
these  purposes." 

A  total  of  $10  million  in  United  States  funds 
and  European  counterpart  plus  funds  provided  by 
the  OEEC  Council  budget  will  be  put  into  a  3-year 
productivity  program,  administered  by  the  Euro- 
pean Productivity  Agency. 

Under  the  provisions  of  the  mutual  security 
legislation,  the  Congress  directed  that  the  counter- 
part arising  from  $100  million  of  defense-support 
aid  be  used  by  the  participating  countries  in  sup- 
port of  the  productivity  program  objectives.  In 
compliance  with  this  mandate,  agreements  have 
been  reached  with  11  countries  involving  the 
allotment  of  $97.1  million.  This  amount  includes 
$2.5  million  for  the  European  Productivity 
Agency.  The  use  of  counterpart  funds  generated 
as  a  result  of  these  agreements,  and  the  initiative 
provided  by  the  new  agency,  will  give  this  program 
the  impetus  for  a  vigorous  and  aggressive  move- 
ment to  improve  productivity  at  the  plant  and 
farm  level. 

The  European  countries  have  also  made  great 
progress  in  developing  their  own  technical  assist- 
ance exchange  program,  patterned  after  the  ex- 
change between  the  United  States  and  European 
countries.  This  development  is  most  advanced 
in  the  agricultural  field,  and  emphasis  in  recent 
months  has  been  on  group  training  courses. 

Migration 

Overpopulation  in  certain  parts  of  Western 
Europe  presents  a  grave  economic  and  political 
problem.  This  problem,  aggravated  by  the  influx 
of  refugees  from  areas  of  Soviet  domination,  is  a 
matter  of  deep  concern  to  the  free  nations  of  the 
world. 

Studies  made  by  this  Government  and  by  inter- 
national agencies  have  indicated  that  overpopu- 
lation in  Western  Europe  to  the  extent  of  3.5 
million  to  5  million  people  poses  the  task  of  moving 
some  700,000  migrants  annually  for  the  next  sev- 
eral years.  The  present  annual  movement  is 
estimated  at  350,000.  Any  increase  requires  the 
assistance  of  an  intergovernmental  organization 
both  to  help  meet  the  growing  demand  for  man- 
power outside  of  Europe  and  to  facilitate  ocean 
transportation  for  the  actual  transfer.  Acting 
on  these  considerations,  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment took  the  initiative  in  establishing  the  Inter- 


26 


governmental  Committee  for  European  Migration 
(ICEM)  at  Brussels  in  December  1951.  Since 
then,  encouraging  progress  has  been  made  in 
moving  migrants  and  refugees  from  Europe  to 
other  parts  of  the  world. 

The  program  adopted  for  calendar  year  1953 
calls  for  the  movement  of  120,000  persons.  During 
the  first  6  months  of  1953,  the  committee  moved 
in  excess  of  31,000  persons.  This  brings  to 
108,000  the  number  of  migrants  moved  in  the  18 
months  since  the  committee  began  operations. 

Demands  upon  the  committee  for  services  are 
increasing.  Likewise,  membership  is  growing. 
The  recent  addition  of  Argentina  and  Costa  Eica 
has  brought  the  total  membership  to  22  govern- 
ments. The  experience  gained  in  the  first  18 
months  of  operations  indicates  that  the  com- 
mittee can  play  an  important  role  in  international 
efforts  to  deal  with  excess  population  and  refugee 
problems. 

Escapee  Program 

Under  the  Mutual  Security  Program,  supple- 
mental care  and  resettlement  assistance  are  pro- 
vided for  certain  Iron  Curtain  escapees  who  have 
sought  asylum  in  Western  Europe. 

At  present,  16,500  escapees  are  registered  for 
assistance  under  escapee  program  projects  under- 
taken in  the  countries  of  first  asylum.  In  addi- 
tion, 5,100  have  been  assisted  to  resettle  per- 
manently overseas — primarily  in  the  United 
States,  Australia,  Canada,  and  Brazil.  Of  these, 
2,300  were  resettled  during  the  first  6  months  of 
1953. 

Facilities  of  initial  reception  have  been  provided 
in  the  countries  of  first  asylum,  and  camps  and 
living  conditions  are  being  improved. 

The  primary  objective  of  the  program  is  to  help 
escapees  resettle  in  countries  where  they  can 
achieve  self-dependence  and  live  under  normal 
conditions  in  a  free  society.  To  this  end,  voca- 
tional and  language  training  programs  are  under- 
taken to  qualify  escapees  for  existing  immigration 
opportunities,  and  counselling  and  visa  documen- 
tation programs  are  provided.  Prompt  and  ade- 
quate transportation  to  the  countries  of  immigra- 
tion is  secured  through  a  contractual  agreement 
providing  for  reimbursement,  out  of  escapee  pro- 
gram funds,  to  the  Intergovernmental  Committee 


for  European  Migration  for  transportation  costs 
incurred  in  resettlement.  Stringent  security  pre- 
cautions provide  for  thorough  interrogation  and 
examination  of  all  escapees  by  the  appropriate 
agencies  of  the  Allied  Government. 

Special  programs  of  a  limited  nature  have  also 
been  undertaken  for  the  resettlement  or  local  in- 
tegration of  certain  recent  anti-Communist  es- 
capees from  China. 

The  rate  at  which  escapees  arrive  in  the  west 
is  determined  primarily  by  internal  conditions  in 
the  Soviet  orbit  and  by  satellite  security  controls 
along  the  border.  The  accomplishments  of  the 
escapee  program  have  provided  positive  evidence 
of  the  announced  concern  of  the  west  for  the 
populations  behind  the  Iron  Curtain  and  thereby 
have  contributed  to  the  advancement  of  United 
States  objectives  and  planning  in  psychological 
and  related  fields. 

Transfers 

On  May  5,  1953,  $125  million  was  transferred 
by  the  President  from  the  military  appropriation 
to  the  defense-support  appropriation  on  the  rec- 
ommendation of  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security, 
in  consultation  with  the  Secretaries  of  State, 
Treasury,  and  Defense. 

This  was  in  accordance  with  a  provision  in  the 
Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951  as  amended  which 
provides  that  up  to  10  percent  of  the  total  value 
of  the  European  appropriations  can  be  transferred 
by  Presidential  determination  between  the  sec- 
tions which  authorize  military  and  defense-support 
assistance.  Of  the  $125  million,  $60  million  was 
allotted  to  France,  $50  million  to  the  Berlin  stock- 
pile, and  $15  million  to  Yugoslavia. 

The  additional  French  requirement  was  occa- 
sioned by  a  severe  dollar  payments  situation  as 
well  as  a  budgetary  crisis  which  directly  threatened 
the  French  military  effort  in  Indochina.  The 
$50  million  for  Berlin  was  necessary  to  permit  the 
orderly  and  continued  development  in  this  im- 
portant outpost,  of  an  adequate  stockpile  of  food, 
fuel,  and  industrial  raw  materials.  In  Yugoslavia, 
a  severe  drought  had  imperiled  the  ability  of  that 
country  to  continue  to  support  an  adequate  de- 
fense program.  Basic  foodstuffs  and  raw  mate- 
rials had  been  reduced  to  critically  low  levels. 
The  additional  assistance  was  designed  to  prevent 
these  shortages  from  becoming  even  worse. 


26559J-53- 


27 


CHAPTER  III 


The  Near  East  and  Africa 


THE  Mutual  Security  Program  has  provided 
economic  and  technical  assistance  to  the 
Near  Eastern  countries  of  Iran,  Israel,  Egypt, 
Iraq,  Jordan,  Lebanon,  and  Saudi  Arabia,  and  to 
the  independent  African  countries  of  Ethiopia, 
Libya,  and  Liberia.  Military  grant  assistance 
has  been  provided  to  Greece,  Turkey,  and  Iran. 

These  countries  form  a  strategic  land  bridge 
linking  three  continents.  They  hold  some  110 
million  people  in  an  area  of  about  3.5  million 
square  miles.  The  Near  East  contains  over 
half  of  the  world's  proven  petroleum  reserves  and 
accounts  for  about  40  percent  of  all  the  oil  moving 
in  international  trade. 

This  vital  region  is  presently  in  ferment.  Its 
governments  are  beset  by  serious  economic 
difficulties  and  buffeted  by  ever-recurring  domestic 
crises.  Insecure  in  then-  position  and  struggling 
to  consolidate  their  power,  these  governments 
suspect  the  intentions  both  of  one  another  and 
of  the  outside  Western  world. 

There  is  the  bitter  feeling  between  the  Arab 
nations  and  Israel.  The  Arab  people  feel  that 
Israel  will  expand  to  threaten  their  interest  and 
territories.  The  Israelis  feel  that  the  Arabs  may 
try  to  clamp  a  military  vise  on  their  country  and 
ultimately  squeeze  it  out  of  existence.  Ani- 
mosities are  further  intensified  by  the  Arab  refugee 
problem. 

There  is  the  Anglo-Iranian  controversy  over  oil. 
Iran's  economy  totters  with  the  cutoff  of  its  previ- 
ously huge  oil  revenues.  Great  Britain  has  used 
hundreds  of  millions  of  dollars  worth  of  its  hard 
currencies  to  purchase  its  oil  requirements  else- 
where. 


There  is  the  tense  situation  with  regard  to  con- 
trol of  the  Suez.  The  British  and  Egyptian  gov- 
ernments cannot  yet  agree  over  final  authority 
and  management  of  this  vital  base,  its  airstrips, 
and  supply  depots. 

In  all  these  disputes,  so  filled  with  high  emotion 
and  incendiary  nationalism,  the  United  States  is 
avoiding  any  unwanted  interference.  We  have 
been  ready  at  all  times,  however,  to  aid  in  finding- 
peaceful  solutions,  and  our  good  offices  have  always 
been  available  to  interested  parties. 

In  May,  the  Secretary  of  State  and  the  Director 
for  Mutual  Security,  at  the  direction  of  the  Pres: 
ident,  visited  10  countries  in  the  Near  East  to  see 
at  first  hand  specific  country  problems  and  issues. 
It  was  the  first  time  in  history  that  a  United  States 
Secretary  of  State  had  gone  personally  into  this 
critical  area,  and  that  fact  alone  made  a  deep  and 
favorable  impression  on  its  people. 

The  frank  and  intimate  discussions  with  political 
leaders  of  each  country  proved  fruitful  and  bene- 
ficial to  all  concerned.  We  learned  much  of  their 
point  of  view,  and  they  in  turn  became  better  in- 
formed on  United  States  intentions  and  attitudes. 

Despite  the  heavy  frictions  within  the  area,  the 
peoples  of  the  Near  East  share  common  aspira- 
tions for  better  living  standards,  and  these  aspira- 
tions can  no  longer  be  ignored.  Of  course,  it  is 
the  governments  and  the  peoples  themselves  who 
must  carry  forward  the  task  of  bringing  about  a 
better  way  of  life.  The  United  States,  however, 
can  offer  useful  assistance,  not  with  expenditures 
of  dollars  alone,  but  by  demonstrating  practicable 
applications  of  modern  knowledge  to  problems  of 
irrigation,  disease  control,  food  growing,  and  other 
specific  fields. 


28 


The  Near  East  Is  The  Largest  Supplier  Of  The  World's  Oil 
Import  Needs  And  Holds  Over  Half  Of  All  Known  Reserves 


Major  Inter-Continental  Petroleum  Movements-1952 


World  Crude  Oil 
Reserves-  1953 


U.S.SR  and 
Satellites'- 


Technical  and  Economic 
Assistance 

The  United  States  is  helping  provide  the  govern- 
ments of  the  Near  East  and  independent  Africa 
with  the  skilled  personnel  they  have  requested  to 
help  cany  out  their  country  development  pro- 
grams. As  of  June  30,  1953,  some  600  American 
technical  experts  were  supporting  the  efforts  of 
the  people  of  the  area  in  every  vital  field  of  eco- 
nomic and  social  endeavor — in  agriculture,  health, 
education,  public  administration,  resource  de- 
velopment. Working  side  by  side  with  our 
technicians,  the  technicians  of  the  host  govern- 
ment are  learning  through  international  partner- 
ship the  roads  which  lead  to  productivity  and 
progress. 

In  the  fiscal  year  1953,  $34.5  million  was  ex- 
pended for  technical  cooperation  programs  in  the 
Near  East  and  Africa.  This  brings  to  $60.6  million 
the  total  amount  expended  for  these  programs 
since  July  1,  1951. 


More  water  for  irrigation,  better  seed,  modern 
sod  practices,  improved  tools — all  have  brought 
tangible  results.  It  has  been  demonstrated  that 
preventable  diseases  can  be  controlled.  DDT 
spraying  has  brought  about  a  marked  decrease  in 
malaria.  Safe  water  wells  have  cut  down  water- 
borne  diseases.  The  training  of  teachers  and  the 
improving  of  instructional  facilities  and  methods 
have  helped  expand  rural  and  vocational  education. 

To  make  an  immediate  impact  on  the  economic 
difficulties  now  standing  in  the  way  of  area  stabil- 
ity, and  to  improve  relations  with  the  West  with 
a  view  to  obtaining  wider  participation  in  the 
structure  of  the  non-Soviet  world,  a  regional 
approach  must  also  be  made  to  the  problems 
underlying  United  States  relations  with  the  nations 
of  the  area.  For  this  reason,  a  "single  package" 
of  special  economic  aid  funds  has  been  authorized 
for  the  next  year's  program.  This  integrated 
approach  will  enable  the  United  States  to  meet 
specific  situations  of  a  political  and  security  nature 
and  to  take  prompt  advantage  of  opportunities 
for  economic  and  social  development. 


29 


Agriculture 

Far-reaching  programs  are  under  way  that  will 
reclaim  hundreds  of  thousands  of  acres  and  turn 
vast  areas  of  wasteland  into  productive  fields. 

In  Jordan,  the  Arabs  have  witnessed  the  magic 
of  modern  methods.  Water-spreading  techniques 
developed  in  the  western  part  of  the  United  States 
were  introduced,  and  arid  land  that  has  been 
wasteland  for  centuries  sprouted  grass.  The 
Arabs  have  found  that  barren  soil  at  last  may  be 
put  to  fruitful  use.  One  hundred  acres  of  grass 
grew  in  the  desert.  The  yield  per  acre  averaged 
about  2  tons  of  hay  for  camels,  goats,  sheep,  and 
horses,   with   the   stubble   available  for  grazing. 


Interest  in  this  project  sponsored  under  the  Mutual 
Security  Program  was  not  limited  to  officials. 
Bedouins  b3r  the  score  came  from  great  distances 
to  visit  the  area. 

Egypt  and  the  United  States  are  cooperating  in 
a  program  to  reclaim  wasteland  and  resettle 
farmers.  Egypt  today  is  over  95  percent  desert 
land,  and  virtually  all  the  country's  population  is 
squeezed  within  a  narrow  strip  in  the  Nile  Valley. 

An  Egyptian-American  Rural  Improvement 
Service  has  been  established,  and  plans  are  under- 
way to  carry  out  drainage  and  development  work 
in  two  project  areas — Baheira  and  Fayoum — that 
will    reclaim    80,000    acres    and   make   room   for 


A  triumph  of  irrigation  over  desert  at  the  Dujaila  project  in  Iraq — a  part  of  the  Miri  Sirf  Land  Resettlement 
Project..  American  technicians  are  assisting  the  Government  of  Iraq  in  its  program  to  increase  food  pro- 
duction. 


30 


resettlement  of  16,000  families  of  landless  peasants. 
The  land  reform  program  calls  for  the  establish- 
ment of  rural  schools,  the  organization  of  a  system 
of  fundamental  education  for  adults  in  health, 
sanitation,  and  agriculture,  the  development  of 
village  crafts  industries,  and  the  installation  of 
sanitary  water-supply  services  and  health  centers. 

In  Iraq,  a  similar  land  resettlement  project  is 
underway  with  United  States  technical  assistance. 
Under  an  agreement  reached  between  the  United 
States  and  the  Government  of  Iraq,  American 
technicians  will  assist  Iraqi  officials  in  the  fields  of 
agriculture,  irrigation,  education,  health,  and 
housing.  This  program,  known  as  the  Miri  Sirf 
Land  Resettlement  Project,  ultimately  will  include 
19  million  acres. 

A  battle  to  hold  back  the  shifting  desert  sand 
dunes  is  being  waged  in  Libya  with  American  help. 
Mutual  Security  Program  technicians  are  demon- 
strating new  methods  of  dune  fixation  for  prevent- 
ing oases  from  being  engulfed  with  sand.  They 
are  making  it  possible  for  the  work  to  proceed 
faster,  with  less  labor  and  more  dependable  results. 

The  storage  of  grain  is  another  problem  that 
has  bedeviled  this  part  of  the  world  for  centuries. 
Facilities  for  storage  and  protection  from  pests, 
weather  damage,  and  spoilage  are  poor,  and  in 
some  cases  nonexistent.  In  Jordan,  grain  storage 
bins  for  demonstration  purposes  are  being  con- 
structed with  United  States  aid.  In  Egypt,  one 
of  the  projects  is  the  development  of  a  grain 
storage  and  handling  program  to  reduce  grain 
losses. 

Pilots  also  have  been  trained  in  Egypt  in  the 
operation  and  maintenance  of  helicopters  for  dust- 
ing cotton.  Control  of  crop  pests  and  diseases  is 
also  being  achieved  in  other  countries  through 
demonstration,  training,  and  introduction  of  new 
chemicals. 

The  growing  of  fodder  for  the  milk  and  beef 
herds  has  resulted  in  the  adoption  of  new  irriga- 
tion and  dry-farming  methods.  An  Israeli  tech- 
nician in  this  field  made  a  special  trip  to  the 
United  States  to  study  and  observe  American 
techniques  for  possible  adaptation  in  Israel.  An 
American  wool  expert  has  demonstrated  to  the 
wool  growers  of  the  province  of  Cyrenaica  in 
Libya  how  their  returns  can  be  more  than  doubled 
by  better  sorting,  grading,  and  cleaning  methods. 


Health 

Healthy  people  are  a  nation's  greatest  asset. 
The  Mutual  Security  Program's  health  and  sani- 
tation program  is  aimed  directly  at  reducing  the 
incidence  of  preventable  diseases  by  improving 
the  medical  services  to  the  people  and  instituting 
better  water  sanitation  facilities. 

Saudi  Arabia  and  Iran,  like  so  many  other  coun- 
tries in  the  Near  East,  have  a  high  rate  of  malaria 
and  other  diseases.  A  public  health  program,  con- 
centrating on  preventive  measures,  is  underway 
in  Saudi  Arabia.  A  DDT  antimalaria  spraying 
campaign  was  carried  out  in  Iran  on  a  nationwide 
scale  by  Iranian  technicians  trained  for  the  job  by 
American  experts.  Specially  designed  mobile 
health  units  are  being  used  to  demonstrate  tra- 
choma treatments  and  to  train  health  technicians 
in  Libya. 

In  many  countries,  high  priority  has  been  given 
to  drilling  wells  to  supply  sanitary  water  to  meet 
village  needs  and  to  help  irrigate  the  land.  In 
Liberia,  the  government's  first  municipal  water 
supply  and  sewerage  systems  virtually  are  com- 
pleted in  the  capital  city  of  Monrovia.  In  Iran, 
work  has  begun  on  a  water-treatment  plant  for 
Tehran,  one  of  the  largest  cities  in  the  world  with- 
out a  pure  water  supply.  Elsewhere  in  Iran, 
deep-water  wells  are  being  drilled.  These  wells 
will  be  equipped  with  pumps  and  turned  over  to 
authorities  to  be  operated  by  a  village  or  a  special 
cooperative.  The  United  States  is  also  assisting 
in  the  construction  of  a  central  government  labora- 
tory in  Jordan  that  will  be  devoted  to  all  phases 
of  plant  culture,  veterinary  study,  and  general 
chemistry. 

In  oil -rich  Saudi  Arabia,  the  development  of  the 
country  and  the  improvement  of  living  conditions 
depends  primarily  on  one  factor — water.  There, 
as  in  many  other  countries,  water  is  scarce  and 
has  to  be  carried  for  many  miles.  Finding  water 
in  this  thirsty  land  was  a  task  that  was  tackled 
by  topnotch  American  hydrologists  who  described 
it  as  the  toughest  geological  problem  anyone  ever 
came  up  against.  But  additional  water  supplies 
have  been  found. 

Education 

A  primary  objective  in  education  has  been  to 
demonstrate  not  only  how  existing  facilities  can 


31 


be  expanded  but  why  certain  types  of  programs 
should  be  established  where  none  had  previously 
existed.  Fulfillment  of  this  objective  takes  many 
forms:  training  capable  teachers,  improving  cur- 
ricula and  methods  of  teaching,  reorganizing  school 
administration,  and  providing  better  textbooks. 
The  emphasis  has  been  on  elementary  and  voca- 
tional education  in  both  rural  and  urban  areas. 

Special  courses  are  being  conducted  at  the 
American  University  at  Beirut,  Lebanon,  in  agri- 
culture and  engineering,  public  health,  economics 
and  finance,  and  public  administration.  These 
courses  are  designed  to  train  students  of  Arab 
nations  for  public  service  in  the  four  fields  con- 
sidered essential  to  the  economic  development  of 
the  region. 

Under  a  bilateral  agreement,  the  University  of 
Arizona  is  cooperating  in  the  development  of  the 
agricultural  college  at  Abu  Gheraib  in  Iraq. 
Teachers  have  been  provided  for  agricultural 
courses,  and  the  college  is  being  developed  into  a 
center  for  research  and  agricultural  extension. 
Also  in  Iraq,  Bradley  University  of  Peoria,  111.,  is 
helping  to  establish  a  technical  training  school  in 
Baghdad.  This  school,  to  be  named  the  American 
Technical  Institute,  is  expected  to  be  in  full 
operation  next  fall  with  training  courses  adapted 
to  Iraq's  needs. 

By  a  similar  agreement,  the  Imperial  College  of 
Agriculture  is  being  established  in  Ethiopia 
through  the  cooperation  of  Oklahoma  A.  &  M.  Col- 
lege. It  is  being  modeled  along  the  lines  of  a 
land-grant  college,  with  teaching,  research,  and 
extension.  Also  in  Ethiopia,  American  educa- 
tional specialists  are  cooperating  in  the  staffing 
and  improving  of  primary  and  secondary  schools, 
as  well  as  technical,  agricultural,  and  handicraft 
schools. 

In  Iran,  more  than  6,000  children  in  one  region 
alone  are  now  able  to  go  to  school  as  the  result  of 
a  school  building  program  being  carried  on  by  the 
Ministry  of  Education  with  American  cooperation. 

Public  Administration 

Substantial  guidance  and  assistance  has  been 
given  under  the  Mutual  Security  Program  in  the 
field  of  public  administration. 

Studies  and  recommendations  of  a  United  States 
fiscal  specialist  have  enabled  the  Government  of 
Saudi  Arabia  to  set  up  a  modern  system  of  hand- 


ling revenues  and  expenditures.  A  firm  base  for 
financing  programs  for  the  economic  betterment 
of  the  people  has  been  established  through  the 
creation  of  a  monetary  agency. 

Dependable  statistics  for  economic  planning  now 
are  being  made  available  in  Jordan  through  the 
completion  of  the  enumeration  phase  of  the  first 
census  ever  taken.  This  census,  conducted  by 
the  Jordan  Government  with  the  advice  of  Mutual 
Security  Program  personnel,  was  designed  to  ob- 
tain information  on  housing,  industry,  and  popu- 
lation. At  the  request  of  the  Liberian  Govern- 
ment, the  laws  of  that  country  are  being  codified 
by  an  American  specialist. 

One  of  the  major  phases  of  Iraq's  public  admin- 
istration activity  is  a  greatly  expanded  road- 
building  program  involving  more  than  $13  million 
of  the  government's  own  revenues.  Technical 
assistance  is  being  provided  by  the  United  States. 
Two  of  the  country's  principal  cities,  Baghdad 
and  Basra,  will  be  connected  by  an  all-weather 
highway.  For  the  first  time,  a  set  of  roadway 
plans  was  prepared  by  Iraqi  personnel,  and  all  the 
work  was  done  by  Iraqis,  under  the  supervision 
of  our  technicians. 


All  these  activities  represent  down-to-earth 
examples  of  the  way  the  United  States  is  cooper- 
ating with  the  governments  and  the  people  of  the 
Near  East  and  Africa.  Taken  individually,  they 
are  not  projects  of  great  magnitude,  but  moving 
in  concert  they  are  pushing  the  clock  centuries 
ahead.  They  directly  affect  the  welfare  and 
living  conditions  of  millions  of  people.  As 
education  spreads,  as  more  practical  methods 
replace  out-dated  techniques,  as  today's  students 
become  tomorrow's  teachers,  and  as  governmental 
services  and  facilities  are  improved,  more  and  more 
people  will  be  reaching  into  a  better  way  of  life 
that  never  before  had  seemed  possible. 

Benefits  growing  out  of  technical  cooperation 
projects  also  serve  to  promote  stability  of  govern- 
ment in  the  region.  A  desert  spot  made  to  grow 
food,  a  child  cured  of  trachoma,  a  well  which 
provides  pure  water — these  are  tangible  demon- 
strations to  the  people  that  their  government  is 
directly  interested  in  their  well-being.  Popular 
support  is  strengthened  and  the  state  rests  on  a 
firmer  foundation. 


32 


Palestine  Refugee  Program 

The  United  States  Congress  appropriated  $60.1 
million  under  the  Mutual  Security  Appropriation 
Act  of  1953  for  Palestine  refugee  relief  and 
rehabilitation.  Of  this  amount,  $16  million  was 
paid  to  United  Nations  Relief  and  Works  Agency 
(UNRWA)  by  June  30,  1953. 

The  first  6  months  of  1953  witnessed  the 
further  development  of  programs  by  UNRWA 
to  help  the  Palestine  refugees  become  self- 
supporting.  Previously  sketchy  projects  became 
the  subject  of  concrete  planning,  with  UNRWA 
and  Near  Eastern  Governments  working  in 
active  and  close  collaboration.  Meanwhile,  a 
relief  program  was  being  maintained  for  the  more 
than  800,000  refugees  on  relief  rolls. 

UNRWA  set  aside  $40  million  for  the  develop- 
ment of  water  storage  and  irrigation  facilities  in 
the  Jordan- Yarmuk  watershed,  and  studies  are 
proceeding  rapidly  in  an  effort  to  solve  the  remain- 
ing problems  of  water  utilization  and  land  settle- 
ment. The  Egyptian  Government  has  made  a 
proposal  for  aiding  the  refugees  in  the  Gaza  area 
through  the  irrigation  of  a  portion  of  the  Sinai 
peninsula  with  Nile  River  water.  Preliminary 
engineering  reports  are  favorable,  and  the  tech- 
nical surveys  are  now  being  carried  out  with  the 
cooperation  and  support  of  the  Egyptian  Govern- 
ment. 

Additional  tracts  of  land  have  been  designated 
by  the  Syrian  Government  for  possible  develop- 
ment for  the  benefit  of  refugees.  Reclamation 
of  lands  already  made  available  by  the  Govern- 
ment is  underway,  using  the  labor  of  the  refugees 
themselves. 

UNRWA  continued  to  receive  the  backing  of 
virtually  all  of  the  membership  of  the  United  Na- 
tions outside  the  Soviet  Bloc.  Over  50  nations 
have  contributed  since  the  agency  was  established, 
although  most  of  these  contributions  have  neces- 
sarily remained  small. 

Economic  Aid  to  Israel 

The  United  States  continued  to  carry  out  a  pro- 
gram of  special  economic  aid  to  Israel,  in  addition 
to  a  program  of  technical  assistance.  This  special 
program  was  initiated  in  the  amount  of  $63.5 
million  from  fiscal  year  1952  appropriations  and 
was  continued  through  fiscal  year  1953  with  an 
appropriation  of  $70.2  million. 


Of  the  $70.2  million  in  special  aid  funds  for 
fiscal  year  1953,  roughly  $44.6  million  was  ex- 
pended for  current  consumption  items.  The 
largest  portion,  about  $23  million,  was  used  to 
buy  foodstuffs.  Other  commodities  purchased  in- 
cluded fuel,  fertilizer  and  fodder,  pesticides,  raw 
materials,  and  medical  supplies. 

Resettlement  and  capital  development  items 
totaled  $25.6  million.  The  two  largest  items  of 
these  expenditures,  totaling  about  $11.5  million, 
were  for  irrigation  equipment — principally  ma- 
terials for  manufacturing  irrigation  pipe,  motors, 
and  pumps — and  for  housing  construction.  Power 
and  industrial  equipment,  farm  machinery,  trans- 
portation equipment,  and  similar  items  accounted 
for  the  balance  of  expended  funds. 

Near  East  Security 

From  the  standpoint  of  defensive  strength  in  the 
area  of  the  Near  East  as  a  whole — that  is,  the  area 
stretching  from  the  Greece-Turkey  Mediterranean 
region,  eastward  to  the  subcontinent  of  India,  and 
southward  through  Saudi  Arabia  and  Egypt — the 
Mutual  Security  Program  has  achieved  sub- 
stantial, if  partial,  success. 

The  substantial  success  lies  in  the  greatly 
strengthened  posture  of  Greece  and  Turkey. 
Powerful  resistance  could  be  offered  to  any  direct 
attack.  Turkey  is  in  a  strong  flank  position  to 
protect  the  road  to  the  oil  of  the  Persian  Gulf. 

The  success  is  only  partial  because,  although  the 
area  is  still  free  of  actual  Soviet  occupation,  it 
cannot  by  any  means  be  considered  safe  for  the 
free  world. 

Military  Aid  to  Greece,  Turkey,  and  Iran 

The  United  States  has  supplied  military  assist- 
ance to  Greece,  Turkey,  and  Iran  in  order  to 
enable  these  strategically  located  nations  to  im- 
prove their  armed  forces  and  to  strengthen  their 
defensive  capabilities.  The  value  of  the  military 
aid  shipped  to  these  three  countries  under  the 
Mutual  Security  Program  through  the  end  of 
June  1953  amounts  to  over  $600  million.  Almost 
$150  million  of  materiel  was  shipped  in  the  first 
6  months  of  1953. 

The  military  assistance  program  has  had  a 
direct  impact  on  the  combat  effectiveness  of  the 
Greek  armed  forces.     Since  the  beginning  of  the 


33 


■  =$fam&*- 


United  States  Air  Force  section  adviser  gives  final  advice  to  Royal  Hellenic  Air  Force  jet  students  preparing 
to  take  off  on  solo  flights  in  F-84's  (thunderjets) .  These  aircraft  have  been  supplied  to  the  Royal  Hellenic 
Air  Force  under  the  United  States  military  assistance  program. 


program,  the  Greek  military  establishment  has 
changed  from  a  loosely  knit  organization,  designed 
to  cope  with  guerrilla  activity,  into  a  compact 
and  well-trained  force.  Supporting  weapons 
provided  by  the  United  States  have  included 
armor  and  antitank  weapons,  as  well  as  light  and 
medium  artillery.  The  Royal  Hellenic  Air  Force 
is  being  provided  with  jet  aircraft  to  modernize 
those  units  now  utilizing  conventional  propeller- 
driven  planes. 

In  improving  her  armed  forces,  Greece  has 
demonstrated  a  ready  ability  to  assimilate  United 
States  military  advice  and  assistance  and  to 
utdize  efficiently  the  equipment  provided.  The 
Greek  Government  has  contributed  strong  mditary 
units  to  NATO,  and  also  to  the  United  Nations 
forces  in  Korea  where  a  reinforced  battalion  of 
Greek  Infantry  and  a  squadron  of  C-47  transports 
have  served  with  distinction. 


The  military  assistance  program  has  also 
provided  the  necessary  impetus  for  Turkey  to 
rehabilitate  her  armed  forces.  When  the  mditary 
aid  program  started  in  1947,  the  Turkish  defense 
establishment  consisted  of  well-disciplined  and 
hardy  troops,  but  little  modern  equipment, 
training,  organization,  logistic  support,  or  funds. 
Since  that  time,  the  Turks  have  steadily  expanded 
their  forces  and  built  up  their  mditary  strength. 

The  defense  effort  in  Turkey  has  developed  with 
emphasis  on  a  strong  army.  Bordering  on  power- 
fully manned  Iron  Curtain  countries,  Turkey  has 
been  compelled  to  rely  on  a  large  standing  army 
to  meet  the  initial  impact  of  any  invasion.  The 
Turkish  Army  is  being  organized  into  a  hard- 
hitting, relatively  mobile  force  that  can  be 
deployed  quickly  along  the  country's  critical 
frontiers.  The  Turkish  Ah  Force  is  being  equipped 
for  vital  support  missions. 


34 


The  buildup  of  its  armed  services  has  enabled 
Turkey  to  make  substantial  forces  available  to 
NATO.  The  performance  of  a  Turkish  brigade, 
fighting  alongside  other  United  Nations  troops  in 
Korea,  has  displayed  Turkey's  magnificent  fight- 
ing qualities  and  firm  determination  to  stand  with 
the  free  world. 

In  Iran,  United  States  military  aid  has  been 
designed  to  assist  in  the  maintenance  of  internal 


security  and  to  increase  the  defense  capabilities 
of  the  Iranian  armed  forces.  Since  the  beginning 
of  the  military  aid  program  for  Iran  in  1950,  the 
major  items  provided  have  included  motor  vehi- 
cles, tanks,  mortars,  rocket  launchers,  recoilless 
rifles,  ammunition,  signal  communications  equip- 
ment, and  maintenance  spare  parts.  While  the 
military  aid  has  been  moderate,  it  has  been  re- 
flected in  the  general  improvement  of  the  Iranian 
armed  forces. 


35 


CHAPTER  IV 


South  Asia  and  the  Far  East 


DURING  the  first  half  of  1953, 12  nations  in  the 
South  Asian  and  Far  Eastern  area  were  partici- 
pating in  the  Mutual  Security  Program.  Four  of 
these  nations — India,  Pakistan,  Afghanistan,  and 
Nepal — are  in  South  Asia.  Eight  are  in  Southeast 
Asia  and  the  Pacific  region — the  Republic  of  China 
on  Formosa,  the  three  Associated  States  of  Indo- 
china, the  Philippines,  Burma,  Indonesia,  and 
Thailand. 

If  Communist  expansion  is  to  be  halted,  it  is 
essential  that  these  countries  of  free  Asia,  with 
their  wealth  of  human  and  material  resources, 
continue  to  be  alined  vvith  the  free  world.  In 
varying  degree,  they  all  face  grave  threats  to  their 
freedom  and  independence.  The  Communists 
have  been  waging  open  warfare  in  Korea  and 
Indochina,  while  fostering  militant  subversion — 
armed  and  unarmed — in  other  parts  of  the  area. 
In  most  of  these  countries,  too,  there  is  pervasive 
discontent,  which  can  at  any  time  flare  up  in 
violence  and  revolt.  While  free  Asia  thus  offers 
fertile  ground  for  communist  aggression,  it  also 
presents  a  challenge  for  effective  action  by  the  rest 
of  the  free  world.  The  Mutual  Security  Program 
is  the  American  response  to  that  challenge. 

The  general  instability  and  critical  difficulties  of 
the  area  are  a  product  of  numerous,  complex 
factors.  Most  of  the  governments  are  newly 
independent  and  consequently  inexperienced. 
There  is  an  acute  shortage  of  trained  and  educated 
personnel,  both  in  private  and  public  operations. 
Capital  equipment  is  inadequate  and  obsolete, 
and  outmoded  techniques  keep  productivity  low. 
Maldistribution  of  income  produces  dangerous 
extremes  of  poverty  and  wealth.  There  is  in- 
sufficient domestic  or  foreign  private  investment, 
with  little  prospect  of  near-term  increase  in  the 
rate  of  capital  formation.  Country  development 
is  unbalanced  and  characterized  by  reliance  on  a 


few  major  exports  so  that  national  economies  are  at 
the  mercy  of  fluctuating  world  markets.  Chronic 
food  shortages  bring  recurring  crises,  and  many 
countries  cannot  fill  their  import  requirements  for 
rice  and  other  food  grains 

The  solution  to  these  basic  and  multiple 
problems  is  not  found  in  quick  cure-alls  or  magic 
nostrums  but  in  persistent  and  well-planned 
cooperative  effort.  The  burden  of  such  effort  is 
being  shouldered  primarily  by  the  Asian  countries 
themselves,  but  the  United  States,  under  the 
Mutual  Security  Program,  is  doing  much  to 
remove  bottlenecks  and  fortify  the  chances  for 
ultimate  success.  The  free  world  needs  a  strong, 
free  Asia. 

Mutual  security  programs  are  speeding  progress 
and  promoting  stability  in  a  variety  of  ways — by 
providing  the  technical  advice  and  material  aid 
needed  to  do  specific  jobs;  by  helping  to  develop 
local  trained  leaders  and  technicians;  by  demon- 
strating methods  to  raise  food  production;  by 
making  available  advanced  medical  knowledge 
and  providing  critical  drugs;  by  helping  to  plan 
and  install  adequate  public  services;  by  showing 
how  to  improve  educational  methods,  budget 
practices,  and  tax  systems.  Mutual  security 
programs  are  also  aimed  at  creating  more  favorable 
conditions  for  private  investment,  both  foreign 
and  domestic.  In  short,  the  aid  program  serves 
as  a  catalyst,  making  possible  the  more  effective 
utilization  of  a  country's  own  resources  through 
its  own  efforts. 

In  certain  countries  of  the  area — Indochina, 
Formosa,  the  Philippines,  and  Thailand — the 
Mutual  Security  Program  is  strengthening  military 
and  internal  security  forces  by  providing  necessary 
equipment  and  training.  Economic  and  technical 
assistance  measures  contribute  directly  to  this 
objective  by  helping   to  build  firmer  economic 


36 


foundations    and    develop    political    and    social 
stability. 

The  area  as  a  whole,  as  well  as  individual 
countries,  must  be  strengthened.  Critical  short- 
ages of  food  and  other  essential  materials  can  only 
be  met  through  an  increase  in  production  and 
trade.  By  expanding  trade  among  themselves 
and  with  the  rest  of  the  free  world,  these  countries 
can  contribute  to  one  another's  development. 
The  loss  of  prewar  trade  with  China,  makes 
Japan,  in  particular,  dependent  upon  the  countries 
of  South  and  Southeast  Asia  for  essential  materials 
and  markets.  The  Japanese  can,  in  turn,  supply 
capital  equipment  and  technical  skills  which  these 
countries  require  for  then  development. 


Production  Of  Rice— Mainstay  Of  The  Asian  Diet- 
Has  Not  Kept  Pace  With  Population  Growth 

(Data  refer  to  non-Communist  countries  of  South  Asia  and  the  Far  East) 


Prewar 


Present  ' 


Metric  Ions  of  rough  rice 

Populalion-1938;  production-average  for  crop  years  1935/36-1939/40 

Populalion-1952;  produclion-average  for  crop  years  1950/51-1952/53 


The  inexperience  of  most  Asian  governments  in 
the  field  of  economic  planning,  their  preoccupation 
with  pressing  internal  problems,  and  lack  of  stable 
economic  ties  with  one  another  in  the  past  combine 
to  retard  a  coordinated  regional  effort.  As  the 
governments  gain  in  experience  and  knowledge, 
however,  greater  progress  in  this  direction  may 
be  anticipated.  The  United  States  is  prepared 
to  support  efforts  along  this  line.  In  the  mean- 
time, our  bilateral  assistance  to  each  of  the  par- 
ticipating countries  takes  into  account  both  the 


requirements  and  the  opportunities  for  regional 
development. 

Supplementing  Free  Asia's 
Resources 

On  the  military  side,  in  the  first  6  months  of 
1953,  materiel  valued  at  $390  million  was  shipped 
from  the  United  States  to  the  nations  in  the  Far 
East  receiving  military  assistance.  From  the 
start  of  the  military  assistance  program  in  this 
area  in  1949  to  the  end  of  June  1953,  a  total  of 
$1,626  million  worth  of  aid  had  been  programed. 
By  the  end  of  June,  $974  million  worth  had  been 
shipped.  In  addition,  offshore  procurement  con- 
tracts of  nearly  $38  million  have  been  placed  by 
the  Department  of  Defense  in  Japan  and  Formosa 
for  military  materiel. 

Dining  the  6  months  ended  June  30,  1953,  the 
total  value  of  Mutual  Security  Program  expendi- 
tures for  defense  support,  and  economic  and  tech- 
nical assistance  in  the  Far  East  and  South  Asian 
area,  was  $130  million.  Expenditures  since  the 
beginning  of  this  program  in  June  1950,  totaled 
$391  million. 

Indochina. — For  over  6  years,  the  forces  of 
the  French  Union  and  the  national  armies  of  the 
Associated  States  of  Indochina  have  been  fighting 
a  bloody  but  indecisive  war  against  the  Com- 
munist-reinforced Viet  Minh  aggressors.  France 
has  incurred  heavy  losses  of  her  officers  and  men. 
The  French  Government  has  been  spending  over 
$1  billion  a  year  to  support  the  exhausting  and 
difficult  military  campaign,  but  it  cannot  shoulder 
the  entire  cost  without  adversely  affecting  France's 
military  contribution  to  the  forces  in  Europe. 

The  defense  of  Indochina,  an  important  gate- 
way to  the  vast  resources  of  Southeast  Asia,  is  a 
matter  of  grave  concern  to  the  whole  free  world. 
Since  France  cannot  fulfill  her  commitments  both 
in  Europe  and  Asia  without  outside  assistance, 
the  United  States  is  providing  needed  weapons 
and  equipment  to  the  non-Communist  forces  in 
Indochina. 

Military  assistance  to  the  armed  forces  of  the 
French  Union  and  the  Associated  States  con- 
tinued on  a  high  priority  basis  during  the  first  6 
months  of  1953.  Deliveries  dining  this  period 
included  large  numbers  of  vehicles,  artillery 
pieces,  communications  equipment,  landing  craft, 
and    certain    types   of   vitally   required    aircraft. 


37 


Military  Aid  Shipments  Were  Accelerated  To  Meet  The  Critical  Situation  In  The  Far  East 


1  Value  of  materiel  supplied  exclusive  of  charges  for  repair  and  rehabilitation  of  excess 
stocks  and  packing,  handling  and  transportation.         Includes  value  of  excess  stocks. 


'April— December 
3  January-June 


The  monthly  rate  of  shipment  was  almost  double 
the  average  for  1952.  These  shipments,  and  their 
effect  upon  military  operations,  have  been  of  major 
importance  in  improving  the  critical  military  situa- 
tion in  Indochina  and  denying  Communist  ambi- 
tions for  control  of  all  Southeast  Asia.  However, 
victory  is  far  from  won. 

Additional  empbasis  is  being  placed  on  building 
up  the  national  armies  of  the  Associated  States. 
In  the  struggle  to  prevent  the  Indochina  region 
from  being  overrun  by  Communist  might,  the 
assistance  of  French  Union  military  forces,  in 
terms  of  men,  equipment,  and  training,  has  been 
indispensable  to  the  development  of  these  na- 
tional armies.  In  time,  however,  the  Indochinese 
forces  should  be  able  to  take  over  a  larger  share 
of  the  burden  of  protecting  their  fellow  country- 
men from  Communist  attack.  As  the  local  forces 
become  stronger,  the  French  will  increasingly  be 
able  to  transfer  from  Indochina  to  Europe  the 
trained  officers  and  men  who  are  much  needed 
for  the  buildup  of  NATO  forces. 

Despite   the  substantial   assistance   of  France 


and  the  United  States,  the  Associated  States  are 
obliged  to  strain  their  resources  to  the  utmost  in 
order  to  finance  their  military  effort.  Vietnam, 
largest  of  the  three  states,  is  now  spending  about 
70  percent  of  total  budgeted  funds  on  its  armed 
forces. 

In  addition  to  weapons  and  material,  the 
Mutual  Security  Program  has  provided  also  a 
substantial  amount  of  dollar  aid  for  defense  sup- 
port to  the  anti-Communist  forces.  Transport 
and  communication  projects,  for  example,  while 
useful  for  the  civilian  economy  are  currently 
essential  to  the  conduct  of  military  operations. 
The  total  road  mileage  in  the  strategic  Tonkin 
Delta  reconstructed  or  repaired  with  United 
States  assistance  was  considerably  expanded 
during  the  first  half  of  1953.  Airfields  and  water- 
ways were  improved,  and  construction  was  con- 
tinued on  warehouses  and  port  facilities. 

To  relieve  the  military  authorities  of  respon- 
sibility for  the  care  of  war-tossed  refugees,  the 
United  States  continued  to  provide  food,  blankets, 
medicines,  and  material  for  temporary  housing. 


38 


In  the  past  6  months,  the  United  States  also 
assisted  the  government  of  Vietnam  in  resettling 
5,000  war  refugees  on  75,000  acres  of  idle  land  ia 
the  southern  part  of  the  country. 

Eai'ly  this  year,  the  United  States  undertook  to 
help  establish  a  pilot  project  at  Dong  Quan  in  the 
Tonkin  Delta,  under  which  some  25  rural  villages 
are  to  be  regrouped  into  a  single  fortified  center. 
This  project  is  designed  to  prevent  Viet  Minh 
raiders  from  extorting  food  and  conscripts  from 
the  defenseless  farming  population.  If  Dong 
Quan  is  successful,  similar  defensible  centers  will 
be  built  which  will  not  only  improve  the  difficult 
life  of  the  villagers  but  will  also  weaken  the  mili- 
tary potential  of  the  Communists. 

Technical  and  economic  assistance  is  increasing 
the  effectiveness  of  public  services  and  helping 
the  governments  in  the  three  Associated  States  to 


gain  greater  popular  support.  American  medical 
experts  and  supplies  have  been  made  available  to 
assist  the  local  public  health  authorities.  This 
aid  has  made  it  possible  to  extend  protection 
against  malaria  to  over  a  million  people,  to  treat 
180,000  victims  for  the  blinding  eye  disease  of 
trachoma,  to  equip  1,800  first-aid  dispensaries  in 
rural  areas,  and  to  sink  hundreds  of  deep  wells 
which  provide  safe  water  and  reduce  the  parasitism 
which  plagues  the  farming  population.  Assistance 
has  also  been  given  to  the  Associated  States' 
campaign  against  illiteracy.  This  campaign  has 
been  highly  successful  in  refuting  the  Viet  Minh 
charge  that  the  non-Communist  governments  are 
anxious  to  keep  the  people  in  ignorance. 

In  the  6-month  period,  the  integrated  program 
to  aid  agricultural  production  was  continued. 
Fertilizer   was    distributed    on    a    demonstration 


A  155 -mm.  rifle  being  unloaded  at  the  port  of  Saigon  as  part  of  the  military  assistance  program  to  aid  in  the 
defense  of  Indochina. 


39 


basis  to  over  270,000  farm  families,  irrigation 
works  were  extended,  rice  storage  facilities  were 
built,  and  more  productive  strains  of  rice  seed 
were  developed. 

Formosa. — -It  is  in  the  interest  of  the  United 
States  to  develop  the  military  capabilities  of  the 
Republic  of  China  on  Formosa.  The  Mutual 
Security  Program  accordingly  is  furnishing  mili- 
tary equipment  and  training  assistance  to  the 
armed  forces  of  the  Chinese  Government.  This 
military  aid  program  has  materially  helped  to 
improve  the  combat  efficiency  of  the  Nationalist 
military  establishment. 

Progress  toward  the  military  goals  of  the  Re- 
public of  China  was  greatly  accelerated  during  the 
first  balf  of  1953  by  deliveries  under  the  Mutual 
Security  Program  of  aircraft,  vehicles,  and  com- 
munications equipment.  A  successful  effort  was 
made  to  increase  standardization  both  in  materiel 
in  use  and  in  the  local  production  of  ammunition. 

A  United  States  Military  Assistance  Advisory 
Group  bas  not  only  supervised  the  supply  of  needed 
equipment  but  has  also  helped  to  provide  military 
training,  to  reorganize  the  Chinese  Nationalist 
armed  forces  and  to  plan  the  defense  of  Formosa. 

To  complement  the  military  end-item  and  train- 
ing aid,  the  Chinese  Government  also  receives  de- 
fense support  from  the  technical  and   economic 


Military  Costs  Absorb  Almost  Two-Thirds  Of 
Chinese  Government  Expenditures 

Consolidated  National  and 
Provincial  Government  Finances 

1953 


$132  Million1 

(In  Dollar  Equivalents) 
'  Convened  at  Ibe  rate  of  one  U.  S.  dollar  =z  $15  65  new  Taiwan  dollars 


assistance  program.  Direct  assistance  is  provided 
in  the  form  of  United  States-financed  imports  of 
food,  petroleum,  engineering  equipment,  and  medi- 
cal supplies.  Under  this  program,  too,  dollar 
funds  are  made  available  for  projects  recommended 
by  the  MAAG,  primarily  the  construction  of  roads, 
bridges,  storage  facilities,  and  barracks.  Counter- 
part funds,  derived  from  the  sale  of  commodity 
imports  financed  under  the  Mutual  Security  Pro- 
gram, are  used  to  defray  the  local  currency  costs 
of  these  logistical  support  projects. 

Chinese  arsenals,  rehabilitated  in  part  with 
United  States  assistance,  now  are  being  used  to 
manufacture  small  arms  and  ammunition.  The 
proceeds  from  current  contracts  under  the  offshore 
procurement  program,  valued  at  $5.8  million, 
are  being  controlled  carefully  so  that  they  will 
finance  additional  supplies  of  raw  materials  needed 
for  further  production. 

The  cost  of  maintaining  the  existing  military 
establishment,  with  armed  forces  of  all  types 
totaling  about  550,000  men,  results  in  expenditures 
amounting  to  63  percent  of  the  combined  national 
and  provincial  government  budgets.  The  Chinese 
Government  requires  counterpart  assistance  to 
cover  budgetary  deficits  arising  from  the  high 
cost  of  maintaining  its  military  forces. 

Economic  and  technical  assistance  measures 
also  build  up  the  capabilities  of  the  Chinese 
Government  on  Formosa  by  helping  to  develop 
economic  stability  and  increase  the  capacity  for 
self-support  through  planned  development  of 
Formosan  industry  and  agriculture. 

The  maintenance  of  economic  stability  has  been 
facilitated  by  the  improvement  of  the  economy  in 
general  in  terms  of  increased  production  and  higher 
exports.  Certain  basic  weaknesses,  however,  still 
exist.  Although  export  earnings  have  gradually 
increased,  there  is  still  a  considerable  gap  between 
receipts  and  import  requirements.  Production 
facilities  remain  inadequate  to  support  the  present 
population.  The  economy  is  still  vulnerable  to 
inflation,  and  the  price  structure  is  highly  sensi- 
tive to  supply  shortages.  The  economic  stability 
thus  far  achieved  is  consequently  only  precariously 
maintained. 

Despite  the  delicate  internal  balance,  develop- 
ment of  industry  and  agriculture,  planned  with  a 
view  to  achieving  ultimate  self-support,  has  moved 
forward    steadily.     In    the    field    of    agriculture, 


40 


dollar  and  counterpart  funds  have  been  used  to 
finance  the  program  of  the  Sino-American  Joint 
Commission  on  Rural  Reconstruction  (JCRR), 
designed  to  increase  crop  and  livestock  produc- 
tion, improve  farmers'  living  conditions,  and  sup- 
port and  strengthen  local  agricultural  services. 
Increased  application  of  fertilizers,  made  possible 
largely  by  United  States  financing,  has  been  a 
major  factor  in  achieving  increased  production  of 
principal  agricultural  crops,  such  as  rice.  During 
1953,  the  local  fertilizer  distribution  program  is 
being  expanded  in  a  drive  to  raise  rice  production 
to  1.7  million  tons,  a  figure  which  tops  by  20  per- 
cent the  peak  achieved  before  the  war. 

During  the  first  half  of  1953,  the  JCRR  played 
an  important  role  in  initiating  the  third  and  final 
phase  of  the  comprehensive  land  reform  program. 
After  helping  to  carry  out  rent  reduction  and  the 
sale  of  public  lands,  which  constituted  the  first  two 
phases  of  the  program,  the  JCRR  is  now  actively 
engaged  in  helping  to  train  thousands  of  workers 
to  perform  the  complex  task  of  equitably  trans- 
ferring some  400,000  acres  from  private  landlords 
to  tenant  faimers. 

Philippines. — Military  commitments  of  the 
Philippines  include  those  which  pertain  to  preser- 
vation of  its  own  internal  security  and  those 
assumed  under  the  United  Nations  and  the  mutual 
defense  treaty  with  the  United  States.  Military 
aid  has  made  it  possible  for  the  armed  forces  of 
the  Philippines  to  suppress  in  large  measure  the 
Huk  insurrection  which  has  been  aided  and,  in 
part,  led  by  Communists.  The  final  elimination 
of  armed  dissidence,  however,  depends  upon  im- 
proved conditions  in  rural  areas. 

The  Philippine  Army  maintained  one  battalion 
combat  team  in  Korea.  The  Philippine  Navy 
adequately  supported  this  expeditionary  force  and 
also  performed  creditably  in  disaster  relief  and 
rescue  missions.  The  capabilities  of  the  Philip- 
pine Navy,  with  regard  to  performance  of  its 
Coast  Guard  functions,  increased  materially  with 
United  States  deliveries  of  Coast  Guard  patrol 
craft. 

To  finance  the  buildup  of  its  military  establish- 
ment and  to  defray  the  cost  of  extended  opera- 
tions against  the  Huks,  the  Philippine  Govern- 
ment has  increased  military  appropriations  from 
the  equivalent  of  $52  million  in  1950  to  $91 
million  in  1952. 


In  providing  assistance  to  the  Philippines,  the 
United  States  seeks  to  encourage  and  support  the 
government  in  carrying  out  needed  economic  and 
administrative  improvements.  An  essential  pre- 
requisite to  the  most  effective  use  of  American 
aid  is  the  formulation  of  an  overall  development 
plan.  During  the  first  half  of  1953,  the  Philip- 
pine Government,  with  American  advice  and 
assistance,  directed  the  National  Economic  Coun- 
cil to  undertake  a  revision  of  existing,  incomplete 
development  plans  and,  with  the  aid  of  counter- 
part funds,  provided  the  support  which  the  Coun- 
cil needed  to  initiate  the  task. 

The  past  6  months  also  saw  marked  progress 
toward  increasing  food  production,  primarily  rice 
and  corn.  Distribution  of  fertilizer  to  85,000  small 
food  crop  producers  was  completed;  three  govern- 
ment seed  farms,  rehabilitated  with  American  as- 
sistance, produced  75,000  pounds  of  improved  seed. 
Work  progressed  on  5  gravity  irrigation  projects, 
designed  to  irrigate  215,000  acres.  Nine  pump 
irrigation  systems,  each  capable  of  watering  700 
acres,  were  installed  and  construction  of  20  more 
undertaken.  These  varied  but  complementary 
activities  have  aided  so  materially  in  increasing 
production  that  this  year,  for  the  first  time  in 
recent  history,  the  Philippines  has  attained  virtual 
self-sufficiency  in  rice  and  corn. 

The  Mutual  Security  Program  is  assisting  the 
Philippine  Government  to  open  public  lands  to 
orderly  settlement  and  thereby  reduce  the  pres- 
sure of  population  on  overcrowded  rural  areas. 
In  the  past  6  months,  land  survey  teams,  trained 
and  equipped  under  the  Mutual  Security  Program, 
classified  200,000  acres  and  allocated  20,000  farm 
and  1,000  urban  lots. 

To  help  the  farmer  retain  a  fair  share  of  his 
increased  production,  14  rural  banks  offering  low- 
cost  credit  were  capitalized  with  counterpart  funds, 
and  3,000  farmers  were  organized  into  credit  co- 
operatives during  the  first  half  of  1953.  Similarly, 
to  help  the  worker  obtain  an  equitable  return  for 
his  labor,  American  technical  experts  assisted  in 
drafting  the  new  basic  labor  law  which  establishes 
the  right  of  employees  to  organize  freely  and 
bargain  collectively. 

During  the  past  6  months,  United  States- 
financed  surveys  of  coal  and  mineral  resources  were 
stepped  up  and  resulted  in  the  discovery  of 
numerous  deposits  suitable  for  economic  develop- 
ment.    A  peso  industrial  guaranty  and  loan  fund 


41 


equivalent  to  $5  million,  began  operating  to 
stimulate  Philippine  private  investment  through 
long-term  industrial  loans  by  commercial  banks. 
Despite  these  accomplishments,  much  remains 
to  be  done  if  long-standing  economic  and  social 
ills,  aggravated  by  war  and  insurrection,  are  to  be 
corrected.  A  more  equitable  system  of  land 
tenure  is  needed  to  allay  agrarian  unrest,  while 
food  production  must  be  constantly  expanded  to 
keep  pace  with  the  growing  population.  Perma- 
nently enlarged  sources  of  revenue,  adequate  to 
cover  needed  increases  in  expenditures  for  public 
services  and  for  defense,  must  be  found.  Planning 
and  administration  must  be  further  improved,  and 
the   climate  for  foreign  investment  made  more 


favorable  if  the  Philippines  are  to  realize  their 
economic  potential. 

Thailand. — The  invasion  of  the  state  of  Laos 
by  the  Communist-reinforced  Viet  Minh  forces 
in  April  1953  posed  a  potential  threat  to  Thailand. 
High  priority  was  given  to  the  shipment  of  United 
States  military  equipment  to  combat  this  menace. 
Materiel  delivered  during  the  first  6  months  of 
1953  enabled  Thailand  to  continue  the  process  of 
modernizing  its  ground  forces  and  training  its 
small  but  efficient  air  arm. 

The  Koyal  Thai  Ah  Force  is  a  striking  example 
of  the  utilization  of  military  aid  equipment.  For 
example,  from  1947  to  1950,  the  entire  ah'  force 
averaged  1,500  hours  per  year  flying  time,  but  in 


Thai  technicians  studying  ways  to  combat  liver  fluke  infection.  An  estimated  1,500,000  people  in  northeast 
Thailand  are  injected  with  this  parasitic  disease.  Parasitic  injection  control  units  are  being  set  up  in  the 
area  with  American  technical  ad-vice  and  material  help. 


42 


1951  and  1952,  it  flew  48,000  hours  per  year  or  an 
increase  of  over  3,000  percent.  Military  assist- 
ance from  the  United  States  helped  the  Thai  to 
maintain  one  battalion  of  troops  in  Korea  under 
the  United  Nations  Command. 

The  Thai  Government  is  devoting  an  increas- 
ingly large  share  of  its  revenues  to  improving  the 
combat  efficiency  of  its  armed  forces.  In  1953, 
the  equivalent  of  $107  million,  or  approximately 
36  percent  of  total  national  budget  expenditure, 
was  set  aside  for  this  purpose.  The  recent 
stepping-up  of  Communist  activity  in  Southeast 
Asia  may  obligate  the  Thai  to  devote  even  greater 
sums  to  national  defense. 

A  large  proportion  of  aid  funds  for  Thailand  has 
been  spent  on  various  measures  to  increase  food 
production.  During  the  past  6  months,  the  first 
phase  of  the  extensive  rice-breeding  project,  initi- 
ated with  American  aid  during  1951,  was  virtually 
completed.  Almost  150,000  selections  of  rice 
strains  have  been  made  since  the  inception  of  this 
project,  and  a  large  number  of  these  show  increases 
in  yield  of  as  much  as  50  percent  above  standard 
varieties.  These  more  productive  strains  have 
now  been  chosen  for  multiplication  and  will  be 
available  for  distribution  in  1954. 

The  Mutual  Security  Program  has  supplied 
technical  assistance  and  equipment  for  a  series  of 
irrigation  projects  which  have  already  brought 
150,000  additional  acres  of  land  under  cultivation. 
The  first  6  months  of  1953  saw  the  successful 
completion  of  ditching  and  diking  projects,  and  of 
pump  installations  in  several  areas. 

With  United  States  assistance  in  the  form  of 
technical  advice,  sprayers,  and  DDT,  the  Thai 
Government  is  carrying  out  a  comprehensive  pro- 
gram designed  to  eradicate  malaria.  During  the 
past  6  months,  the  scope  of  this  program  was 
broadened  to  provide  protection  to  3  million 
people.  Increased  emphasis  was  also  placed  upon 
training  so  that  sufficient  personnel  will  be  avail- 
able to  staff  the  expanded  public  health  service. 

In  the  field  of  education,  the  United  States  is 
helping  to  expand  the  facilities  of  the  Technical 
Institute  established  last  year,  so  that  enrollment 
can  be  increased  almost  tenfold  over  the  level  of 
June  1953.  Equipment  and  technical  advice  on 
training  courses  also  have  been  provided  for 
Thailand's  trade  schools. 


The  Thai  Government  is  taking  active  measures 
to  develop  the  country's  resources.  During  the 
past  years,  increasing  amounts  have  been  appro- 
priated for  development  projects  entirely  self- 
financed.  The  1953  budget  provides  triple  the 
amount  spent  for  such  investments  in  1949  and 
earmarks  particularly  large  sums  for  railroads, 
highways,  and  power  developments. 

Counterpart  Funds. — The  foregoing  four  coun- 
tries deposited  the  equivalent  of  over  $220  million 
in  their  local  currency  counterpart  accounts 
between  June  5,  1950,  and  June  30,  1953.  With- 
drawals from  these.special  accounts  are  made  for 
purposes  mutually  agreed  upon  by  the  United 
States  and  the  depositing  country.  Local  cur- 
rencies equivalent  to  nearly  $215  million  were 
available  for  financing  counterpart  programs 
within  these  countries,  following  the  transfer  of 
the  equivalent  of  about  $7  million  to  the  account 
of  the  United  States  to  meet  certain  overseas 
costs  incurred  in  administering  the  aid  program. 

The  Mutual  Security  Agency,  through  June 
30,  1953,  had  approved  the  use  of  approximately 
$180  million  of  counterpart  funds  for  these  Far 
Eastern  countries. 

In  Formosa,  about  43  percent  of  counterpart 
funds  has  been  released  for  the  procurement  of 
military  materiel  and  the  construction  of  military 
installations.  Major  non-military  uses  of  counter- 
part have  included  $19  million  for  the  operations  of 
the  Joint  Commission  on  Rural  Reconstruction 
(JCRR),  $19  million  for  agricultural  development, 
$7  million  for  power  facilities,  $6  million  for 
highways,  and  $5  million  for  development  of 
manufacturing  and  mining. 

In  the  Associated  States  of  Indochina,  counter- 
part totaling  over  $23  million  has  been  released 
for  a  wide  variety  of  projects.  Over  $5  million 
has  been  used  for  highway  reconstruction  and 
development,  and  a  like  amount  for  public  admin- 
istration. Other  major  projects  include  agricul- 
tural development,  public  health,  and  low-cost 
housing. 

Philippine  counterpart  funds  have  been  ear- 
marked in  large  part  to  finance  agricultural 
development.  Other  major  purposes  for  which 
counterpart  has  been  utilized  include  construction 
of  highways,  industrial  development,  improvement 


43 


of  government  services,  low-cost  housing,  and 
general  public  works. 

In  Thailand,  counterpart  funds  have  been  used 
mainly  for  agricultural  development  and  public 
health  programs.  Counterpart  funds  have  also 
been  released  to  finance  the  development  of  mining 
and  to  improve  and  expand  educational  facilities. 

India. — The  democratic  way  of  life  is  today 
undergoing  perhaps  its  most  crucial  test  in  India. 
Here  we  have,  on  the  one  hand,  the  largest  self- 
governing  nation  in  the  free  world  engaged  in  a 
great  effort  to  lift  its  millions  onto  a  higher  plane 
of  social  and  economic  life  through  the  concept  of 
democracy  and  the  ways  of  freedom.  On  the 
other  hand,  in  direct  competition  next  door,  so  to 
speak,  Communist  China  professes  a  similar  effort 
toward  progress  but  through  the  concept  of 
totalitarianism  and  the  ways  of  the  police-state. 

This  rivalry  in  method  and  ideals  between  the 
two  largest  countries  in  the  world  directly  affects 
the  lives  of  some  800  million  people,  almost  a  third 
of  the  world's  total  population.  It  is  inevitable, 
therefore,  that  the  ultimate  outcome  will  bear 
heavily  upon  all  mankind,  including  ourselves. 

India  is  presently  striving  under  its  first  5-year 
plan  to  reach  a  set  of  minimum  development  goals 
by  1956.  These  goals  are  concentrated  primarily 
on  agricultural  requirements,  but  other  economic 
needs  are  taken  into  account.  Development  plans 
call  for  more  intensive  and  efficient  use  of  water 
resources  for  agricultural  production,  and  power 
generation  for  industrial  expansion.  Railways 
and  port  facilities  will  be  extended.  Existing 
manufacturing  plants  will  be  modernized,  and  new 
plants  constructed. 

India's  5-year  plan  proposes  an  expenditure  of 
roughly  the  equivalent  of  $4.3  billion  by  central 
and  state  governments.  Private  industrj^  and 
private  individuals  are  expected  to  invest  the 
equivalent  of  another  $3  billion  in  economic 
development  activities.  This  is  a  sum  which 
imposes  the  most  severe  strain  on  India's  economy. 

Achievement  of  the  5-year  plan  will  not  auto- 
matically bring  satisfactory  living  standards  to  all 
India,  but  it  will  lay  a  sound  foundation  for  pro- 
gressive development  of  the  country's  economy. 
It  will  give  the  Indian  people  the  strength  and  hope 
they  need  to  continue  the  struggle  for  more  than 
just  marginal  subsistence  levels.  Success  of  this 
plan  involves  demonstrated  success  of  the  demo- 


India's  5-Year  Plan 

Major  Projects 

Industrial 
Development 

/W^\^f  ^lllilllflll^ 

/"-*'.'■';  Ag  ri  cu  1 1  u  re  '■'■■'-'■'^N^ 

;|||i|f  Irrigation  ?||lg|i 
gj|||pand  P°werj||||la, 

Wv •:■;'.'.  Socio  1  Services  .'•.'•:• 
Wv.(  Health,  Education.etc.) 

V           23% 

^^Transportation  $$§y 
J  and  Communication^ 

$4.3  Billion  ' 

'  Proposed  expendilures  (in  dollar  equivalent)  by  (he  central  and  slate  governments 
of  India 

cratic  method  as  the  right  way  to  greater  progress 
for  hundreds  of  millions  of  Asians. 

Village  improvement  is  a  major  phase  of  India's 
development  plan,  and  United  States  technical  co- 
operation is  centered  around  this  concept.  For  the 
fiscal  years  1952  and  1953,  a  total  of  $11  million  in 
United  States  funds  and  about  $80  million  in 
Indian  rupees  have  been  obligated  for  community 
development  work.  Out  of  124  American  tech- 
nicians in  India  at  the  close  of  the  fiscal  year,  over 
half  were  working  directly  with  more  than  1,000 
Indian  associates  in  village  improvement  projects. 
These  projects  are  introducing  more  efficient  agri- 
cultural tools  and  techniques,  building  schools, 
laying  down  farm-to-market  roads,  digging  wells, 
installing  sanitary  sewage  disposal  systems,  and 
opening  new  farm  cooperatives. 

In  a  typical  village  community,  about  100  vil- 
lages are  grouped  together  in  a  development  block 
which  takes  in  about  50,000  acres  and  100,000 
people.  In  the  fiscal  years  1952  and  1953,  over 
160  of  these  development  blocks  were  initiated, 
encompassing  over  16  million  people. 

A  field  report  from  Nayagarh,  Orissa,  gives  a 
microcosmic  picture  of  India's  village  develop- 
ment program:  "In  five  of  the  villages,  drains  have 


44 


Water  for  India's  campaign  to  grow  more  food  comes  from  this  new  tube  well,  financed  in  part  by  the  Indian 
Government  and  built  with  the  assistance  of  American  technicians. 


been  dug  for  the  village  streets ;  hundreds  of  cart- 
loads of  earth  hauled  in  to  grade  the  street ;  every 
family  has  dug  a  compost  pit;  a  small  dispensary 
and  a  library  have  been  established.  The  vil- 
lagers are  working  toward  a  goal  of  sowing  100 
percent  of  their  rice  crops  with  new  varieties." 

The  productive  efforts  of  villagers  like  these  to 
improve  their  standard  of  living  are  the  result  of 
the  spirit  and  teamwork  flowing  out  of  Indo- 
American  technical  cooperation. 

American  experts  are  advising  the  agriculture 
departments  of  the  state  governments  on  methods 
for  improving  cultivation  techniques  and  raising 
agricultural  productivity.  As  a  result  of  seed  and 
fertilizer  demonstrations,  rice  production  in  one 
development  area  is  already  2}{  times  last  year's 
level. 


River-valley  development  projects  are  increas- 
ing irrigation  and  expanding  power-generating 
capacity.  The  projects  which  the  United  States 
is  already  aiding  with  technical  advice  and  con- 
struction equipment  will  bring  3.7  million  acres  of 
land  imder  irrigation  and  provide  power  capacity 
of  325,000  kilowatts  by  1956.  This  will  mean 
almost  2  million  tons  of  food  added  every  year  to 
India's  domestic  supply. 

The  United  States  is  participating  in  a  program 
to  provide  over  2,000  irrigation  wells,  averaging 
300  feet  in  depth.  These  wells  are  being  drilled 
under  a  program  to  irrigate  a  land  area  of  640,000 
acres  in  the  region  of  the  Ganges  Plain.  This 
type  of  irrigation  will  bring  an  estimated  increase 
of  480,000  tons  in  food-grain  output. 

The  United  States  is  also  providing  India  with 


45 


needed  fertilizer,  iron  and  steel  for  farm  tools, 
DDT  for  malaria  control,  and  essential  medical 
supplies. 

Pakistan. — The  Government  of  Pakistan  is 
planning  to  improve  the  present  critical  agricul- 
tural situation  and  lay  a  foundation  for  future 
basic  industrial  development  along  lines  suited  to 
the  country's  requirements. 

One  method  of  achieving  these  purposes  is 
through  the  establishment  of  agricultural-indus- 
trial development  centers  to  train  village-level 
workers  in  such  fields  as  vocational  agriculture, 
environmental  sanitation,  and  village  industry. 
These  workers  will  then  operate  as  extension  per- 
sonnel in  surrounding  areas  to  impart  improved 
methods  and  techniques  to  the  Pakistani  farmers. 
It  is  hoped  to  have  workers  servicing  about  10 
percent  of  all  Pakistan's  villages  by  mid-1954. 

Training  centers  are  being  established  in  both 
East  and  West  Pakistan.  Village  leaders  in  the 
northwest  frontier  province  have  already  begun 
their  training,  and  American  technicians  assigned 
to  the  centers  have  helped  lay  the  basis  for  further 
expansion  of  the  village  development  program. 

Fertilizers  are  vital  to  any  substantial  increase 
in  crop  yields.  The  United  States  has  shipped 
13,000  tons  of  artificial  fertilizer  to  Pakistan  under 
the  1952  program,  and  shipments  under  the  1953 
program  will  total  75,000  tons.  This  additional 
fertilizer  will  add  at  least  170,000  tons  of  food 
grain  to  Pakistan's  next  food  crop. 

Locust  control  work  has  been  extremely  effec- 
tive in  reducing  locust  damage  to  food  crops.  In 
addition  to  spraying  from  planes,  American  tech- 
nicians, supplemented  by  hundreds  of  Pakistani 
volunteers,  have  assisted  the  ground-control  opera- 
tions of  the  Pakistan  Government. 

Pakistan  presently  is  facing  serious  economic 
difficulties.  Foreign  exchange  reserves  have  de- 
clined 60  percent  in  the  past  year.  Two  crop 
failures  in  succession  have  brought  the  imminent 
danger  of  widespread  famine  and  caused  the 
government  to  turn  to  outside  emergency  aid. 
In  the  fall  of  1952,  the  United  States  made  a  $15 
million  loan  to  Pakistan  for  the  purchase  of  wheat. 

Continued  damage  to  crops,  however,  resulted 
in  even  heavier  demands  for  food  imports  in  order 
to  avert  starvation  and  the  possibility  of  a  govern- 


ment breakdown.  To  help  the  Pakistani  people 
through  then*  time  of  crisis,  the  United  States 
Congress  authorized  the  President  to  make  avai- 
able  up  to  1  million  tons  of  surplus  wheat. 
About  700,000  tons  are  being  furnished  im- 
mediately on  a  grant  basis.  Disposition  of  the 
remainder  will  depend  on  the  future  situation. 
The  first  shipment  was  dispatched  on  June  26, 
and  every  effort  is  being  made  to  expedite  trans- 
portation of  the  balance. 

It  has  been  provided  that  the  grant  wheat  will 
be  distributed  without  discrimination  and  without 
cost  to  those  who  are  unable  to  pay  for  it.  The 
Pakistan  Government  has  proceeded  to  give  full 
publicity  in  Pakistan  to  the  objectives  and 
progress  of  the  aid  program  and  to  carry  informa- 
tion to  the  people  of  Pakistan  that  this  program  is 
evidence  of  the  friendship  of  the  people  of  the 
United  States  for  them. 

Afghanistan. — The  major  phase  of  Afghani- 
stan's development  program  is  a  project  to  develop 
the  irrigation  and  power  potential  of  the  Helmand 
River  and  its  tributaries.  The  construction  of 
two  high  dams  and  other  works  is  being  carried  on 
by  an  American  engineering  and  construction  firm. 
To  finance  the  project,  Afghanistan  has  expended 
$17  million  of  its  own  funds  and  has  borrowed  $21 
million  from  the  Export-Import  Bank.  The 
United  States  contribution  was  the  cost  of  pro- 
viding the  services  of  10  technicians  for  a  2-year 
period. 

Major  phases  of  the  dam  construction  program 
have  been  completed,  and  water  is  already  being 
stored.  Afghanistan  now  faces  the  problems  of 
organizing  nomads  for  community  life,  of  teaching 
efficient  irrigation  and  farming  techniques,  of 
establishing  health,  education,  and  processing  and 
distribution  systems.  Because  Afghanistan  has 
only  a  handful  of  men  trained  for  this  work,  the 
Mutual  Security  Program  has  provided  a  team  of 
specialists  to  help  the  country  in  its  planning  and 
surveying  problems. 

Under  the  Mutual  Security  Program,  the 
University  of  Wyoming  has  sent  a  director  of 
vocational  agriculture  and  three  instructors  to 
the  agricultural  school  in  Kabul.  Thirteen  Af- 
ghans in  turn  were  brought  to  the  United  States 
for  training  at  the  university  in  the  fields  of  agri- 


46 


culture  and  engineering.  American  technicians 
are  also  helping  to  increase  Afghanistan's  coal 
production  and  develop  its  mineral  resources. 

Burma. — The  government  of  the  Union  of 
Burma  on  March  17  notified  this  Government  that 
it  did  not  desire  further  United  States  aid  after 
June  30,  1953.  In  asking  for  the  termination  of 
additional  aid,  the  Burmese  Government  put  on 
record  its  gratitude  for  the  materials  and  services 
furnished  by  the  United  States  under  the  Mutual 
Security  Program,  and  expressed  its  appreciation 
of  our  help  in  implementing  Burmese  rehabilita- 
tion measures.  No  new  funds  have  been  requested 
for  this  program  for  fiscal  year  1954. 

Under  a  joint  Burmese-American  plan  to  close 
out  the  program  in  an  orderly  fashion,  project 
agreements  under  which  no  activity  had  begun 
were  canceled.  In  order  to  complete  those  activ- 
ities in  which  Inordinate  waste,  or  dissipation  of 
material  progress  achieved,  might  ba  caused  by 
complete  withdrawal  of  United  States  participa- 
tion on  the  specified  date,  projects  which  can  be 
completed  without  further  ordering  of  substantial 
equipment  are  being  continued. 

With  United  States  economic  and  technical  as- 
sistance, Burma  has  made  good  progress  toward 
increasing  its  rice  production.  Milling  processes 
have  been  improved,  and  storage  facilities  have 
been  made  more  efficient. 

Rehabilitation  of  the  key  port  of  Rangoon  has 
been  a  major  accomplishment  of  the  assistance 
program  to  Burma.  The  United  States  has  sup- 
plied the  necessary  engineering  advice  and  critical 
supplies  for  this  restoration  project.  Not  only  has 
the  port  been  largely  rebuilt  and  improved,  but  a 
large  pool  of  skilled  workers  has  been  trained. 

In  the  field  of  public  health,  malaria  and  other 
rural  health  problems  are  under  vigorous  attack 
over  a  wide  area. 

Indonesia. — The  present  rice  shortage  is  a 
major  threat  to  Indonesia's  economic  and  political 
stability.  In  recent  years,  Indonesia  has  had  to 
import  an  average  of  500,000  tons  of  rice  annually 
to  feed  her  80  million-  people. 

The  technical  cooperation  program  is  assisting 
in  several  ways  the  Indonesian  Government's 
efforts  to  increase  food  production.  Over  370,500 
acres  of  riceland  are  being  rehabilitated,  and 
yields  on  7,500  acres  have  already  been  doubled. 
American  technicians  are  training  Indonesians  to 


clear  land  mechanically,  and  to  operate  and 
maintain  purchased  equipment.  American  agri- 
cultural experts  have  demonstrated  how  hybrid 
corn  can  double  yields,  and  are  now  working  with 
the  Indonesian  Extension  Service  to  show  the 
Indonesian  farmers  how  to  get  bigger  crops. 
The  program  also  is  helping  to  develop  better 
marketing  techniques  and  improve  food  processing. 
Particularly  encouraging  progress  was  made  in 
fisheries  improvement.  The  Mutual  Security 
Program  enabled  the  purchase  of  60  motorized 
boats,  50  to  60  feet  in  length,  capable  of  going 
out  60  miles  and  keeping  the  catch  fresh  for  3  or 
4  days.  These  craft  were  turned  over  to  village 
cooperatives. 

As  a  result  of  a  project  in  ceramics  production 
in  Indonesia,  workers'  wages  in  one  area  have 
increased  50  percent  in  recent  months,  and  a 
better  product  is  being  produced  at  lower  cost. 

Nepal. — In  Nepal,  the  idea  of  agricultural  ex- 
tension and  village  development  was  new  until 
about  a  year  ago.  This  year,  the  first  class  of 
village  workers  in  Nepal's  own  village  improve- 
ment program — a  miniature  of  the  Indian  pro- 
gram— finished  their  training  and  went  into  the 
field  in  five  different  areas  of  the  country.  The 
second  class  was  about  to  graduate  as  this  report 
was  written. 

It  is  planned  to  initiate  a  modern  irrigation 
program  in  Nepal.  United  States  assistance  in 
demonstration  and  training  projects  will  help  to 
carry  forward  the  drilling  of  tube  wells  to  irrigate 
8,000  acres  and  increase  food-grain  production  by 
about  1,600  tons  a  year. 

American  technicians  are  also  helping  Nepal  to 
combat  malaria  and  develop  its  mineral  deposits. 

The  Situation  in  Japan  and 
Korea 

Japan 

Up  to  the  present  time,  Japan  has  not  partici- 
pated directly  in  the  Mutual  Security  Program. 
Yet  the  progress  of  all  countries  of  the  Far  East 
is  immeasurably  influenced  by  the  economic 
health  and  security  of  Japan.  In  recent  years, 
almost  half  the  value  of  Japan's  commercial 
exports  has  been  directed  to  the  nations  of  South 
and    Southeast    Asia.      In    addition,    Japan   has 


47 


provided  vitally  needed  supplies  to  the  United 
Nations  military  forces  in  Korea. 

Despite  these  existing  links  with  the  rest  of  free 
Asia,  Japan  has  great  reserves  of  technical  skills 
and  productive  capacity  which  are  not  now  being 
fully  utilized  in  building  the  economic  strength 
of  the  region.  Although  significant  economic 
progress  has  been  made  since  the  end  of  World 
War  II  in  rebuilding  industries  and  restoring 
international  trade,  Japan's  commercial  exports 
during  the  first  half  of  1953  have  been  far  below 
the  level  of  a  year  ago.  Sterling  reserves  are 
nearly  exhausted.  It  has  been  possible  to  pay  for 
increasing  imports  only  on  the  basis  of  extra- 
ordinary dollar  receipts.  These  receipts  amount- 
ing to  approximately  $800  million  a  year  are 
derived  from  procurement  for  United  Nations 
forces  in  Korea,  the  support  of  American  security 
forces  in  Japan,  and  the  purchase  of  yen  by 
those  forces  for  their  personal  requirements. 

As  this  temporary  source  of  funds  begins  to 
dry  up,  Japan  will  be  faced  with  crisis,  unless  in 
the  meantime  greatly  augmented  foreign  trade 
with  the  free  world,  and  particularly  with  the 
developing  nations  of  the  region,  has  been  fostered. 
At  present,  the  level  of  this  trade  is  held  down  by 
various  factors  including  high  Japanese  costs, 
import  restrictions  throughout  the  free  world, 
reparations  stalemates,  and  lingering  distrust  of 
the  Japanese. 

In  these  circumstances,  the  United  States 
Government  should  encourage  Japan  to  formulate 
realistic  and  farsighted  economic  policies.  To 
assist  in  the  development  of  such  policies,  we  are 
seeking  careful  programming  of  United  States 
procurement  in  Japan,  and  are  encouraging  the 
growth  of  mutually  beneficial  trade  and  invest- 
ment among  the  free  countries  of  the  region. 

The  Security  Treaty  between  the  United  States 
and  Japan,  signed  at  San  Francisco  on  Septem- 
ber 8,  1951,  recognized  Japan's  inability  at  that 
time  to  provide  adequately  for  its  own  defense 
and  granted  to  the  United  States  the  right  to  sta- 
tion its  forces  in  Japan.  The  treaty  also  expressed 
the  expectation  that  Japan  would  "increasingly 
assume  responsibility  for  its  own  defense."  In 
its  national  safety  forces,  Japan  is  creating  a 
means  to  maintain  internal  security  and  order. 
The  United  States  is  folio  whig  a  policy  of  assist- 
ing Japan  in  the  development  of  these  forces  for 
its  own   defense  by  providing   certain   types   of 


equipment  which  cannot  be  provided  by  the 
Japanese  Government.  In  this  connection,  ne- 
gotiations between  the  United  States  and  Japan 
on  a  Mutual  Defense  Assistance  Agreement  under 
the  mutual  security  legislation  were  commenced 
in  Tokyo  on  July  15. 

Korea 

Even  before  the  Communists  attacked  in  June 
1950,  South  Korea  suffered  severely  from  eco- 
nomic disorganization  and  underdevelopment. 
The  North  Koreans  controlled  most  of  the  nation's 
industrial  capacity.  Three  years  of  bitter  war- 
fare has  caused  enormous  damage  to  housing, 
public  building,  transportation,  communications, 
and  industrial  facilities.  Agricultural  production 
has  been  cut  severely.  Five  million  people  have 
been  swept  southward,  and  many  remain  homeless 
in  temporary  camps.  It  is  estimated  that  about 
700,000  Korean  men  are  either  in  the  Korean 
army  or  engaged  in  military-support  operations. 

Bilateral  aid  has  been  extended  to  Korea  by  the 
United  States,  not  as  a  part  of  the  Mutual  Security 
Program,  but  under  a  separate  program,  Civilian 
Relief  in  Korea,  which  was  authorized  by  Congress 
in  1951  and  has  been  administered  through  the 
Department  of  Defense  and  the  United  Nations 
Command.  Under  this  program,  relief  goods 
valued  at  more  than  $300  million  have  been 
provided  by  the  United  States. 

UNKRA. — The  United  States  has  provided  eco- 
nomic assistance  to  the  Republic  of  Korea  by 
contributions  to  the  United  Nations  Korean  Re- 
construction Agency  (UNKRA),  which  was  estab- 
lished in  December  1950  by  the  United  Nations 
to  relieve  the  sufferings  of  the  Korean  people,  i.o 
assist  them  to  repair  the  devastation  caused  by 
aggression,  and  to  lay  the  necessary  economic 
foundations  for  the  political  unification  and  inde- 
pendence of  the  country.  The  United  Nations 
approved  a  $250  million  initial  budget  for  UNKRA. 
Subject  to  congressional  approval,  the  United 
States  pledged  $162.5  million  as  its  share  and  has 
contributed  $50.8  million.  Continuance  of  hos- 
tilities deferred  large-scale  operations  by  UNKRA 
until  January  1953,  at  which  time  UNKRA,  in 
agreement  with  the  United  Nations  Command, 
embarked  on  a  program  calling  for  the  obligation 
of  $70  million  by  June  30,  1953,  and  contemplat- 
ing a  $130  million  program  for  the  12  months 
folio  wing  that  date. 


48 


UNKRA  program  obligations  for  the  6-month 
period  ended  June  30,  1953,  have  included  approxi- 
mately $20  million  for  sustaining  commodity  im- 
ports of  gram  and  fertilizer.  Other  obligations 
have  been,  for,  the  most  part,  divided  in  roughly 
equal  proportions  among  projects  of  economic 
assistance  in  the  fields  of  education  and  health, 
agriculture  and  fisheries,  industry,  power,  and 
transport.  TJNKRA's  studies  indicate  that  far, 
greater  economic  assistance  will  be  required  in  the 


future  to  restore  the  Korean  economy  to  the 
minimum  basis  under  which  the  Korean  people  can 
survive  as  a  free  country. 

A  United  States  presidential  representative 
recently  surveyed  the  Korean  economy  to  make 
recommendations  with  respect  to  additional  eco- 
nomic assistance  needed  in  Korea.  These  recom- 
mendations are  now  being  considered  in  planning 
measures  of  economic  assistance  to  the  Republic 
of  Korea. 


49 


CHAPTER  V 


American  Republics 


'  I  'HERE  has  been  little  question  regarding  the 
-*-  necessity  for  close  working  relations  between 
the  United  States  and  Latin  America.  Repre- 
sentatives of  this  Government  and  representatives 
of  the  Latin  American  countries,  in  general,  have 
taken  essentially  the  same  position  on  outstanding 
political  issues.  Furthermore,  the  United  States 
and  the  Latin  American  countries  are  participants 
in  the  oldest  regional  organization  of  which  this 
Government  is  a  member — the  Organization  of 
American  States.  This  Organization  had  its 
beginning  more  than  60  years  ago  and  has  played 
a  vital  role  in  political,  economic,  and  military 
cooperation  among  the  American  Republics. 

The  basic  interests  of  the  United  States  and 
those  of  the  Latin  American  countries  are  rooted 
in  common  ground.  Even  greater  cooperation 
would  be  bighly  beneficial  to  both  areas;  on  the 
other  hand,  decreased  cooperation  would  be 
prejudicial  to  the  entire  Western  Hemisphere. 

Latin  America  is  today  undergoing  far-reaching 
political,  economic,  and  social  change.  Life  as  it 
has  been  lived  in  the  past  is  under  heavy  criticism 
as  the  position  of  the  relatively  small  group  which 
has  heretofore  controlled  most  of  the  wealth  and 
power  is  being  challenged.  There  is  an  increasing 
awareness  on  the  part  of  a  great  body  of  the  people 
not  only  of  their  depressed  economic  and  social 
status  but  of  their  expanding  political  power. 

An  extreme  nationalism  is  being  nurtured  in 
some  countries  by  a  deceptively  misleading,  though 
effective,  dogma.  This  dogma  holds  that  the 
Latin  American  countries  are  poor  solely  because 
they  have  been  exploited  ruthlessly  by  the  more 
highly  industrialized  countries.  The  great  dis- 
parity in  wealth  and  power  between  the  United 
States  and  Latin  America  makes  our  country  a 
choice  target  for  this  type  of  insidious  criticism. 


Economic  conditions  in  Latin  America  at  the 
present  time  vary  widely  as  between  countries, 
but  everywhere  the  lot  of  the  bulk  of  the  people 
is  hard.  In  Latin  America  as  a  whole,  per  capita 
income  is  not  more  than  one-eighth  the  per  capita 
income  in  the  United  States. 

Such  circumstances  are  tailor-made  for  exploita- 
tion by  the  Communists  who,  though  they  con- 
stitute a  relatively  small  part  of  the  total  popula- 
tion, exert  an  influence  out  of  all  proportion  to 
then  number  in  fomenting  popular  discontent. 
The  Communists  find  it  expedient  and  profitable 
to  associate  themselves  with  nationalist  hopes 
and  feed  the  fires  of  nationalist  desires.  They 
sow  suspicion,  discord  and  hate,  hoping  to  reap 
chaos  and  ultimate  control  of  governmental 
processes. 

It  is  not  surprising  therefore  that  old  institu- 
tions as  well  as  time-honored  concepts — even  the 
concept  of  cooperation  with  the  United  States — 
are  being  subjected  to  question  in  Latin  America. 
The  political  orientation  of  the  Latin  American 
countries  and  our  ability  to  count  upon  their 
support  in  a  divided  world,  as  well  as  our  ability 
to  assist  them,  will  depend  to  a  major  degree 
upon  the  extent  to  which  they  realize  that  mutual 
cooperation  is  in  the  mutual  interest. 

Our  Economic  Interdependence 

The  economic  interests  of  the  United  States 
and  Latin  America  are  heavily  interdependent. 
This  is  reflected  both  in  statistics  on  private  in- 
vestment and  in  the  flow  of  two-way  trade. 

Our  direct  private  investments  hi  Latin  America 
amount  to  approximately  $5  billion.  If  in  vest- 
ments in  Canada  are  excluded,  direct  private 
United  States  investments  in  Latin  America  ex- 


50 


The  Largest  Share  Of  U.  S.  Private  Capital  Abroad 
Is  Invested  In  Latin  America 

U.  S.  Direct  Private  Foreign  Investment 
1951,byArea 


S13.1  Billion 


Idlest  available  daia 


ceed  those  in  all  of  the  other  countries  of  the  world 
combined. 

Approximately  one-half  of  Latin  American  for- 
eign trade  is  with  the  United  States.  In  1952, 
Latin  America  exported  to  the  United  States  about 
$3.4  billion  worth  of  goods  and  imported  approx- 
imately $3.5  billion  worth  from  the  United  States. 
Our  imports  in  1952  from  Latin  America  accounted 
for  approximately  32  percent. of  our  imports  from 
all  sources;  our  exports  to  Latin  America  were 
equivalent  to  approximately  23  percent  of  our 
total  export.  In  appraising  the  significance  of 
these  figures,  it  should  be  noted  that  virtually  none 
of  our  exports  to  Latin  America  were  financed  by 
grant  aid. 

In  addition  to  basic  foodstuffs  such  as  sugar  and 
coffee,  we  obtained  from  Latin  America  many  of 
the  raw  materials  which  are  essential  to  our  econ- 
omy both  in  peac?  and  war.  Latin  America  is 
the  major  single  source  of  some  twenty  materials 
on  the  United  States  stockpde  list.  Its  depend- 
ence upon  imports  from  the  United  States,  how- 
ever, is  probably  greater  than  our  dependence 
upon  imports  from  it.  Latin  America's  exports 
to  us  provide  employment  for  a  large  segment  of 
its  population.     These  exports  also  earn  the  dol- 


lar exchange  needed  for  the  purchase  of  man- 
ufactured goods,  foodstuffs,  and  capital  equip- 
ment and  for  servicing  dollar  indebtedness  and 
equity  investment  utilized  in  economic  develop- 
ment. 

As  a  part  of  a  broad  program  to  encourage 
participation  of  United  States  private  capital  in 
industrial  development,  a  cooperative  project  is 
being  undertaken  on  an  experimental  basis  in 
selected  countries  in  Latin  America.  Competent 
United  States  investment  advisors  are  being  sent 
to  these  countries  to  help  them  reduce  local  factors 
which  retard  the  flow  of  investment  capital  and  to 
explore  existing  investment  opportunities. 

Continued  effort  is  being  made  to  coordinate 
and  bring  into  play  all  available  facilities,  both 
government  and  private,  to  promote  the  flow  of 
investment  capital.  United  States  technical  as- 
sistance can  help  provide  a  sounder  basis  for  eco- 
nomic growth,  but  the  flow  of  private  capital  to 
Latin  America  can  stimulate  and  carry  economic 
development  far  beyond  the  capacity  of  a  tech- 
nical assistance  program  and  produce  mutual 
benefits  to  all  participants,  both  here  and  abroad. 

Hemispheric  Defense 

The  Latin  American  governments  have  become 
increasingly  aware  of  the  need  to  improve  the 
effectiveness  of  their  military  establishments. 
They  have  been  spending  sizable  portions  of  their 
own  budgets  on  national  defense,  and  they  have 
continued  to  request  and  utilize  the  services  of 
United  States  Army,  Navy,  and  Air  Force  Mis- 
sions to  improve  the  state  of  readiness  of  their 
armed  services.  They  have  purchased  from  this 
country  substantial  quantities  of  arms  with  a  view 
to  modernizing  their  forces.  They  also  have  made 
purchases  in  countries  other  than  the  United 
States  when  we  have  been  unable  to  meet  their 
needs  or  to  provide  them  as  favorable  terms  of 
sale. 

There  is  at  present,  however,  a  wide  gap  be- 
tween the  willingness  of  many  of  the  other  Amer- 
ican Republics  to  share  in  defending  the  hemi- 
sphere and  their  ability  to  do  so.  They  produce 
little  modern  military  equipment.  Their  armed 
forces,  in  general,  are  not  sufficiently  large  or 
properly  trained  and  equipped  to  carry  more  than 
a  part  of  the  burden  of  protecting  the  hemisphere. 


51 


It  was  largely  for  this  reason  that  during  World 
War  II  it  became  necessary  for  the  United  States 
to  station  more  than  100,000  troops  in  Latin 
America  and  to  use  our  naval  forces  to  guard  in- 
stallations and  critical  areas  in  the  other  Amer- 
ican Republics. 

The  military  grant  aid  and  training  programs 
for  the  American  Republics  are  designed  to 
strengthen  Latin  American  armed  forces  so  that 
they  will  be  more  capable  of  handling  tasks  which 
are  vital  to  the  security  of  the  Western  Hemisphere 
and  which  might  otherwise  require  the  deployment 
of  United  States  military  components. 

Military  assistance  appropriations  for  the  Ameri- 
can Republics  through  June  30,  1953,  totaled 
$89.8  million.  Of  this  amount  $79.9  million  has 
been  earmarked  for  procurement  and  delivery  of 
materiel,  $1.7  million  for  training  expenses,  and 
$8.2  million  for  the  fiscal  year  1954  program. 
Materiel  valued  at  $140  million  (including  value 
of  excess  stocks  not  charged  against  the  military 
assistance  appropriation)  was  programmed  for 
delivery  to  Latin  American  countries  as  of  June 
30,  1953;  the  value  of  materiel  shipped  totaled 
$65  million. 

During  the  first  half  of  1953,  military  aid  has 
been  supplied  to  Chile,  Colombia,  Cuba,  Ecuador, 
and  Peru.  In  May  and  June,  Brazil,  Uruguay 
and  the  Dominican  Republic  were  added  to  the 
list  of  countries  eligible  for  military  assistance 
when  they  ratified  bilateral  military  agreements 
with  the  United  States. 

The  Latin  American  governments  are  spending 
substantial  sums  of  their  own  funds  to  support 
the  forces  included  in  the  military  aid  program. 
They  are  defraying  such  costs  as  pay,  rations,  and 
uniforms.  They  have  made  or  are  making  pur- 
chases of  materiel  to  help  equip  these  units. 
Such  purchases  by  all  Latin  American  countries 
through  May  31,  1953,  totaled  $58.9  million. 
The  Latin  American  governments  participating 
in  the  program  also  have  agreed  to  pay  the  admin- 
istrative expenses  of  United  States  military 
personnel  assigned  to  their  countries  to  direct  the 
program. 

The  proportion  of  expenditures  borne  by  the 
recipient  countries  is  particularly  large  in  the  case 
of  the  navy  and  air  forces.  In  spite  of  limited 
and  obsolescent  facilities,  most  of  the  Latin 
American  countries  have  demonstrated  that  they 


can  maintain  ships  and  aircraft,  as  well  as  other 
military  equipment,  in  effective  operating  con 
dition.  A  majority  of  the  Latin  American  nations 
have  taken  active  steps  toward  correcting  de- 
ficiencies in  training  and  organization  by  request- 
ing and  securing  the  assistance  of  United  States 
military  missions  or  advisors.  It  is  expected 
that  the  training  programs  currently  in  effect 
under  the  guidance  of  United  States  military 
missions  and  advisors  will  be  continued.  To 
supplement  the  training  we  give  abroad,  spaces 
are  being  made  available  in  service  schools  in 
this  country  for  on-the-spot  study  of  our  military 
methods  by  Latin  American  military   students. 

The  Technical  Assistance 
Program 

Latin  America  has  the  potential  in  terms  fo 
natural  resources  both  to  build  a  prosperous  home 
industry  and  agriculture  and  to  expand  foreign 
trade.  There  are,  however,  a  number  of  handi- 
caps that  it  must  overcome.  In  terms  of  present 
technology  and  the  basic  needs  of  an  industrial 
society,  Latin  America  is  not  well  endowed.  To 
a  large  extent,  the  geographical  and  physical 
environment  of  Latin  America  impedes  economic 
development.  The  Andean  mountain  range,  which 
lies  athwart  the  length  of  the  area,  constitutes  a 
formidable  barrier  to  transportation  and  com- 
munication. Climatic  conditions  in  many  regions 
are  unfavorable  to  optimum  human  production. 
Land  and  mineral  resources  in  a  number  of  coun- 
tries of  the  area  are  limited. 

Through  the  bilateral  cooperative  technical 
assistance  program,  United  States  skills  are  being 
sent  to  19  of  our  neighboring  American  Republics  ' 
to  help  them  solve  their  most  pressing  economic 
and  social  problems. 

Spurred  by  a  widening  realization  among  Latin 
American  leaders  of  the  need  for  overall  economic 
growth,  the  various  phases  of  the  cooperative 
technical  assistance  program  gradually  are  being 
combined  within  the  framework  of  a  single  broad 
effort  toward  total  country  development.     Under 


1  These  countries  are:  Bolivia,  Brazil,  Chile,  Colombia, 
Costa  Rica,  Cuba,  Dominican  Republic,  Ecuador, 
El  Salvador,  Guatemala,  Haiti,  Honduras,  Mexico, 
Nicaragua,  Panama,  Paraguay,  Peru,  Uruguay,  Venezuela. 


52 


this  concept,  the  efforts  of  all  technicians  within 
selected  areas  of  a  country  are  being  integrated, 
and  each  individual  project  is  being  fitted  into  a 
pattern  designed  to  bring  about  a  balanced  devel- 
opment in  the  total  economy  of  the  country. 

A  significant  factor  in  carrying  out  development 
projects  is  the  large  number  of  Latin  Americans 
who  have  been  trained  as  a  part  of  the  cooperative 
program.  To  date  more  than  3,000  doctors, 
nurses,  sanitary  engineers,  laboratory  technicians, 
agriculture  specialists,  industry  and  transportation 
specialists,  educators,  and  other  technicians  have 
received  training  in  the  United  States.  Most  of 
these  professionals  are  now  occupying  responsible 
positions  within  their  own  countries  in  the  fields 
in  which  they  were  trained. 

In  addition,  approximately  20,000  Latin  Ameri- 
cans have  received  on-the-job  training  within  the 
program.  Together  these  groups  form  a  nucleus 
of  skilled  Latin  Americans  around  which  broad 
regional  development  programs  can  be  planned 
and  put  into  effect.  To  supplement  the  efforts  of 
these  trained  Latin  American  technicians,  there 
are  at  present  665  United  States  technicians  in 
the  other  Americas  who  are  skilled  in  the  know- 
how  that  has  been  developed  in  this  country. 

All  technical  assistance  activities  emphasize 
self-help  as  the  basis  for  any  program.  Projects 
must  be  cooperatively  administered  and  financed. 
For  fiscal  year  1952,  the  total  of  the  United  States 
contribution  towards  the  technical  assistance  pro- 
gram was  $17.8  million;  the  Latin  American  gov- 
ernments contributed  about  $32  million.  The 
United  States  contribution  towards  the  fiscal 
year  1953  program  will  total  about  $22  million. 
The  commitments  of  the  Latin  American  govern- 
ments to  match  this  will  total  about  $38  million. 

Bolivia — A  Typical  Example  of  Technical 
Assistance. — Bolivia  is  one  of  the  countries  that 
illustrates  the  need  for  technical  assistance  on  an 
area  development  basis.  In  the  Bolivian  highlands, 
averaging  over  12,000  feet  above  sea  level,  little 
food  has  been  produced  in  comparison  with  what 
is  needed.  Yet  most  of  Bolivia's  population  live 
in  this  region,  and  here  is  where  the  country's 
extractive  products — tin,  tungsten,  lead,  zinc, 
antimony,  and  silver — are  found. 

The  lowland  districts  of  Bolivia,  on  the  other 
hand,  contain  one-half  the  country's  area,  with 
large  tracts  of  fertile  land.     Yet  this  region  is 


Technical  Assistance  In  Latin  America 
Is  A  Joint  Program 

Contributions  to  Technical  Assistance  Projects 


(In  Millions  of  U.  S.  Dollars) 


60.7 


49.8 


1952 


1953 


Fiscal  Years 


the  most  sparsely  populated  and  the  least  de- 
veloped region  in  the  country.  To  those  who  had 
set  out  to  make  plans  for  improving  Bolivia's 
total  economy,  it  was  evident  that  food  production 
had  to  be  increased  to  reduce  the  dependence  on 
food  imports;  that  transportation  facilities  had  to 
be  expanded  so  that  available  foodstuffs  could  be 
distributed  more  efficiently  and  equitably;  that 
health,  sanitation,  and  housing  facilities  had  to  be 
improved;  and  that  better  mining  techniques  had 
to  be  introduced  to  lower  the  cost  of  Bolivian 
production  and  locate  new  mineral  sources. 

A  concerted  attack  is  being  made  along  a  wide 
front  to  overcome  these  problems.  Four  agricul- 
tural extension  offices  have  been  established. 
These  regional  offices  supervise  the  work  of  18 
branch  offices  and  24  national  agricultural  exten- 
sion agents,  all  of  whom  have  been  trained  by 
United  States  technicians  at  the  regional  extension 
and  research  centers.  Advanced  methods  of 
cultivation,  which  increase  production  and  reduce 
production  costs,  have  been  demonstrated.  New 
and  improved  seeds  adapted  to  local  soils  and 
growing  conditions  have  been  introduced.  It 
has  been  demonstrated  to  the  people  themselves 
that  the  use  of  fertilizer  can  greatlv  increase  the 


53 


yields  of  many  crops,  and  that  modern  insecticides 
and  pesticides  can  considerably  decrease  loss  from 
plant  insects  and  diseases.  Purebred  cattle  have 
been  brought  into  the  country  to  bring  about 
greater  dairy  and  beef  production.  It  is  expected 
that  large  areas  in  the  lowlands  will  be  opened  up 
for  farming  and  colonization. 

Bolivia  has  improved  its  medical  facilities  and 
hygiene  with  the  assistance  of  United  States  tech- 
nicians. Through  the  operation  of  10  health 
centers,  3  dispensaries,  and  3  mobile  units  serving 
over  half  a  million  persons  annually,  Bolivia  has 
made  good  progress  in  reducing  malaria,  typhus, 
and  intestinal  diseases.  United  States  technical 
assistance  has  been  given  to  municipalities  and 
schools  in  construction  of  water  supply  systems 
and  installation  of  chlorinating  equipment. 

A  program  of  industrial  hygiene  has  been  initi- 
ated in  the  mining  districts  to  protect  the  miners 
against  silicosis.  Also  in  the  mining  field,  research 
and  tests  have  been  carried  on  at  two  laboratories 
in  the  United  States  with  a  view  to  developing 
methods  of  concentrating  and  refining  low-grade 
tin  ores  and  tailings  in  order  to  reduce  costs  of 
production  and  increase  workable  Bolivian  tin 
reserves. 

Efforts  in  the  educational  field  have  been  con- 
centrated on  improving  elementary  teaching  and 
on  making  industrial  education  meet  the  needs  of 
industry  itself.  A  large  new  teacher-training  cen- 
ter is  in  operation  at  Warisata,  high  in  the  Andes. 
Here  a  group  of  United  States  and  Bolivian  tech- 
nicians are  preparing  prospective  teachers  who 
will  be  able  to  teach  not  only  the  3R's  but  also 
health  measures,  the  production,  preparation,  and 
processing  of  food,  home  improvement,  and  handi- 
crafts. Thousands  of  children  have  been  organ- 
ized into  4-S  Clubs,  which  correspond  to  our  4-H 
Clubs.  The  one  industrial  school  in  Bolivia  has 
been  improved  with  better  equipment  and  teach- 
ing materials,  and  other  industrial  schools  are 
being  planned. 

In  the  transportation  field,  18  airport  sites  have 
been  surveyed  by  our  technicians,  and  the  Bolivian 
Government  now  is  independently  negotiating 
contracts  with  United  States  firms  to  begin  instal- 
lations on  several  of  those  sites. 

Thus  the  cooperative  effort  to  improve  national 
production  and  living  standards  in  Bolivia  has 
been  moving  in  an  orderly  fashion.  It  has  been 
initiated  as   a  result   of  requests  made  by   the 


Bolivian  Government  for  United  States  technical 
assistance.  Tt  has  been  carried  on  in  accordance 
with  agreements  that  carefully  delineate  what  is 
to  be  done  and  what  contribution  each  government 
is  to  make  in  both  funds  and  personnel. 

Brazil — Another  Example. — Another  example 
of  broad  planning  and  the  interrelationship  of 
diverse  activities  is  found  in  the  completed  and 
successful  work  of  the  Joint  Brazil-United  States 
Commission  for  Economic  Development,  estab- 
lished in  1950  to  assist  Brazil  in  planning  its  long- 
range  economic  development  program.  The  Com- 
mission was  expected  to  complete  its  work  shortly 
after  July  31,  1953.  The  new  Brazilian  Economic 
Development  Bank  will  take  over  responsibility 
for  putting  the  plans  into  effect. 

Following  a  general  survey  of  Brazil's  economy, 
the  Joint  Commission  determined  that  railroad 
and  highway  transportation,  power,  minerals, 
agriculture,  and  shipping  should  be  given  priority, 
since  they  represent  Brazil's  fundamental  needs. 
On  the  basis  of  technical  studies,  projects  were 
selected  in  the  specified  fields,  and  loan  applications 
were  prepared  and  submitted  to  the  Brazilian 
National  Economic  Development  Bank  for  local 
financing,  and  to  the  International  Bank  for 
Reconstruction  and  Development  or  the  Export- 
Import  Bank  of  Washington  for  foreign  currency 
financing. 

The  Joint  Commission  has  given  particular  at- 
tention to  the  development  of  adequate  power 
facilities,  encouraging  the  development  of  hydro- 
electric projects.  Emphasis  also  has  been  placed 
on  the  development  and  improvement  of  transpor- 
tation facilities.  Since  the  existing  railroad  and 
highway  networks,  for  the  most  part,  lead  from 
inland  Brazil  to  the  coast,  distribution  of  industrial 
and  agricultural  commodities  is  limited.  To  solve 
this  problem  the  Joint  Commission  development 
program  laid  out  farm-to-market  road  systems, 
terminal  storage  facilities,  and  improvements  in 
railroads,  ports,  and  coastwise  shipping. 

Cornerstone  of  the  Commission's  planning  has 
been  the  selection  of  projects  which  would  make 
the  greatest  contribution  to  Brazil's  economic  de- 
velopment based  on  that  Government's  ability  to 
pay  its  own  way.  Each  project  has  been  devel- 
oped on  sound  banking  principles  necessary  to 
justify  the  loans  the  Brazilian  Government  is  re- 
questing. This  country's  participation  in  the  pro- 
gram is  solely  that  of  making  available  United 


54 


States  financial,  technical,  and  engineering  serv- 
ices. 

Brazil's  economic  development  will  require  par- 
ticipation by  outside  private  investment  sources. 
To  expand  its  economy,  the  Brazilian  Government 
will  have  to  encourage  additional  private,  local, 
and  foreign  capital  participation. 

Important  gains  are  being  scored  on  Brazil's 
health  front.  In  the  Amazon  River  valley,  56 
centers  and  their  subposts  are  available  to  serve 
an  estimated  2  million  people  scattered  over  this 
immense  area.  Efforts  have  been  concentrated 
on  reducing  malaria  and  infectious  diseases  that 
affect  almost  the  entire  valley  population.  As  a 
result  of  these  cooperative  programs,  the  incidence 
of  these  diseases  has  been  reduced  drastically. 
When  work  on  this  project  first  began  in  1942, 
there  were  40  United  States  technicians  working 
with  500  Brazilians.  Today  the  work  is  being 
carried  forward  entirely  by  Brazilian  staffs,  most 
of  whom  were  trained  as  part  of  the  cooperative 
program. 

Other  Recent  Progress 

Activity  in  the  fields  of  agriculture  and  natural 
resources,  health  and  sanitation,  and  education 
was  described  in  the  previous  Semiannual  Report- 
Progress  has  continued  in  these  fields  and  has 
made  a  significant  contribution  to  the  economic 
development  of  Latin  America.  During  the  past 
6  months,  increased  attention  has  been  given  to 
activities  which  may  be  divided  into  four  major 
categories:  industry,  transportation  and  com- 
munications, public  administration,  and  special- 
ized scientific  and  technical  services. 

Although  diversified,  projects  in  these  categories 
are  interrelated,  and  the  program  is  so  administered 
and  planned  that  each  project  contributes  to  the 
broad  objectives  of  the  program. 

Industrial  Development. — A  number  of  Latin 
American  countries  recently  have  shown  a  grow- 
ing interest  in  raising  their  industrial  produc- 
tivity. Local  industries  are  developing,  and  the 
demands  for  greater  production  are  insistent.  Yet 
industrial  productivity  levels  generally  are  low, 
and  the  pace  of  development  lags  because  there 
is  not  available  locally  in  most  areas  knowledge  of 
techniques  necessary  for  optimum  production. 

Recognition  of  the  need  for  industrial  know- 
how  and  engineering  techniques  has  led  to  specific 


requests  from  Latin  American  countries  for  tech- 
nical assistance,  and  industrial  productivity  Servi- 
cios  have  been  established  in  Chile  and  Brazil. 

These  Servicios  are  jointly  financed  cooperative 
agencies,  set  up  by  Latin  American  govern- 
ment as  bureaus  within  appropriate  ministries,  to 
carry  out  specific  programs  of  assistance.  Under 
the  Mutual  Security  Program,  there  is  a  small 
United  States  field  party  of  three  to  six  technicians 
in  each  Servicio,  and  United  States  industrial 
engineering  firms  provide  specialized  technicians 
on  a  contract  basis.  As  in  other  Servicios,  the 
cooperating  country  pays  a  substantial  share, 
usually  more  than  half  the  cost  of  the  program. 
The  cooperative  programs  in  the  field  of  industrial 
productivity  are  directed  toward  assisting  coun- 
tries in  which  at  least  a  moderate  degree  of 
industrialization  has  taken  place. 

To  aid  the  less  industrialized  countries  of  Latin 
America,  the  United  States  has  made  available 
assistance  which  thus  far  has  taken  two  main 
forms — economic  surveys  and  aid  to  small  indus- 
tries. In  some  instances,  requests  have  been  re- 
ceived for  basic  surveys  of  a  country's  industrial 
potential.  The  United  States  is  meeting  these 
requests  by  contracting  with  private  industrial 
organizations  to  make  the  surveys. 

A  field  of  activity  with  important  potentialities 
is  that  of  handicrafts  and  manual  industries.  In 
several  countries  of  Latin  America,  the  sale  of 
handicraft  articles  constitutes  an  important  source 
of  income  for  portions  of  the  population;  in  other 
countries,  it  is  a  potential  though  undeveloped 
source.  Mutual  security  programs  are  aimed  at 
helping  to  improve  methods,  designs,  and  tools 
without  losing  the  local  skills  and  traditions  on 
which  the  handicraft  arts  are  based. 

Transportation. — Transportation  facilities  in 
much  of  Latin  America  are  inadequate.  The 
entire  area,  twice  as  large  as  that  of  the  United 
States,  has  about  one-third  of  our  railroad  mileage 
and  fewer  motor  vehicles  than  the  whole  State  of 
New  Jersey.  Shortage  of  farm-to-market  trans- 
portation handicaps  the  movement  of  foods  and 
other  agricultural  products. 

The  transportation  program  has  been  given 
renewed  emphasis  both  to  achieve  fuller  utilization 
of  existing  facilities  and  to  provide  new  facilities 
to  keep  pace  with  other  phases  of  the  overall 
economic  development  programs.     Active  techni- 


55 


cal  cooperation  projects  now  in  process  and  under 
consideration  include  road  development  in  Mexico, 
Bolivia,  Honduras,  Costa  Rica,  Paraguay,  and 
Brazil;  railroad  assistance  in  Brazil,  Ecuador,  and 
Peru;  port  development  and  shipping  assistance 
in  Peru,  Costa  Rica,  Brazil,  Haiti,  Honduras,  and 
Nicaragua;  inland  waterway  development  in 
Brazil  and  Paraguay;  and  civil  aviation  assistance 
in  six  countries. 

Public  Administration. — The  main  objective 
of  the  public  administration  program  is  to  help  the 
cooperating  country,  at  its  request,  improve  its 
administrative  methods  and  techniques.  Pro- 
grams in  this  field  are  in  effect  in  cooperation  with 
the  governments  of  the  following  countries:  El 
Salvador,  Costa  Rica,  Honduras,  Panama,  Colom- 
bia, Chile,  Brazil,  Mexico,  Paraguay,  and  Uruguay. 

In  Brazil,  our  technicians  are  serving  as  con- 
sultants to  the  Brazilian  Board  of  Advisors  on 
Public  Administration.  This  board  of  advisors 
is  composed  of  1 1  officials  who  represent  federal  and 
state  governments,  academic  institutions,  and  the 
legislative  branch.  Its  functions  are  to  identify 
problems,  to  reduce  them  to  projects,  to  assign 
priorities  based  on  the  importance  of  the  projects 
to  the  development  of  the  country,  and  to  deter- 
mine  if   there   are  sufficient  Brazilian   resources 


available  or  if  special  external  assistance  should 
be  requested. 

In  Chile,  a  United  States  advisor  is  working 
with  a  Hoover- type  commission  which  has  been 
established  to  study  and  recommend  possible 
improvements  in  organization  of  the  Chilean  ex- 
ecutive branch.  In  the  other  countries,  a  Avide 
range  of  local  projects  is  under  way  with  the  bene- 
fit of  technical  advice  from  United  States  tech- 
nicians— for  example,  reorganization  of  state  and 
city  governments,  establishment  of  civil  service 
systems,  and  surveys  of  national  health,  welfare, 
and  social  organizations.  By  assistance  of  this 
type,  government  administration  is  being  im- 
proved and  economic  progress  accelerated. 

Technical  Services. — In  addition  to  the  fore- 
going activities,  the  program  in  Latin  America 
includes  technical  assistance  in  census  methods 
and  statistics.  Projects  in  these  fields  are  being 
carried  forward  in  eight  countries. 

To  fit  in  with  industrial  developments,  technical 
labor  services  in  industrial  safety,  labor  statistics, 
employment  service  operations,  and  industrial 
relations  now  are  being  provided  at  the  request  of 
seven  Latin  American  countries. 

Assistance  in  the  fields  of  taxation,  customs, 
material  standards,  and  surveying  also  is  being 
provided  as  needed. 


56 


CHAPTER  VI 


Other  Parts  of  the  Program 


A  number  of  activities  under  the  Mutual  Secu-. 
rity  Program  cannot  properly  be  grouped  on 
a  regional  basis.  A  report  on  these  activities  is 
contained  in  this  section. 

Participation  in  International  Organiza- 
tions 

As  a  member  of  the  United  Nations,  the  United 
States  contributes  its  share  towards  the  cost  of 
carrying  on  international  programs  of  technical 
assistance,  and  relief  and  rehabilitation.  It  also 
coordinates  United  States  bilateral  foreign  assis- 
tance operations  with  those  of  international 
organizations  to  maximize  the  benefits  not  only 
to  an  individual  country  but  also  to  the  collective 
effort  of  the  free  world. 

United  Nations  Expanded  Program  of  Tech- 
nical Assistance. — The  United  Nations  program 
is  an  international  effort  to  enlist  technical  skills 
from  many  nations  to  help  the  governments  and 
people  of  underdeveloped  areas  expand  their 
economic  resources. 

In  1950,  the  United  States  joined  with  54  other 
governments  in  making  voluntary  contributions 
to  a  special  United  Nations  technical  assistance 
account.  At  present,  we  provide  approximately 
60  percent  of  total  contributions  to  this  account. 
By  careful  planning  in  Washington,  at  United 
Nations  headquarters  and  in  the  field,  United 
Nations  and  United  States  technical  assistance 
programs  do  not  overlap  but  complement  each 
other.  In  some  sensitive  areas,  United  Nations 
programs  are  more  acceptable  to  governments 
than  those  carrisd  out  solely  by  this  country. 
Furthermor?,  the  United  Nations  program  recruits 
the  majority  of  its  experts  from  other  countries, 
thereby  reducing  the  drain  on  American  techni- 
cians and  making  the  fullest  use  of  the  technical 
resources  of  other  nations. 


Sixty-seven  countries  pledged  slightly  over  $21 
million  in  February  1953  in  support  of  the  United 
Nations  Expanded  Program  of  Technical  Assis- 
tance for  1953.  Although  this  figure  was  almost 
$2.5  million  more  than  was  pledged  for  1952,  it 
was  substantially  short  of  the  target  figure  of 
$25  million  in  new  funds  for  1953  which  the  General 
Assembly  had  established. 

The  United  States  was  prepared  to  make  avail- 
able to  the  1953  program  a  total  of  $14.7  million. 
At  the  60  :  40  ratio,  however,  the  pledges  of  other 
countries  were  not  sufficient  to  draw  down  this 
entire  amount,  and  the  United  States  pledge  there- 
fore amounted  to  $12.8  million.  Of  this  amount, 
$6  million  had  been  contributed  as  of  June  30, 
1953. 

Experts  have  been  recruited  from  64  countries, 
and  are  serving  in  62  countries.  Fellowships  have 
been  awarded  to  nationals  of  92  countries  and 
territories  for  study  in  76  countries.  It  is  note- 
worthy that  approximately  25  percent  of  the  total 
number  of  experts  is  drawn  from  underdeveloped 
countries,  and  that  about  13  percent  of  the  total 
number  of  fellowships  awarded  has  been  for 
study  in  underdeveloped  countries. 

United  Nations  International  Children's 
Emergency  Fund. — In  1952,  the  United  Nations 
International  Children's  Emergency  Fund 
(UNICEF)  placed  increasing  emphasis  on  aid  for 
long-range  child  care  programs,  particularly  in 
underdeveloped  countries.  Such  programs  include 
basic  maternal  and  child  welfare  services  and 
training;  and  mass  health  programs  including  the 
control  of  tuberculosis,  malaria,  yaws,  syphilis, 
and  other  diseases. 

Under  UNICEF-aided  programs  in  1952,  13.5 
million  children  were  tested  for  tuberculosis  and 
5  million  were  vaccinated;  5  million  were  examined 


57 


for  j'aws  and  prenatal  syphilis,  and   1.3  million 
were  treated. 

Also  8.3  million  children  were  protected  against 
malaria  and  other  insect-borne  diseases;  126,000 
were  immunized  against  diphtheria  and  whooping 
cough;  and  3  million  received  diet  supplements. 
During  the  year,  aid  was  approved  for  2,000  ma- 
ternal and  child  welfare  centers,  mainly  in  rural 
areas. 

A  target  goal  of  $20  million  has  been  approved 
for  allocations  from  the  central  account  of 
UNICEF  during  calendar  year  1953.  At  its 
March  meeting  the  Executive  Board  of  UNICEF 
allocated  $5.3  million,  including  $4.7  million  for 
programs  in  46  countries  and  territories  and 
$662,000  for  freight.  Allocation  of  these  funds, 
which  were  received  in  then  entirety  from  sources 
other  than  the  United  States  Government,  left 
the  UNICEF  central  account  with  an  approxi- 
mate balance  of  $2,600  in  unallocated  funds.  Since 
then,  additional  contributions  from  other  govern- 
ments, resulted  in  the  availability  as  of  June  30, 
1953,  of  approximately  $600,000.  The  Congress 
has  appropriated  $9.8  million  to  permit  the  United 
States  to  make  a  contribution  toward  the  calendar 
year  1953  UNICEF  program. 

Program  of  Technical  Cooperation  of  the 
Organisation  of  American  States. — On  January 
22,  1953,  the  Inter-American  Economic  and 
Social  Council  approved  a  program  containing 
11  projects,  at  an  estimated  total  cost  of  $1.9 
million,  for  the  1953  Program  of  Technical  Coop- 
eration of  the  Organization  of  American  States. 
Six  of  these  projects,  which  are  continued  from 
1952,  are  in  the  fields  of  agricultural  extension, 
cooperatives,  housing,  child  welfare,  economic 
and  financial  statistics,  and  animal  husbandry. 
The  last-named  project  involves  a  research  and 
diagnostic  service,  and  a  demonstration  and 
training  center  in  hoof-and-mouth  disease  control. 

As  of  June  30,  1953,  pledges  from  18  govern- 
ments for  1953  totaled  $1.4  million.  The  United 
States  pledged  $1  million  on  the  understanding 
that  its  contributions  would  not  exceed  70  percent 
of  total  payments.  As  of  June  30,  1953,  the 
United  States  had  paid  $303,230  toward  its  pledge. 

Reimbursable  Military  Assistance 

Reimbursable  military  assistance  is  provided 
under  the  authority  of  section  408  (e)  of  the 
Mutual    Defense    Assistance    Act    of    1949,    as 


amended.  Under  this  section,  the  President  is 
authorized  to  transfer — or  enter  into  contracts 
for  the  procurement  for  transfer — equipment, 
materials,  or  services  to  eligible  foreign  govern- 
ments and  international  organizations,  without 
cost  to  the  United  States. 

Assistance  in  this  form  provides  a  means 
whereby  the  United  States  can  help  the  friendly 
nations  of  the  world  to  help  themselves.  At  the 
same  time,  requests  from  other  nations  for 
military  items  can  be  merged  with  the  overall 
procurement  programs  of  the  United  States 
military  departments,  thus  avoiding  conflicting 
demands  on  the  productive  capacity  of  the 
United  States.  Fifty-four  countries  and  two 
international  organizations  are  at  present  eligible 
to  make  purchases  under  this  authority. 

As  of  May  31,  1953,  requests  for  reimbursable 
military  assistance  had  been  submitted  by  50 
countries.  Forty-five  of  these  countries  had  made 
purchases  of  equipment,  materials,  and  services. 
These  purchases — including  cost  of  rehabilitation, 
renovation,  repair,  training,  and  accessorial 
charges — were  valued  at  $647  million.  Purchases 
were  made  by  $478  million  in  cash  advances,  and 
$169  million  through  the  use  of  contractual 
obligational  authority  under  the  "dependable 
undertaking"  method  of  payment  provided  for 
in  the  Mutual  Defense  Assistance  <\.ct  of  1949,  as 
amended.  Of  the  total  purchases,  $559  million 
were  for  equipment  and  materials  such  as  end- 
items,  spare  parts,  and  supplies.  Deliveries  of 
these  items,  valued  at  $244  million,  had  been 
made  to  43  countries  through  May  1953. 

Almost  every  type  of  military  equipment  has 
been  purchased  by  the  countries  participating  in 
this  program.  The  more  important  purchases 
have  been:  6  light  cruisers,  5  destroyer  escorts,  5 
coast  guard  utility  vessels,  4  patrol  frigates,  430 
aircraft  of  all  types,  485  tanks,  187  gun  motor 
carriages,  318  armored  cars,  and  such  items  as 
motor  transport  vehicles,  weapons,  ammunition, 
and  electronic  equipment. 

Military  Training 

Foreign  military  students  are  being  trained  by 
the  United  States  under  the  military  assistance 
program  to  insure  that  our  allies  will  be  capable 
of  effectively  employing  and  maintaining  the 
materiel  they  receive.  Training  requirements  are 
related    directly    to    the    delivery    of    end-item 


58 


equipment.  A  tank  or  an  airplane  will  contribute 
little  to  our  defense  unless  our  allies  are  trained 
to  use  these  weapons  properly  and  can  keep  them 
in  operating  condition. 

Country  training  programs  provide  a  cadre  of 
indigenous  American-trained  military  personnel. 
With  this  cadre  as  a  nucleus,  our  allies  can  expand 
and  modernize  their  own  training  establishments 
and  accelerate  progress  toward  military  self- 
support.  We  will  have  accomplished  our  training 
mission  when  we  have  worked  ourselves  out  of  a 
job  by  providing  countries  with  a  sufficient  num- 
ber of  capable  instructors  to  meet. then  own  re- 
quirements. When  that  point  is  reached,  only 
limited  training  will  be  required  for  our  partner 
nations  to  keep  abreast  of  our  latest  techniques 


and  technical  developments.  The  training  budget 
amounts  to  approximately  1.5  percent  of  the  total 
funds  appropriated  for  military  assistance  but  it 
is  a  vital  factor  in  the  success  of  the  entire  program. 

The  self-help  provisions  of  the  Mutual  Security 
Program  have  been  stressed,  and  countries  finan- 
cially able  to  do  so  have  borne  a  portion  of  the 
cost  involved  in  the  training  programs.  For  ex- 
ample, these  countries  pay  transocean  transporta- 
tion costs  of  their  students  and  certain  costs  of 
maintaining  United  States  advisory  and  instruc- 
tional personnel  overseas.  In  the  interest  of 
economy,  training  is  carried  on  in  American 
overseas  installations  to  the  greatest  extent 
possible. 

Maximum  use  is  made  of  existing  personnel  and 


A  group  of  NATO  officers  and  soldiers  being  instructed  in  the  operation,  and  maintenance  of  a  tank  at  an 
overseas  United  States  Ai*my  ordnance  school. 


59 


training  facilities  which  are  required  to  support 
our  own  overseas  forces.  When  circumstances 
permit,  training  is  taken  directly  to  the  forces  in 
the  field  by  mobile  training  teams  and  technical 
representatives.  By  the  end  of  the  fiscal  year, 
more  than  32,500  allied  personnel  had  either  com- 
pleted formal  courses  or  were  in  training  at  Army, 
Navy,  and  Air  Force  installations  in  this  country 
and  abroad.  This  program  has  paid  high  divi- 
dends in  the  improved  use  and  maintenances  of 
equipment,  and  the  training  requirements  of  the 
recipient  countries  should  show  a  significant 
decrease  in  1954. 

Small  Business 

During  the  period,  activities  were  stepped  up 
to  help  United  States  small  business  achieve  a 
greater  share  of  the  export  trade  financed  under 
the  Mutual  Security  Program.  Efforts  were  also 
intensified  to  promote  greater  participation  in 
overseas  investments  by  small  and  medium-sized 
American  enterprises. 

Advance  procurement  information  on  proposed 
purchases  by,  or  on  behalf  of,  foreign  governments 
and  private  importers  was  provided  in  the  form  of 
small  business  circulars.  From  January  1  through 
June  30,  1953,  563  of  these  circulars  were  issued, 
215  more  than  during  the  first  half  of  1952. 

An  important  step  was  taken  to  increase  this 
flow  of  advance  procurement  information  to  small 
manufacturers  and  exporters.  All  future  pro- 
curement authorizations  issued  under  the  Mutual 
Security  Program  will  include  a  provision  stating 
that,  "the  participating  country  agrees  to  make 
every  effort  to  furnish,  as  promptly  as  possible, 
to  the  Office  of  Small  Business,  MSA/W,  the  names 
and  addresses  of  prospective  buyers  and  the  indi- 
vidual commodity  items  and  services  to  be 
purchased." 

The  extent  to  which  small  business  is  partici- 
pating in  the  United  States-financed  purchases 
made  by  the  Emergency  Procurement  Service  is 
reflected  in  a  report  by  the  General  Services 
Administration.  This  report  shows  that  86  per- 
cent of  EPS  purchases  made  during  the  last 
quarter  of  1952  and  financed  under  the  Mutual 
Security  Program  went  to  small  business  firms. 
Small  Business  Circulars  carry  notices  of  proposed 
EPS  purchases. 


To  encourage  and  stimulate  greater  participation 
by  small  and  medium-sized  enterprises  in  the  effort 
to  increase  American  private  investment  abroad, 
plans  have  been  developed  to  extend  "Contact 
Clearing  House  Services"  to  all  free  countries  of 
the  world  where  encouragement  of  private  invest- 
ment would  promote  the  objectives  of  the  Mutual 
Security  Program.  This  free  service  helps  estab- 
lish contacts  between  American  and  foreign  private 
enterprises  interested  in  exploring  specific  oppor- 
tunities for  entering  into  investment  agreements. 
It  effectively  uses  domestic  and  overseas  private 
business  service  organizations — such  as  industry 
associations,  chambers  of  commerce,  and  banks — 
for  the  collection  and  dissemination  of  specific 
investment  proposals  here  and  abroad.  The  Con- 
tact Clearing  House  Service  has  been  welcomed 
and  utilized  by  private  concerns  in  the  United 
States,  in  13  Western  European  countries,  and  in 
Israel. 

During  the  period  under  review,  final  arrange- 
ments were  made  for  extension  of  the  Contact 
Clearing  House  Service  to  the  Philippines  and 
Peru. 

Investment  Guaranty  Program 

Through  the  investment  guaranty  program,  the 
United  States  Government  has  offered,  for  a  fee, 
insurance  protection  to  new  American  investments 
abroad  against  the  risks  of  currency  inconverti- 
bility and  loss  through  confiscation  or  expropria- 
tion. All  the  countries  for  which  aid  is  authorized 
by  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951  are  eligible  to 
participate  in  the  program  provided  they  make 
certain  assurances  regarding  claims  settlement  to 
the  United  States.  By  June  30,  1953,  the  re- 
quired assurances  had  been  obtained  from  17 
countries  with  respect  to  convertibility  guaranties; 
bilateral  agreements  with  15  of  these  countries 
also  were  made  with  respect  to  expropriation 
guaranties.  The  17  countries  included  four  non- 
European  countries:  China,  Israel,  Haiti,  and  the 
Philippines. 

Through  June  30,  1953,  53  industrial  investment 
guaranties  totaling  $41.2  million  had  been  issued 
to  cover  private  investments  in  seven  European 
countries.  Of  the  total,  $39.6  million  insured 
against  inconvertibility  of  foreign  currency  re- 
ceipts, and  $1.6  million  against  loss  from  expropria- 


60 


tion  or  confiscation.  Total  fees  collected  amounted 
to  $839,000;  no  payments  under  the  contracts 
have  been  required. 

Transportation 

50-50  American  Flag  Provision. — At  least  50 
percent  of  the  tonnage  of  Mutual  Security  Pro- 
gram cargoes  from  the  United  States,  insofar  as 
practicable,  must  be  transported  in  American-flag 
vessels.  This  percentage  is  computed  separately 
for  dry-bulk  carriers  (tramps),  dry-cargo  liners, 
and  tanker  services.  During  the  fiscal  year  1953, 
American-flag  participation  in  the  liner  and  tanker 
categories  met  these  requirements. 

On  the  basis  of  reports  received  for  liftings 
between  July  1, 1952,  and  June  30, 1953,  American- 
flag  vessels  carried  56  percent  of  the  2.2  million 
tons  of  MSA-financed  goods  shipped  from  the 
United  States  by  liner.  During  the  same  period. 
American-flag  tankers  moved  52  percent  of  the 
360,000  tons  of  MSA-financed  tanker  shipments 
from  the  United  States. 

About  1.6  million  tons  of  MSA-financed  dry- 
bulk  cargoes  left  the  United  States  between  July  1, 
1952,  and  December  31,  1952.  Fifty-one  percent 
of  the  shipments  moved  in  American-flag  vessels. 
Since  then,  under  the  nonavailability  clause,1  MSA 
has  exempted  dry-bulk  shipments  from  the  50-50 
provision  as  there  were  not  sufficient  American- 
flag  tramps  available  to  carry  half  of  the  MSA- 
financed  shipments. 

Through  May  31,  1953,  American-flag  commer- 
cial vessels  carried  67  percent  of  all  military  items 
shipped  under  the  military  assistance  program. 

Homebound  cargoes  of  strategic  materials  se- 
cured under  the  Mutual  Security  Program  are 
also  subject  to  the  50-50  American-flag  require- 
ment. Of  all  such  tonnage  arriving  in  the  United 
States  since  June  30,  1952,  80  percent  was  carried 


1  Section  111  (a)  (2)  of  Public  Law  472,  80th  Cong.,  as 
amended. 


by  American-flag  vessels.     All  shipmeats  were  in 
the  liner  category. 

"Formosa  Clause." — The  Mutual  Security 
Agency,  in  order  to  implement  the  governmental 
policy  with  respect  to  trade  with  Communist 
China,  inserted  in  charters  of  foreign-flag  vessels 
employed  for  the  transportation  of  United  States 
Government-financed  bulk  cargoes  to  Far  East 
countries  a  special  clause,  which  has  become 
known  as  the  "Formosa  Clause."  This  provides 
for  withholding  a  certain  portion  of  the  freight 
as  a  penalty  in  the  event  that  the  vessel  trades 
with  Communist  ports  in  the  Far  East  within  a 
period  of  60  days  after  discharge.  This  clause 
has  been  adopted  for  use  in  connection  with  ship- 
ments to  other  countries  in  the  general  vicinity 
of  China. 

Voluntary  Relief  Shipments 

From  July  1948  through  June  1953,  subsidy 
payments  to  cover  the  cost  of  ocean  transporta- 
tion of  voluntary  relief  shipments  totaled  over  $27 
million.  Parcel  post  relief  packages  sent  by  indi- 
vidual donors  over  the  5-year  period  accounted 
for  69  percent  of  this  amount.  The  balance  went 
to  pay  for  relief  shipments  of  voluntary  nonprofit 
relief  agencies.  The  parcel  post  subsidy  program 
was  terminated  March  31,  1953. 

The  generally  improved  economic  conditions  in 
Europe  have  been  reflected  in  the  progressive 
decrease  during  recent  years  in  reimbursements 
to  voluntary  nonprofit  relief  agencies  for  ocean 
freight  charges  on  relief  shipments.  The  subsidy 
payments  in  fiscal  year  1953,  for  example,  were 
30  percent  less  than  those  for  fiscal  year  1949. 

In  May  1953,  the  Department  of  Agriculture 
made  available  45,000  tons  of  dried  milk  to  vol- 
untary relief  agencies  for  distribution  abroad. 
Over  8,000  tons  of  this  milk  were  shipped  by  the 
end  of  June  under  the  program  for  subsidizing 
voluntary  agency  shipments. 


61 


II.   S.  GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE!  1953 


83d  Congress,  2d  Session 


House  Document  No.  337 


m  m 


%cemiet  J/,  /953 


83d  Congress,  2d  Session  House  Document  No.  337 


Report  to  Congress 

on  the 

Mutual  Security  Program 


December  31,  1953 


PRESIDENT'S  LETTER  OF  TRANSMITTAL 

To  the  Congress  of  the  United  States: 

I  am  transmitting  herewith  the  report  on  the  Mutual  Security  Program 
covering  operations  during  the  6-month  period,  June  30,  1953,  to  December 
31,  1953,  in  furtherance  of  the  purpose  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951,  as 
amended. 

In  this  report  is  factual  evidence  of  valuable  progress  being  made  through 
mutual  efforts  toward  the  vital  goal  of  increased  security  for  this  Nation 
and  all  the  free  world. 


X_y   L-iS-y  L^tX^J  (j~iCj^  X*^-o^\ 


The  White  House, 

March  8,  1954. 


in 


CONTENTS 

.  Page 

President's  Letter  of  Transmittal UI 

Chapter  I.  Foreign  Operations:  A  Progress  Report 1 

II.  Europe 12 

III.  Near  East,  Africa,  and  South  Asia 24 

IV.  Far  East . 37 

V.  American  Republics 48 

VI.  Other  Parts  of  the  Program 57 


CHAPTER  I 


Foreign  Operations:  A  Progress 

Report 


A  SERIES  of  new  and  vital  measures  to  promote 
the  defense  capabilities,  economic  strength, 
and  technical  advance  of  the  peoples  of  the  free 
world  marked  the  progress  of  the  mutual  security 
program  during  the  second  half  of  1953.  These 
measures  reached  into  every  part  of  the  globe, 
from  Latin  America  to  Western  Europe  to  the 
Near  East  and  Africa  and  around  to  South  Asia 
and  the  Far  East.  They  embraced  a  multitude 
of  action  programs,  diverse  in  character  and  varied 
in  approach,  but  all  with  one  central  objective: 
"to  maintain  the  security  and  promote  the  foreign 
policy  of  the  United  States."  This  is  the  objec- 
tive laid  down  by  the  Congress,  and  every  step 
taken  under  the  mutual  security  program  has 
been  directed  toward  its  accomplishment. 

The  Soviet  Union  and  the  governments  under 
its  control  by  their  actions  and  attitudes  continue 
to  threaten  world  peace.  The  mutual  security 
program  is  based  on  the  practical  concept  that  no 
one  nation,  including  the  United  States,  can  meet 
this  threat  with  maximum  effectiveness  by  acting 
alone.  The  resources  and  capabilites  of  the  entire 
free  world,  strengthened  and  united  in  a  mutual 
effort,  constitute  the  best  insurance  against  further 
aggression  and  the  best  means  ultimately  to 
remove  the  tensions  and  fears  which  so  greatly 
retard  world  progress. 

Because  the  threat  has  manifested  itself  in  so 
many  forms  and  in  so  many  places,  the  United 
States  of  necessity  has  moved  on  a  number  of 
fronts.  But,  everywhere,  the  basic  purpose  of 
our  operations  abroad  has  been  to  build  strength 
and  stability  throughout  the  free  world.  This 
purpose  underlies  all  mutual  security  programs 
whether  they  concern  military  aid,  economic 
support,  technical  cooperation,  or  world-wide  use 
of  our  farm  surpluses.     These  measures  reinforce 


the  security  of  the  United  States;  simultaneously, 
they  help  to  increase  the  self-reliance  of  our  free 
world  allies. 

In  terms  of  tangible  returns  for  the  United 
States,  the  mutual  security  program  provides 
overseas  military  bases,  combat-ready  manpower 
greater  in  numbers  than  our  own,  more  productive 
sources  of  strategic  materials,  added  industrial 
capacity,  and  healthier,  stronger  partner  nations. 
Above  all,  it  encourages  millions  of  people  to  work 
with  us  in  the  unceasing  quest  for  world  stability 
and  world  peace. 

Economic  Improvement  and  Shift 
in  Emphasis  of  Aid 

Of  particular  importance  in  influencing  the 
recent  course  of  United  States  mutual  security 
programs  has  been  the  general  improvement  in 
world  economic  conditions. 

One  indication  of  the  strong  recovery  in  the 
economic  health  of  the  free  nations  of  the  work) 
lies  iu  a  comparison  of  United  States  aid  and 
United  States  exports  over  the  past  4  years.  In 
1949,  this  country  financed  about  35  percent  of 
its  total  exports  of  nonmilitary  goods  and  serv- 
ices by  grants  and  loans.  In  1953,  only  about 
15  percent  was  financed  by  United  States  aid. 

Western  Europe,  in  particular,  has  made  a 
steady  advance.  European  industrial  and  agri- 
cultural production  has  risen  to  new  peaks,  gold 
and  dollar  reserves  have  increased  substantially, 
currencies  have  become  firmer,  inflationary  pres- 
sures have  generally  leveled  off,  and  the  defense 
position  of  the  European  NATO  countries  has 
continued  to  strengthen. 

These  achievements — tangible  evidence  of  the 
successful  combination  of  United  States  aid  and 


the  energies  of  the  European  people — gradually 
have  made  it  possible  to  reduce  our  assistance  to 
Western  Europe  as  a  whole.  For  the  future,  as 
the  Director  of  the  Foreign  Operations  Adminis- 
tration, Mr.  Harold  E.  Stassen,  noted  following  his 
return  from  the  November  meeting  of  the  Ministers 
of  the.  Organization  for  European  Economic  Co- 
operation, "there  is  a  very  definite  indication  that 
Western  Europe  can  maintain  substantially  its 
current  defense  budgets,  and  at  the  same  time  move 
forward  on  a  sound  economic  basis  with  a  con- 
siderable reduction  in  military  aid  and  also — 
with  a  few  exceptions — the  termination  of  United 
States  economic  assistance." 

The  economic  achievements  in  Europe  have 
permitted  a  proportionately  greater  concentration 
on  United  States  technical  cooperation  and  special 
economic  aid  programs  in  the  less  developed  areas 
of  the  world.  By  carefully  planned  and  properly 
supported  undertakings  in  these  areas,  by  pin- 
pointing projects  on  a  selected  priority  basis,  by 
more  intensive  effort  on  the  part  of  the  partici- 
pating countries,  and  by  our  own  cooperative 
assistance,  there  is  every  reason  to  believe  that 
the  peoples  of  the  underdeveloped  countries  will 
lift  themselves  onto  much  higher  levels  of  eco- 
nomic well-being. 

Expanded  Technical  Cooperation 

A  world-wide  technical  cooperation  program  has 
been  developed  and  expanded  by  the  Foreign 
Operations  Administration  to  meet  the  need  for  a 
long-range  and  relatively  economical  method  of 
carrying  out  United  States  policy  objectives  for 
world  stability.  During  the  last  6  months, 
recruitment  of  qualified  technicians  has  improved, 
and  the  United  States  now  has  more  specialists  in 
the  field  than  ever  before.  These  professional 
experts,  working  on  the  spot  and  close  to  the 
problems  at  hand,  are  imparting  knowledge  of 
modern  methods  to  the  people  of  the  less  de- 
veloped areas.  Through  increasingly  productive 
cooperative  relationships  and  individual  contacts, 
the  foundation  to  future  progress  in  the  under- 
developed areas  is  being  laid.  Present  plans 
project  an  expanding  program  of  technical  co- 
operation, with  economic  aid,  where  it  is  essential, 
carefully  geared  into  the  objectives  of  the  various 
individual  projects. 

There  are  good  and  compelling  reasons  why 
technical  cooperation  operations  must  be  planned 
and  executed  within  the  overall  framework  of  the 
total  United  States  effort  to  help  promote  world 


progress.  In  most  areas,  the  effectiveness  of  a 
technical  cooperation  program  is  closely  involved 
with  important  economic  considerations.  In  some 
countries,  such  as  Bolivia,  for  example,  technical 
cooperation  must  be  related  to  the  problem  of 
diversifying  a  single-industry  economy.  In  other 
countries,  such  as  India,  the  technical  cooperation 
program  has  to  be  planned  with  a  view  to  the 
ultimate  effects  on  the  labor  force,  particularly 
with  regard  to  possible  increases  in  unemployment 
or  disrupting  shifts  as  between  agriculture  and 
industry. 

Integration  of  technical  and  economic  measures 
for  planning  and  operating  purposes  increases  the 
effectiveness  of  each  component,  and  thereby  the 
impact  of  the  total  program.  This  does  not  imply 
subordination  or  amalgamation  so  that  the  tech- 
nical cooperation  programs  lose  the  enormous  good 
will  they  have  built  up  over  the  years.  There 
continues  to  be  a  clear-cut  technical  cooperation 
program  in  each  country  taking  part  in  the  tech- 
nical cooperation  effort. 

The  effectiveness  of  the  technical  cooperation 
program  is  being  further  enhanced  by  enlarging 
the  opportunities  for  United  States  colleges  and 
universities  to  participate  directly  in  country 
projects.  The  Foreign  Operations  Administration 
is  assisting  American  universities  to  develop  local 
technical  centers  in  the  host  country;  there  are 
currently  30  universities  under  contract  in  17 
countries. 

Some  of  these  contracts  are  directly  with  the 
Foreign  Operations  Administration;  others  are 
with  the  local  universities  of  the  foreign  countries. 
As  part  of  the  effort  to  increase  the  participation 
of  United  States  colleges  and  universities  in  tech- 
nical cooperation  programs,  arrangements  are 
being  made  to  extend  contracts  over  a  three-year 
period.  United  States  institutions  would  be 
encouraged  to  assist  foreign  institutions  in  such 
fields  as  agriculture,  health,  education,  public 
administration,  and  engineering. 

Aid,  Trade,  and  U.  S.  Economic  Health 

Expanded  world  trade  is  of  vital  importance  in 
the  effort  to  build  greater  world  stability  and  I 
ultimately  remove  the  requirements  for  large-scale  I 
United  States  assistance.  As  the  previous  Eeport 
to  Congress  on  the  Mutual  Security  Program* 
pointed  out,  the  American  economy  cannot  be 
divorced  from  the  world  economy.     That  report 


'For  the  period  ended  June  30,  1953. 


gave,  specific  instances  to  show  that  America's 
great  productive  capacity  could  not  be  long  main- 
tained, let  alone  enlarged,  without  the  vast  quan- 
tities of  basic  materials  provided  by  other  coun- 
tries. It  also  showed  that  the  high  level  of  our 
prosperity,  particularly  with  regard  to  the  farmer, 
depends  to  a  great  extent  upon  the  amount  of 
goods  other  countries  are  able  to  buy  from  us, 
and  it  brought  out  the  vital  importance  of  two- 
way  international  trade  to  our  own  continued 
economic  prosperity. 

Kecent  statistics  strikingly  re-emphasize  these 
same  hard  facts.  United  States  total  agricultural 
exports  for  the  1952-53  crop  year  amounted  to 
$2.8  billion.  Significant  though  this  figure  is  in 
showing  the  magnitude  of  American  farm  income 
derived  from  abroad,  it  is,  nevertheless,  30  percent 
below  the  agricultural  export  figure  for  the  pre- 
ceding 12  months  of  1951-52,  and  20  percent 
below  the  5-year  average  for  the  crop  years 
1947-52.  The  volume  of  exports  of  wheat 
and  wheat  flour  in  crop  year  1953  dropped  by  33 
percent  under  the  previous  1 2-month  period ;  lard 
dropped  by  33  percent;  and  cotton  and  cotton 
linters,  by  50  percent.  Though  farm  exports  evi- 
denced an  upward  trend  during  the  latter  half  of 
1953,  they  were  still  substantially  under  the  1947- 
52  average. 

American  industry,  too,  leans  heavily  on  its 
foreign  markets.  As  of  the  third  quarter  of  1953, 
our  nonagricultural  exports,  excluding  military 
aid  shipments,  were  running  at  the  rate  of  about 
$9  billion  for  the  year.  On  the  same  basis,  these 
are  some  of  the  items  American  industry  exported 
for  the  full  year  1953;  over  250,000  automobiles 
and  trucks;  almost  500,000  refrigerators  and 
freezers;  almost  12  million  barrels  of  lubricating 
oil;  and  more  than  $1  billion  worth  of  machine 
tools,  agricultural  machinery,  and  tractors. 

Our  farms  and  factories  could  ill  afford  to  lose 
these  enormous  sales  abroad,  but  the  extent  to 
which  the  foreign  market  for  American  goods 
contracts  or  enlarges  depends  in  great  measure 
upon  the  amount  of  dollars  other  countries  have 
available  to  spend.  With  economic  aid  tapering 
off,  a  constantly  expanding  volume  of  international 
trade,  coupled  with  increased  outflow  of  private 
United  States  investment  capital,  is  the  only  real, 
long-term  solution  to  dollar  shortages  abroad.  In 
this  connection,  it  should  be  noted  that  much  of 
the  improvement  in  Western  Europe's  gold  and 
dollar  reserves  has  been  due  to  the  extraordinary 
United   States   military   expenditures   in  Europe 


and  to  the  fact  that  the  European  countries  as  a 
whole  have  been  buying  less  from  the  hard- 
currency  areas.  Other  countries  of  the  world, 
also,  have  in  general  been  trying  to  conserve  their 
dollar  exchange.  As  a  result,  the  overall  volume 
of  international  trade  has  remained  rather  con- 
stant. This  is  not  the  sort  of  stability  we  are 
seeking.  Stable  economies  should  not  mean  static 
economies.  This  could  lead  only  to  eventual 
economic  stagnation.  Rather  we  look  to  increase 
the  flow  of  mutually  profitable  world-wide  trade. 

It  is  an  exceedingly  difficult  and  complex  task 
to  develop  a  national  trade  policy  consistent  with 
America's  position  as  the  world's  greatest  creditor 
and  greatest  producer,  and,  at  the  same  time,  not 
place  inequitable  burdens  either  upon  specific 
segments  of  the  American  economy  or  upon  other 
nations  who  must  earn  their  living  in  the  world. 
Yet,  unquestionably,  if  the  nations  of  the  world 
are  to  flourish  and  move  on  to  higher  levels  of 
trade,  production,  and  living  standards,  the  for- 
mulation and  activation  of  such  a  policy  is  of 
utmost  importance. 

In  this  connection,  the  recommendations  recent- 
ly made  by  the  President's  bipartisan  Commission 
on  Foreign  Economic  Policy,  headed  by  Clarence 
B.  Randall,  are  being  carefully  considered. 

The  Need  for  Private  Investment  Abroad 

Along  with  other  measures,  international  invest- 
ment plays  an  essential  part  in  achieving  a  larger 
volume  of  world  trade  and  production.  Private 
investment  abroad  brings  two-way  benefits.  It 
enables  the  recipient  country  to  make  more  rapid 
strides  toward  development  of  its  own  resources, 
toward  greater  productivity  of  its  agriculture  and 
industries,  and  toward  better  living  standards  for 
its  people.  For  the  investor,  in  addition  to  im- 
mediate monetary  returns  in  the  form  of  earnings 
and  reinvestment  capital,  it  brings  new  markets 
and  a  wider  demand  for  his  products;  in  many 
cases,  it  provides  additional  sources  of  needed 
supplies.  During  the  6-month  period,  discussions 
were  carried  on  with  various  governments  on  ways 
to  utilize  United  States  private  investment  capital 
to  the  greater  mutual  advantage  of  the  investor 
and  the  country  involved.  These  discussions 
proved  particularly  fruitful  with  reference  to 
Turkey.  The  Turkish  Government  has  passed 
legislation  to  remove  many  of  the  obstacles  which 
heretofore  have  retarded  the  use  of  private  de- 
velopment capital. 


290163—54- 


Private  Investment  Abroad  Has  Risen 

Increases  in  U.S.  Direct  Private  Investment 

(Millions  of  Dollars)  1,730 


1,301 


1,088 


Net  Reinvested 
■  Earnings' 


1950 


1951 


1952 


'Includes  oiher  minor  chonges. 
Source:  U.S.  Deportment  of  Com 


Raising  World  Living  Standards 

In  any  consideration  of  the  various  ways  by 
which  the  United  States  can  assist  other  countries 
in  then  efforts  to  make  better  use  of  their  resources 
and  speed  then  development,  we  must  keep  sight 
of  the  fact  that  our  primary  concern  is  not  with 
production  statistics  and  index  numbers,  but  with 
people.  The  ultimate  aim  of  our  technical  and 
economic  programs  is  to  advance  the  well-being 
and  improve  the  standard  of  living  of  the  individ- 
ual farmer  and  the  individual  worker. 

Western  Europe  has  the  world's  largest  reser- 
voir of  skilled  manpower  and  is  second  only  to  the 
United  States  in  industrial  capacity.  Yet  per 
capita  gross  national  product  for  Western  Europe 
as  a  whole — that  is,  the  individual  share  of  the 
value  of  total  goods  and  services  produced — is  less 
than  $600  a  year,  compared  to  over  $2,200  a  year 
in  the  United  States. 

The  industrial  worker  in  Europe  lags  far  behind 
his  American  counterpart  in  terms  of  what  he  can 
purchase  for  the  work  he  does.  In  Great  Britain, 
for  example,  in  1953,  one  hour's  wages  bought 
about  60  percent  of  the  food  that  an  hour's  wages 
bought  in  the  United  States.  In  France,  it  bought 
about  50  percent;  in  Germany,  40  percent;  in 
Italy,    30    percent.     These    comparisons    include 


certain  subsidies  and  allowances  which  in  some  in- 
stances supplement  take-home  pay,  but  even  with 
these  added  factors  the  purchasing  power  of  the 
average  European  worker  remains  far  below  that 
of  his  counterpart  in  this  country. 

In  the  less  developed  areas  of  the  world,  the 
situation  is  far  worse  than  in  Europe.  In  most 
of  Asia  and  the  Near  East,  per  capita  gross  national 
product  is  less  than  $100  a  year.  In  Latin  Amer- 
ica, although  there  is  wide  variation  among 
countries,  the  average  is  below  the  levels  required 
to  support  an  adequate  standard  of  living. 

It  is  essential  to  any  forward  economic  move- 
ment that  effective  steps  be  taken  to  improve 
world  living  standards  by  increasing  the  real 
wages  of  the  worker,  and  by  achieving  higher 
productivity  and  greater  output  to  meet  the 
expanding  purchasing  power. 

The  United  States  has  consistently  encouraged 
the  efforts  of  other  nations  in  their  work  toward 
these  ends.  It  has  actively  supported  European 
measures  to  eliminate  restrictive  practices,  lib- 
eralize intra-European  trade,  and  create  a  single 
European  market  based  on  expanded  production 
and  healthy  competition.  It  has  attempted, 
through  its  productivity  programs  in  various 
countries  of  the  world  to  insure  that  the  benefits 
of  increased  turnover  and  greater  productive 
efficiency  are  shared  equitably  with  workers  and 
consumers.  Through  pilot  projects  and  person- 
to-person  demonstration  methods,  our  technicians 
have  shown  practical  means  by  which  the  farmer 
and  the  worker  in  the  underdeveloped  areas 
can  improve  their  methods  of  production. 

These  measures,  however,  cannot  do  more  than 
stimulate  and  reinforce  the  far  greater  self-help 
measures  of  the  other  nations  of  the  free  world. 
Theirs  is  the  main  task  of  carrying  forward  the 
difficult,  but  imperative,  actions  required  to 
satisfy  the  needs  and  aspirations  of  their  peoples. 

A  Period  of  Positive  Actions 

The  period  covered  by  this  report — July  1 
through  December  31,  1953 — was  highlighted  by 
a  number  of  noteworthy  actions  under  the  mutual 
security  program: 

Military  Defense 

Global  Military  Shipments. — A  growing 
supply  of  essential  military  weapons  and  equip- 
ment continued  to  flow  to  our  allies  in  all  parts 


of  the  world.  Total  shipments  in  1953  amounted 
to  $3.8  billion — more  than  60  percent  higher  than 
in  1952,  although  shipments  during  the  second 
half  of  the  year  were  running  at  a  somewhat 
lower  rate  than  during  the  first  half-year  period. 
The  cumulative  value  of  military  grant-aid  ship- 
ments from  the  inception  of  the  military  assistance 
program  in  October  1949  through  December  31. 

1953,  totaled  $7.7  billion.  Almost  50  percent  of 
this  4-year  total  was  shipped  during  1953. 

On  a  global  basis,   the  major  items  delivered 
through  December  31,  1953,  included: 

99,444    electronics    and    signal    equipment 
items. 

30,792  tanks  and  combat  vehicles. 

176,343  motor  transport  vehicles. 

30,037  artillery  pieces. 

35,372,000  rounds  of  artillery  ammunition. 

601  Navy  vessels. 

5,340  aircraft. 

Almost  2  million  small  arms  and  machine 

guns  were  shipped,  along  with  about  1,100 

million  rounds   of  small- arms  and   machine 

gun  ammunition. 

NATO  Buildup.— The  NATO  force  goals  for 

1954,  agreed  upon  by  the  14  member  countries 
at  the  end  of  1953,  call  for  a  5-percent  increase  in 


U.  S.  Military  Shipments  Help  Build 
A  Global  Defense 

Value  of  Military  Aid  Shipments  Through 
December  31,  1953 


Latin  America 

83 


$^724  Million 


army  divisions,  a  15-percent  increase  in  naval 
vessels,  and  a  25-percent  increase  in  aircraft.  The 
European  NATO  countries  spent  over  $11.5 
billion  on  defense  measures  in  1953.  To  meet  the 
force  goals,  these  countries  plan  a  moderate  in- 
crease in  their  military  expenditures  during  1954. 
This  increase  follows  a  more  than  twofold  rise  in 
expenditures  since  Korea. 

The  combined  NATO  forces  had  grown  con- 
siderably by  the  end  of  1953.  As  compared  with 
January  1951,  NATO's  active  divisions  had 
more  than  tripled,  and  naval  strength  had  also 
been  considerably  expanded.  Plane  strength 
had  increased  more  than  2%  times;  old-type 
piston-driven  aircraft  had  been  replaced  by 
modern  jets.  Airfields  had  increased  from  15 
to  more  than  120;  more  were  planned  for  the  next 
2  years. 

Reinforcing  the  Military  Effort  in  Indo- 
china.— The  United  States  made  available  an 
additional  $385  million  to  reinforce  the  effort  of 
France  and  the  Associated  States  of  Indochina 
Cambodia,  Laos,  and  Viet-Nam  in  the  8-year-old 
war  against  the  Communist-led  Viet  Minh  forces. 
This  amount  was  in  addition  to  the  $400  million 
previously  appropriated  by  Congress  for  special 
financial  aid  for  fiscal  year  1954.  During  the 
latter  half  of  1953,  arrangements  were  made  to 
channel  this  assistance  to  the  Indochina  theater 
of  operations  in  order  to  give  full  support  to 
General  Navarre's  plan  for  revitalizing  the  cam- 
paign against  the  Viet  Minh  aggressors. 

The  rate  of  United  States  military  shipments 
to  Indochina  in  1953  was  50  percent  higher  than 
in  1952.  Deliveries  under  the  mutual  security 
program  have  included  substantial  quantities  of 
ammunition,  aircraft,  transport  and  combat 
vehicles,  naval  vessels,  and  a  wide  range  of  other 
needed  materiel. 

A  Combined  Program  for  Spain. — After  18 
months  of  negotiation,  the  United  States  signed 
three  bilateral  agreements  with  Spain  in  Septem- 
ber 1953  to  strengthen  the  defense  capabilities  of 
the  West.  These  agreements  covered:  construc- 
tion and  joint  use  of  military  bases  in  Spain; 
military  assistance;  and  economic  aid  and  technical 
cooperation.  For  the  fiscal  year  1954,  $226 
million  has  been  programed  for  military  and 
economic  aid  to  Spain. 

By  the  end  of  the  year,  a  United  States  Opera- 
tions Mission,  for  economic  and  technical  pro- 
grams, and  a  Military  Assistance  Advisory  Group, 
both  under  the  Ambassador,  already  were  estab- 


United  States-supplied  155-mm.  howitzers  in  Indochina.  Shipments  of  American  military  equipment  to 
aid  the  French  and  the  Viet-Namese  in  their  resistance  to  Communist  aggression  were  50  percent  higher 
in  1953. 


lished  in  Madrid  and  working  with  the  Spanish 
authorities  to  carry  out  the  proposed  programs. 

Economic  Strength 

Support  to  Korea. — Within  4  days  of  con- 
gressional approval  in  August  of  a  $200  million 
emergency  aid  program  for  Korea,  the  Foreign 
Operations  Administration  had  dispatched  initial 
supplies  of  needed  rice,  barley,  and  cotton;  later, 
fertilizer  and  rubber  were  added.  By  the  end  of 
1953,  substantial  quantities  of  these  commodities 
had  arrived  in  Pusan  harbor. 

Over  $400  million  has  been  programed  for 
fiscal  year  1954  to  be  used  to  assist  the  courageous 
Korean  people  in  their  effort  to  rebuild  and 
strengthen  their  war-torn  country.  This  amount 
includes  activities  of  the  Foreign  Operations  Ad- 
ministration,   the   Department   of   Defense,    and 


the  United  Nations  Korean  Reconstruction 
Agency.  In  December  1953,  an  agreement  was 
signed  with  representatives  of  the  Republic  of 
Korea,  covering  necessary  arrangements  for  an 
integrated  program  of  economic  recovery  and 
financial  stabilization.2 

Bolstering  Iran's  Economy. — Iran  was 
confronted  with  financial  disaster  at  the  time 
Prime  Minister  Zahedi  took  office  in  August  1953. 
To  help  the  new  and  friendly  Iranian  Govern- 
ment through  its  economic  crisis,  the  President 
made  an  emergency  grant  of  $45  million  to  Iran 
in  September.  Substantially  all  of  these  funds 
had  been  obligated  by  the  end  of  the  year  for 
financing  imports  of  urgently  needed  commodities 

2  On  January  26,  1953,  Congress  approved  the  Mutual 
Defense  Treaty  between  the  United  States  and  the 
Republic  of  Korea. 


and  for  temporary  budget  support.  The  immedi- 
ate crisis  was  successfully  met,  but  Iran  continued 
to  face  a  variety  of  deep-seated  problems.  The 
problem  of  oil  exports,  in  particular,  must  be 
solved  if  the  country  is  to  move  toward  more  du- 
rable economic  strength. 

Aid  to  Bolivia. — Special  programs  of  emergency 
economic  aid  and  expanded  technical  cooperation 
were  initiated  for  Bolivia  to  help  the  country 
meet  a  critical  situation  brought  on  by  the  sharp 
drop  in  world  tin  prices.  Almost  60  percent 
of  Bolivia's  export  trade  consists  of  tin.  With  its 
foreign  exchange  seriously  depleted  by  the  loss  of 
earnings  from  its  main  export  item.,  the  Bolivian 
Government  lacked  the  resources  to  finance 
imports  of  needed  food  and  other  commodities 
in  short  supply. 

In  October  1953,  $5  million  worth  of  surplus 
wheat  and  wheat  flour  were  programed  for 
shipment  to  Bolivia.  Moreover,  up  to  $4  million 
of  mutual  security  funds  was  programed  for 
further  economic  aid,  including  the  purchase  of 
additional  United  States  agricultural  commodities. 

In  conjunction  with  these  emergency  programs, 
other  measures  were  taken  to  provide  more  basic 
solutions  to  Bolivia's  food  problems.  Another  $2 
million  was  added  to  the  technical  cooperation 
funds  for  the  country,  and  emphasis  was  placed 
on  those  projects  which  will  most  rapidly  increase 
Bolivia's  food  production. 

Recovery  in  Austria. — The  determined  efforts 
of  the  Austrian  people,  supported  by  United  States 
assistance  during  the  critical  postwar  years,  have 
brought  the  Austrian  economy  to  the  point  where 
no  direct  economic  aid  funds  are  required  for  the 
fiscal  year  1954.  Another  name  was  thus  added 
to  the  list  of  European  countries  whose  economic 
progress  has  enabled  them  to  continue  building 
strength  without  further  economic  aid.  These 
countries  include  Belgium,  Denmark,  Iceland, 
Ireland,  Luxembourg,  the  Netherlands,  Norway, 
Portugal,  and  Sweden. 

Austria's  economic  progress  testifies  to  the  suc- 
cess of  the  joint  recovery  programs  of  Austria  and 
the  United  States.  For  example,  Austrian  gold 
and  dollar  reserves  increased  by  $95  million  during 
1953  to  reach  a  total  of  $238  million  at  the  end 
of  the  year.  This  represents  a  rise  of  more  than 
130  percent  since  1951.  Exports  climbed  from 
$286  million  in  1949  to  an  estimated  $530  million 
in  1953.  Industrial  production  increased  by 
nearly  40  percent  in  the  same  period. 


The  Austrian  Government,  in  carrying  forward 
its  programs  to  increase  industrial  and  agricul- 
tural productivity,  will  continue  to  participate  in 
the  United  States  technical  cooperation  program. 

Constructive  Use  of  Farm  Surpluses 

Agricultural  Surpluses  for  Friendly  Coun- 
tries.— The  desire  of  Congress  to  reduce  surplus 
farm  stocks  is  being  meshed  with  our  foreign 
economic  programs.  Under  Section  550  of  the 
mutual  security  legislation,  Congress  provided 
that  from  $100  million  to  $250  million  of  mutual 
security  funds  appropriated  for  fiscal  year  1954 
shall  be  used  for  the  purchase  of  surplus  agricul- 
tural commodities  to  be  sold  to  friendly  countries 
for  foreign  currencies. 

The  proceeds  from  such  sales  can  be  used  for 
providing  military  assistance  to  our  allies,  for 
purchasing  goods  or  services  abroad  to  provide 
economic  assistance,  for  loans  to  increase  the  pro- 
duction of  strategic  materials,  and  for  similar  con- 
structive purposes.  By  the  end  of  1953.  nearly 
$60  million  had  already  been  allotted  for  sales  of 
agricultural  surplus  commodities.  (Total  allot- 
ments through  January  31,  1954,  increased  to 
nearly  $90  million.  By  the  end  of  January,  also, 
about  $80  million  of  additional  sales  were  under 
active  negotiation  with  a  strong  probability  of 
concluding  such  sales  within  60  days.  Another 
$100  million  worth  were  under  consideration,  of 
which  it  was  estimated  that  $50-$60  million  worth 
might  materialize.)  Special  precautions  are  being 
taken  to  safeguard  against  displacing  usual 
marketings  of  either  the  United  States  or  friendly 
countries. 

Food  Parcels  to  East  Germany. — In  a  little 
over  2  months,  nearly  1  million  East  Germans 
crossed  to  the  western  side  of  the  Iron  Curtain  to 
pick  up  and  take  home  about  5%  million  parcels, 
containing  18,000  tons  of  American  food  products. 
The  United  States,  acting  in  cooperation  with  the 
West  German  Republic,  instituted  this  food  pro- 
gram, in  July  1 953  to  show  by  concrete  action  the 
concern  of  the  West  for  the  hungry  people  of  East 
Germany. 

Despite  various  pressure  tactics  by  their  Soviet- 
dominated  government,  the  East  Germans 
swarmed  into  the  Western  Zone  to  get  the  food 
they  needed.  The  good  will  evoked  by  this 
humanitarian  program,  and  the  better  under- 
standing fostered  between  East  Germans  and  the 
West,  more  than  repaid  the  program,  cost. 


Under  the  East  German  Food  Program,  about  a  million  people  crossed  to  the  western  side  of  the  Iron  Curtain. 
These  grandmothers  from  East  Germany  later  picked  up  their- share  of  5%  million  parcels  distributed  in  West 
Berlin  over  a  10-week  period.     One-sixth  of  Germans  under  Communist  domination  benefited  by  this  program. 


Special  Food-Package  Program. — The 

various  food  programs  of  the  United  States  serve 
as  a  means  whereby  the  people  of  free  world 
countries  share  directly  in  the  benefits  of  our 
operations  abroad.  In  addition  to  the  "550" 
agricultural  surplus  and  East  German  food  pro- 
grams, special  food  packages  were  distributed  on  a 
world-wide  basis  during  Christmas-time  1953. 
These  packages,  holding  12  to  14  pounds  of  food- 
stuffs in  abundant  supply  in  this  country  were 
delivered  to  needy  families  in  Western  Europe, 
the  Near  East,  and  Latin  America.  With  the 
cooperation  of  the  foreign  governments  involved, 
the  packages,  marked  with  the  clasped-hand 
emblem  symbolic  of  United  States  programs 
abroad,  were  distributed  through  local  charitable 
groups  and  other  relief  agencies. 


Emergencg  Wheat  Shipments. — The  Pak- 
istan wheat  program  was  inaugurated  in  late 
July  1953  to  counter  the  threat  of  famine  which 
faced  the  friendly  Pakistani  people  after  two  suc- 
cessive years  of  drought.  By  the  end  of  Decem- 
ber 1953,  about  600,000  tons  of  wheat,  pro- 
gramed under  special  legislation,  had  been 
delivered  or  was  en  route.  The  Ambassador  of 
Pakistan  stated  in  November  that  receipt  of  the 
wheat  from  the  United  States  was  helping  to  save 
millions  of  his  people  from  starvation. 

During  the  second  part  of  1953,  food  relief 
programs  were  also  carried  out  for  Bolivia,  Jordan, 
and  Libya.  Under  these  programs,  57,200  tons 
of  surplus  wheat  are  being  furnished  to  alleviate 
serious  food  shortages  in  these  countries.  Bolivia 
will  receive  45,000  tons  of  wheat  under  the  $5 


million  emergency  authorization  for  the  country 
previously  mentioned.  Jordan  received  10,000 
tons  of  wheat;  and  Libya,  2,200  tons.  The  total 
value  of  the  grain  shipments  to  these  three  coun- 
tries, programed  under  Public  Law  216,  is  esti- 
mated at  $6.5  million. 

Streamlining  for  Greater  Efficiency 

The  Presidential  reorganization  plan  creating 
the  Foreign  Operations  Administration  (FOA) 
became  effective  on  August  1,  1953.  By  October 
1,  the  necessary  reorganization  measures  were 
completed.  The  Mutual  Security  Agency,  the 
Office  of  the  Director  for  Mutual  Security,  the 
Technical  Cooperation  Administration,  the  Insti- 
tute of  Inter-American  Affairs,  and  several  other 
formerly  segmented  foreign  operations  were  merged 
into  a  single  unified  structure. 

In  carrying  forward  its  various  activities  abroad, 
the  FOA  receives  foreign  policy  guidance  from  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  guidance  on  military  policy 
from  the  Secretary  of  Defense.  Broad  proposals 
for  any  major  undertaking  overseas  are  passed 
upon  by  the  National  Security  Council.     On  this 


Council  regularly  sit  as  statutory  members  the 
President,  the  Vice-President,  the  Secretaries  of 
State  and  Defense,  and  the  Directors  of  the  Foreign 
Operations  Administration  and  the  Office  of  De- 
fense Mobilization.  Approval  by  the  National 
Security  Council  thus  insures  that  the  actions 
carried  out  under  the  mutual  security  program 
are  coordinated  with  the  nation's  security  interests. 

The  Public  Advisory  Board  and  the  Interna- 
tional Development  Advisory  Board,  both  com- 
posed of  outstanding  private  representatives  of  the 
American  people,  also  provide  valuable  advice  on 
basic  matters  of  foreign  operations. 

This  integrated  pattern  of  operation  permits 
a  more  concentrated  and  effective  approach  to 
the  problems  of  free  world  security  and  develop- 
ment. A  specific  situation  of  assistance  to  a 
given  country,  for  example,  may  involve  not 
only  technical  cooperation  but  also  the  question 
of  raw  materials  prices,  the  relationships  to  our 
own  stockpiling,  the  issue  of  East-West  trade 
controls,  the  extent  of  the  country's  available 
markets,  its  economic  and  defense  ties  with 
neighboring  countries,  and  its  capacity  to  absorb 


Free  distribution  of  American  wheat  at  the  supply  point  at  the  Mansur  Camp  in  Punjab,  Pakistan. 


a  certain  scale  and  type  of  aid.  All  these  complex 
matters,  so  closely  interwoven,  are  now  being 
considered  in  the  light  of  one  consistent  operational 
policy  so  that  the  greatest  possible  advance  can 
be  made  toward  the  desired  goals. 

For  most  rapid  and  efficient  action,  the  field 
of  FOA  operations  was  organized  into  four  regional 
divisions — Europe;  Near  East,  South  Asia  and 
Africa;  Far  East;  and  Latin  America.  These 
regions  correspond  exactly  in  area  coverage  to 
the  geographic  regions  of  the  Assistant  Secretaries 
of  State.  This  regional  breakdown  thus  insures 
a  direct  coordination  between  program  operations 
and  policy  formation. 

Another  component  deals  with  the  difficult  and 
far-reaching  problem  of  controls  on  trade  relating 
to  the  Soviet  Bloc,  more  familiarly  known  as 
East-West  trade.  In  addition,  since  various 
problems  that  arise  in  different  parts  of  the  globe 
have  many  similarities  in  method  of  treatment, 
a  number  of  technical  activities — for  example, 
food  and  agriculture,  industrial  and  labor  affairs, 
trade  and  investment — were  grouped  to  operate 
on  a  functional  basis. 

Along  with  these  fundamental  organizational 
principles,  the  Director  of  the  Foreign  Operations 
Administration,  Mr.  Stassen,  also  introduced  a 
fresh  approach  to  the  actual  conduct  of  the  various 
programs  and  projects.  Procedures  were  worked 
out  to  decentralize  to  a  much  greater  degree  than 
ever  before  the  authority  and  responsibility  for 
taking  the  initiative  and  making  decisions.  In 
line  with  this  emphasis  on  decentralization, 
increased  reliance  has  been  placed  on  the  judgment 
and  effectiveness  of  the  regional  directors  in  the 
Washington  organization  and  the  Mission  direc- 
tors in  the  field.  The  overseas  Missions,  in  turn, 
have  decentralized  their  own  operations  by 
working  more  in  the  grass  roots  areas  and  less 
in  the  capital  cities. 

The  consolidation  of  agencies  and  functions 
into  the  organizational  framework  of  the  FOA 
made  it  possible  to  effect  a  heavy  reduction  in 
administrative  overhead.  Total  direct  employ- 
ment in  Washington  was  reduced  by  24  percent, 
or  some  450  positions,  between  January  31  and 
December  31,  1953.  In  the  same  period,  the 
European  Regional  Office  in  Paris  was  cut  by 
56  percent  in  personnel  strength;  also,  the  three 
ambassadorial  positions  in  Paris  were  reduced  to 
one.  Direct  employment  in  the  European  Mis- 
sions was  reduced  by  about  30  percent.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  number  of  United  States  techni- 


Mutual  Security  Funds  Have  Been  Gradually 
Reduced  In  Recent  Years;  The  Major  Share 
Has  Been  For  Direct  Military  Purposes 


(Billions of  Dollars) 

Appropriations  for  Mutual  Security 


Direct  Military  Aid 


1951 


1952 


1953 


1954 


Fiscal  Yeors 


clans  in  the  field  in  the  underdeveloped  areas 
has  been  increased  by  35  percent  to  accord  with  the 
invigorated  technical  cooperation  effort.  In  sum- 
mary, Washington  overhead  has  been  reduced, 
and  overseas  effectiveness  has  been,  increased. 
These  personnel  shifts  have  been  carried  out  in 
conformance  with  the  expressed  wish  of  Congress 
to  reduce  administrative  costs  by  20  percent. 
The  FOA  has  been  woven  into  a  cohesive,  tightly 
knit  organization,  working  with  maximum  econ- 
omy and  full  efficiency  to  accomplish  the  objec- 
tives of  United  States  policy. 

Mutual  Security  and  the  Future 

As  strength  in  the  free  world,  particularly  in 
Europe,  has  grown,  total  funds  appropriated  for 
United  States  programs  overseas  have  been  grad- 
ually decreased.  The  reductions  in  military  and 
economic  aid,  in  general,  have  paralleled  the 
growing  self-reliance  of  the  nations  we  are  helping. 
In  several  countries,  the  need  for  United  States 
aid  is  over;  in  others,  this  aid  has  been  consider- 
ably reduced  in  magnitude;  in  still  others,  aid 
will  most  probably  reach  an  end  in  the  near  future 
as  economic  strength  is  built  up.  On  the  other 
hand,  a  number  of  new  or  expanded  programs 
have  been  initiated — such  as  the  increased  effort 
against  Communist  aggression  in  Indochina,  the 


10 


rebuilding  of  war-shattered  Korea,  and  the  new 
agreements  with  Spain.  We  are  also  working 
out  methods  of  using  our  domestic  food  surpluses 
overseas. 

To  produce  truly  worthwhile  and  durable 
results,  United  States  programs  abroad  must  be 
planned  and  carried  out  in  the  context  of  long- 
range  calculations.  The  development  of  the 
NATO  aUiance,  the  global  buildup  of  military 
bases  and  military  forces,  the  technical  coopera- 
tion and  special  economic  aid  programs  in  the 
less  developed  areas — these  programs  are  being 
contracted  or  expanded  in  accord  with  plans  to 
attain  positions  of  solid  free  world  economic 
and  military  strength  to  combat  a  long-term 
danger  and  enhance  the  opportunities  for  world 
stability.  Such  programs  cannot  be  drastically 
cut  without  undoing  much  of  the  rewarding 
success  that  has  been  so  painstakingly  and 
laboriously  achieved. 


The  amounts  and  types  of  aid  we  give  must 
depend,  of  course,  on  changing  world  conditions. 
As  long  as  the  United  States  maintains  its  prom- 
inent position  in  world  affairs,  and  as  long  as 
the  harsh  threat  to  world  peace  exists,  our 
country  will  continue  to  shoulder  the  heavy  obli- 
gations of  world  leadership.  The  United  States 
cannot  properly  live  up  to  the  unavoidable  re- 
sponsibilities of  power  and  at  the  same  time 
serve  the  best  interests  of  the  American  people 
without  responding  in  a  positive  way  to  the  needs 
of  other  free  peoples  who  require  some  measure 
of  ouLside  support  in  trying  to  lay  the  stepping- 
stones  to  their  own  advancement.  The  long- 
term  goals  of  the  mutual  security  program  are 
inseparably  interwoven  with  the  long-term  se- 
curity of  the  United  States  and  with  world  efforts 
for  freedom,  progress,  and  peace.  It  is  on  this 
basis  that  mutual  security  program  operations 
are  moving  forward  throughout  the  free  world. 


290163—54- 


11 


CHAPTER  II 


Western  Europe 


IN  Western  Europe,  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty 
Organization  is  the  foundation  rock  upon 
which  United  States  policy  is  built.  A  strong  and 
free  Europe  is  vital  to  our  own  security,  and  a 
powerful  NATO  partnership  is  the  best  way  to 
guarantee  that  the  area's  vast  resources,  skills, 
and  manpower  remain  firmly  on  the  side  of  the 
free  world. 

To  help  build  up  the  military  forces  of  NATO 
and  to  insure  that  those  forces  are  maintained  in  a 
high  state  of  readiness,  the  United  States  has  con- 
tributed nearly  $6  billion  in  arms  to  Western 
Europe,  undertaken  extensive  military  training 
programs,  and  actively  participated  in  the  Organi- 
zation itself  through  its  North  Atlantic  Council, 
its  International  Staff  and  various  military  com- 
mands, and  its  annual  ministerial  reviews.  This 
United  States  contribution  has  supplemented  the 
efforts  of  the  European  nations,  who  have  spent 
over  $35  billion  on  NATO  defense. 

To  promote  the  economic  and  political  strength 
on  which  the  military  forces  of  NATO  must  rely, 
the  United  States  has  also  vigorously  supported 
efforts  to  promote  greater  European  unity.  The 
measures  which  the  European  nations  are  taking 
to  create  regional  organizations,  develop  a  single 
market,  raise  living  standards,  and  generally 
integrate  their  economic  and  political  activities  are 
of  fundamental  importance  to  the  preservation  of  a 
strong  and  free  Europe. 

The  second  half  of  1953  was  marked  by  further 
progress  in  the  buildup  of  NATO's  military  power 
and  by  a  continued  improvement  in  Western 
Europe's  economic  position.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  effort  to  establish  the  European  Defense  Com- 
munity met  with  further  delay.  On  balance,  how- 
ever, Western  Europe  at  the  close  of  the  year 
showed  an  encouraging  picture  of  increasing  self- 
reliance. 


Military  Defense 

NATO  Grows  More  Powerful 

During  the  period  July-December  1953,  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  carried  out  its 
annual  assessment  of  NATO  forces,  military  re- 
quirements and  economic  capabilities.  At  the 
close  of  the  annual  review  in  December,  the 
Ministers  of  the  14  NATO  countries,  at  a  meet- 
ing of  the  North  Atlantic  Council  in  Paris, 
reaffirmed  their  conviction  that  the  threat  of 
Soviet  aggression  to  the  world  must  be  faced  over 
a  long  period,  and  that  accordingly  the  Atlantic 
Community  must  be  prepared  to  maintain  for  a 
number  of  years  the  forces  and  weapons  to  deter 
or  repel  such  aggression.  It  was  agreed  that  the 
size  of  these  forces  will  be  so  planned  that  the 
member  countries  can  make  the  most  effective  use 
of  their  joint  capabilities,  meanwhile  maintaining 
at  least  their  present  pace  of  economic  and  social 
development.  Support  was  given  to  the  staff  of 
the  Supreme  Allied  Commander,  Europe,  to  aid  its 
current  studies  of  the  effect  of  atomic  and  other 
new  weapons  on  NATO  military  planning  and 
costs. 

It  also  was  reported  at  the  December  meeting 
that  the  1953  force  goals  had  been  met,  except  for 
a  moderate  shortfall  in  aircraft.  This  achieve- 
ment represented  a  considerable  increase  in  num- 
bers and  quality  over  the  forces  available  in  1952. 

The  Ministers  concluded  this  important  review 
with  the  adoption  of  firm  force  goals  for  1954, 
provisional  goals  for  1955,  and  planning  goals  for 
1956.  The  targets  projected  for  December  1954 
call  for  an  increase  of  5  percent  in  Army  divisions. 
The  number  of  aircraft  is  scheduled  to  increase  by 
25  percent,  and  naval  vessels  by  15  percent.  The 
buildup  will  stress  heavily  the  combat-readiness 


12 


and  fighting  power  of  active  forces  and  the  higher 
training  levels  of  reserves. 

Clearly,  NATO  has  reduced  the  gap  between 
Soviet  Russia's  offensive  strength  and  the  West's 
defensive  and  retaliatory  capacity.  As  late  as 
January  1951,  the  Supreme  Allied  Commander, 
charged  with  the  defense  of  Europe,  had  at  his 
disposal  only  about  14  combat-ready  divisions. 
There  were  some  1,800  planes,  of  which  half  were 
from  Britain's  home  defense  force,  and  only  15 
airfields.  This  was  small  strength  with  which  to 
defend  all  of  Western  Europe. 

By  the  end  of  1953,  NATO  had  grown  consider- 
ably more  powerful.  The  number  of  active  divi- 
sions had  increased  threefold,  and  the  number  of 
ships  had  also  increased  substantially.  Plane 
strength  had  increased  more  than  2}{  times.  Pis- 
ton-driven aircraft  had  been  largely  replaced  by 
jets.  Instead  of  15  airfields,  there  were  over  120 
which  were  available  for  at  least  limited  use; 
more  were  planned  for  the  next  two  years.  The 
Supreme  Allied  Command,  Atlantic,  whose  pri- 
mary task  is  to  keep  the  North  Atlantic  sea  lanes 
open  in  the  event  of  conflict,  was  also  fully 
organized. 


To  expand  this  strength  and  meet  projected 
force  goals,  the  European  NATO  countries  plan 
to  increase  their  military  expenditures  in  1954. 
Although  the  increase  is  expected  to  be  moderate, 
it  follows  a  more  than  twofold  rise  in  expenditures 
since  Korea.  Defense  expenditures  by  these  coun- 
tries were  over  $11.5  billion  in  1953,  compared  to 
$5.4  billion  in  1950.  Their  expenditures  for  mili- 
tary hard  goods  are  currently  about  $3  billion  an- 
nually, almost  four  times  as  high  as  the  pre-Korea 
rate. 

In  NATO,  considerable  progress  has  also  been 
made  in  coordinating  national  planning  for  civil- 
ian defense,  and  for  wartime  control  and  distribu- 
tion of  commodities  and  transport  facilities.  The 
highly  technical  work  on  standardization  of  weap- 
ons and  components  has  produced  a  number  of 
important  results,  including  a  recent  agreement 
on  a  standardized  30-caliber  rifle  cartridge. 

Infrastructure:  Military  Facilities 
for  Joint  Use 

Infrastructure  is  the  term  used  to  identify  the 
basic   military   installations   which   are   financed 


A 

;r::;"  s 

inues  To  Grow 

15 

THE  ANNUAL  TREND 

\  i 

(Billions  of  Dollars) 

Defense  Expendit 
by  European  NATO  Coi 

ures 
ntries 

P 

4m 

( 

l 

liner 

8B&       asset 

K$w* 

=55555 

Wssss 

^^ 

^      ESSSSI 

^^ 

S^S 

1949         1950         (S5t          19%2         (953 

The  Goals  for  1954: 


Army  Divisions  up  5% 
Navy  Vessels ...  up  15% 
Aircraft up  25% 


1  Includes  personnel,  conslruclion,  and  operating  costs. 


13 


jointly  by  the  NATO  nations  and  are  available 
for  the  use  of  the  forces  under  NATO  command. 

In  December  1953,  the  North  Atlantic  Council 
reached  agreement  on  additional  military  con- 
struction totaling  $251  million.  This  brought  the 
total  programs  agreed  upon  to  date  by  all  NATO 
countries  to  $1,523  million,  to  which  the  United 
States  has  contributed  $601  million.  The  con- 
struction will  furnish  the  military  facilities  neces- 
sary for  integrated  operations  of  the  NATO  forces 
planned  for  December  1955.  Of  the  $251  mil- 
lion, approximately  50  percent  will  be  used  to 
build  the  fuel  pipelines  and  fuel  storage  systems 
for  the  airfields  that  NATO  has  been  constructing 
over  the  past  3  years.  Other  main  categories  are: 
naval  facilities — 19  percent,  signals  and  commu- 
nications— 14  percent,  and  airfields — 12  percent. 
The  balance  will  be  used  for  navigational  aids 
and  military  headquarters. 

In  addition,  $28  million  worth  of  military  con- 
struction was  agreed  upon  for  Western  Germany. 
These  requirements  are  to  be  financed  under 
arrangements  between  the  Allied  powers  and  the 
Federal  Kepublic  of  Germany. 

Noteworthy  progress  has  been  made  in  the 
actual  construction  of  the  projected  military  facil- 
ities. More  than  75  percent  of  all  airfields  pro- 
gramed were  available  for  at  least  limited  use  by 
the  end  of  1953.  This  is  twice  the  number  which 
was  available  at  the  end  of  1952.  Also,  more 
than  one-half  of  the  211  different  telecommuni- 
cation projects  were  completed  last  year,  and  the 
remainder  will  be  finished  during  1954  and  1955. 

Construction  of  the  petroleum  pipeline  system 
is  under  way.  Under  this  system,  over  3,000 
miles  of  pipelines  will  be  linked  up  with  ports  on 
the  Channel  and  Mediterranean  Coasts  so  that 
the  network  can  be  supplied  by  the  NATO  tanker 
fleet.  The  system  will  assure  a  constant  flow  of 
jet  fuel  to  the  NATO  air  forces.  Portions  of  the 
pipeline  system  will  be  available  for  operation  in 
the  summer  of  1954,  and  completion  is  scheduled 
for  the  end  of  1955. 

During  1953,  the  NATO  system  of  international 
competitive  bidding  showed  results  when  a  large 
number  of  infrastructure  projects  were  opened 
to  bidding  by  firms  of  all  the  NATO  countries.  In 
several  instances  this  step  has  brought  significant 
cost  reductions  to  NATO.  Many  United  States 
firms  are  actively  engaged  in  bidding  on  NATO- 
financed  facilities,  and  several  have  already  been 
successful  in  obtaining  contracts. 


Offshore    Procurement    Strengthens 
Defense  Production  Base 

The  United  States  program  to  purchase  in 
friendly  countries  abroad  a  portion  of  the  military 
items  furnished  under  the  military  assistance  pro- 
gram is  now  in  its  third  year. 

Contracts  placed  in  Europe  during  fiscal  years 
1952  and  1953  totaled  $2.2  billion  and  included 
the  procurement  of  ammunition,  aircraft,  naval 
vessels,  radio  and  radar  equipment,  tanks,  artillery 
pieces,  and  numerous  spare  parts. 

The  effect  of  the  offshore  procurement  program 
is  being  felt  in  Europe  not  only  in  terms  of  an 
expanded  mobilization  base,  but  also  in  the  im- 
provement of  the  foreign  exchange  positions  of  the 
European  countries.  Payments  by  the  United 
States  for  deliveries  against  offshore  contracts  are 
expected  to  amount  to  about  $500  million  in  fiscal 
year  1954,  and  will  constitute  an  important  source 
of  dollar  earnings. 

In  order  to  make  the  maximum  contribution 
toward  building  a  European  defense  production 
base,  the  placement  of  United  States  offshore 
procurement  contracts  is  being  more  closely  co- 
ordinated with  European-financed  production.  A 
series  of  studies  by  the  International  Staff  of 
NATO  resulted  in  such  correlated  programs  for 


Military  Items  Contracted  For  In  Europe  Consist 
Mainly  Of  Ammunition  And  Aircraft 


1,000 


(Millions  of  Dollars) 


400 


Offshore  Procurement 

Contracts  Placed  Through  • 

December  19531 


Ammu-      Air-        Ships        Elec-     Combat     Other 
nition      craft  tronics  Vehicles 

Excludes  $400  million  placed  in  France  for  Indochina,  (or  which  caregory  breakdown 
is  nol  available. 


14 


the   production   of   ammunition,    aircraft,    ships, 
artillery,  and  other  materiel. 

NATO  recommendations  will  be  considered  in 
placing  a  large  part  of  the  contracts  for  procure- 
ment abroad  in  fiscal  year  1954.  In  addition  to 
this  support  from  the  United  States,  it  is  antici- 
pated that  the  NATO  International  Staff's  recom- 
mendations will  also  be  broadly  accepted  by  the 
other  NATO  countries.  Underlying  these  corre- 
lated production  programs  is  the  expectation  that 
they  wdl  bring  about  better  productive  efficiency, 
a  larger  measure  of  standardization,  and  a  greater 
degree  of  European  self-sufficiency  in  defense 
materiel. 

U.  S.  Support:  Military  Shipments 
Up  60  Percent 

Nearly  $3  billion  worth  of  mditary  weapons 
and  equipment  was  shipped  to  our  European 
allies  during  1953.  This  represented  the  greatest 
volume  of  military  supplies  shipped  abroad  to 
our  allies  in  any  12-month  period  since  the  begin- 
ning of  the  military  assistance  program.  In  total, 
1953  shipments  were  60  percent  higher  than  in  the 
previous  year. 

Through  December  31,  1953,  the  value  of 
materiel  shipped  as  grant  aid  to  European  coun- 


tries (excluding  Greece  and  Turkey)  totaled  $5.7 
billion. 

During  the  second  half  of  1953,  new  allotments 
of  funds  for  other  than  direct  mUitary  purposes 
were  made  to  only  3  countries  in  Western  Europe. 
A  total  of  $61  million  was  allotted  as  follows: 
$35  million  for  the  United  Kingdom  for  needed 
agricultural  commodities,  $15  million  for  East 
German  Food  Relief,  and  $11  million  for  Spain 
to  finance  the  purchase  of  raw  materials  and  equip- 
ment. Paid  shipments  totaled  $402  million;  the 
bulk  of  this  amount  represented  deliveries  against 
authorizations  issued  during  previous  fiscal  years. 

Counterpart  Funds  Channeled 
Into  Military  Programs 

Each  European  country  receiving  mutual  de- 
fense-financing or  economic  assistance  deposits  in 
a  special  account  local  currency  equivalent  to 
the  dollar  grant  aid  provided.  These  deposits 
are  known  as  counterpart  funds.  After  a  portion  ' 
is  transferred  exclusively  for  United  States  use, 

1  Generally,  5  percent  of  counterpart  funds  deposited 
to  match  dollar  aid  obligated  prior  to  June  20,  1952,  and 
10  percent  after  that  date,  pursuant  to  the  provisions  of 
the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1952. 


Almost  $6  Billion  Worth  Of  Military  Supplies  Has  Been  Shipped 
To  European  Countries 


(Billions  of  Dollars) 


The  Trend  by  Years 


{Billions  of  Dollars) 



,,„„,,.,.,,       I 

I...  .-.  ■!      i   .  . 

. 

1950  1951  1952  1953 


Cumulative  Shipments' 


Q  20  3Q 

1950 

1  Includes  value  of  excess  slocks 


20 

1951 


3Q 


40 


IQ 


20 

1952 


40 


20 

1953 


40 


15 


to  cover  administrative  and  other  local  expenses, 
the  remaining  funds  are  available  to  the  depositing 
countries  to  finance  country  programs  approved 
by  the  United  States. 

In  accordance  with  the  policy  established  after 
the  passage  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951, 
the  bulk  of  the  European  counterpart  funds  has 
been  channeled  into  direct  military  programs.  Of 
a  total  of  $3,306  million  of  counterpart  funds  re- 
leased from  the  special  accounts  from  July  1,  1951, 
through  December  31,  1953,  44  percent  or  the 
equivalent  of  $1,463  million  was  earmarked  for 
military  purposes.  These  funds  have  been  used 
for  the  production  and  procurement  of  major 
materiel  such  as  combat  vehicles,  ammunition, 
ships,  transport  vehicles,  and  electronics  equip- 
ment. They  also  have  financed  the  procurement 
of  military  clothing  and  supplies,  and  the  con- 
struction of  military  bases,  airfields,  and  other 
defense  facilities. 

Counterpart  funds  released  for  other  than 
military  purposes  have  been  used  to  strengthen  the 
economic  base  of  the  participating  countries. 
They  have  financed  the  expansion  of  manufactur- 
ing, agriculture,  electric-power  output  and  mining ; 
the  improvement  of  transportation  facilities;  and 
the  construction  of  housing  for  workers  in  essential 
industries. 


European  Counterpart  Funds  Have  Been  Released 
Mainly  For  Military  Purposes  In  The  First  Half  Of 
The  Fiscal  Year 

Approvals  for  Withdrawal 
July  1-December  31,1953 


$711  Million 

(In  Dollar  Equivalents) 


Counterpart  releases  during  the  second  6 
months  of  1953  amounted  to  the  equivalent  of  $711 
million,  of  which  $471  million,  or  66  percent,  was 
for  direct  military  purposes.  Productivity  proj- 
ects accounted  for  counterpart  releases  totaling 
$47  million  during  this  period;  the  cumulative 
total  of  releases  for  these  productivity  projects 
amounted  to  the  equivalent  of  $72  million. 

The  portion  of  counterpart  funds  deposited  in 
the  6  months  ended  December  31,  1953,  which  was 
reserved  for  the  exclusive  use  of  the  United  States, 
amounted  to  the  equivalent  of  $39  million.  All  of 
the  United  States  portion  of  counterpart  funds 
generated  after  June  30,  1953,  and  unobligated 
balances  as  of  July  1,  1953,  were  deposited  in 
United  States  Treasmy  accounts  overseas.  United 
States  Government  agencies,  including  the  Foreign 
Operations  Administration,  needing  foreign  cur- 
rencies for  administrative  expenses  or  other  pur- 
poses, purchase  the  required  currencies  from 
Treasury  Disbursing  Officers  with  appropriated 
dollar  funds. 


Economic  and  Political 
Developments 

European  Region  Makes 
Economic  Gains 

At  the  close  of  1953,  the  countries  of  Western 
Europe,  on  the  whole,  were  in  a  stronger  economic 
position  than  at  any  time  since  the  end  of  World 
War  II.  Four  main  developments  characterized 
their  economic  progress  during  the  year: 

1.  Industrial  production  gained  nearly  5 
percent  over  the  average  level  of  1952,  and 
reached  a  new  peak. 

2.  Agricultural  output  of  the  OEEC  coun- 
tries for  the  crop  year  1953-54  was  estimated 
at  22  percent  above  the  prewar  average. 

3.  Inflationary  pressures  were  largely  elimi- 
nated. 

4.  Western  Europe's  balance  of  payments, 
in  total  and  with  the  dollar  area,  was  much 
improved. 

The  industrial  production  rise  in  1953  followed 
a  year  of  generally  stationary  levels  of  output;  on 
an  overall  basis,  production  in  1952  had  gained  less 
than  1  percent  over  1951.  Progress  in  1953,  how- 
ever, has  not  been  uniform.  Germany,  for  ex- 
ample, after  a  slow  recovery  in  the  early  postwar 
period,  has  been  able  to  accelerate  output  at  a 


16 


much  faster  rate  than  most  of  her  European 
neighbors.  In  contrast,  industrial  production 
levels  in  France  and  Belgium  at  the  end  of  1953 
were  under  post-Korea  peaks. 

The  considerable  improvement  in  Western 
Europe's  world-wide  balance  of  payments  is,  to  a 
large  extent,  the  result  of  a  reduced  trade  deficit. 
Much  of  this  reduction,  however,  reflects  lower 
imports  rather  than  increased  exports. 

Concurrently  with  the  improvement  in  Western 
Europe's  payments  position,  gold  and  dollar  re- 
serves rose  more  than  one-fourth  during  1953. 
Excluding  Switzerland,  reserve  holdings  of  the 
OEEC  countries  increased  from  $7.3  billion  to  $9.4 
billion  during  this  12-month  period. 


These  developments  in  balance  of  payments 
and  reserve  positions  have  served  to  strengthen 
European  currencies.  Black  market  and  free 
market  exchange  rates  have  moved  closer  to 
official  rates,  and  the  possibilities  for  achieving 
free  convertibility  of  European  currencies  have 
considerably  improved. 

Despite  improvements  in  industrial  output  and 
greater  internal  financial  stability,  the  European 
nations  are  not  inclined  to  view  their  recent  ac- 
complishments with  complacency.  Individually, 
and  collectively  through  the  OEEC,  these  coun- 
tries have  expressed  the  view  that  their  production 
must  expand  at  even  a  faster  rate  if  Western 
Europe  is  to  raise  its  living  standards  and  main- 


Western  Europe's  Economy  Has  Strengthened 


Production  Continues  to  Rise 


Industrial  Production 
(Index,  1950  =  100) 


109    "0 


Agricultural  Production 

(Index,  Prewar  =100) 


117 


104 


_ 


1111 

I  II 


~_ 


ill 


II 


.1 

III 

I  IP 

w.     %    % 

II 


ill 


122 


1938  '49  '50  '51   '52  '53      Prewar  48  '49  '50  '51  '52  '53 

(«')  (est.) 

Calendar  Years  Crop  Years 


The  Trade  Gap  is  Smaller 


2,500 


2,000 


1,500 


1,000 


500 


(Millions  of  Dollars) 

Trade  With  Rest  of  World  ' 


Q1    '   '  I   I  '  '  '  '  I   '  '  '   '  '  I  '  '  I   '   '  I  '   '  I   '  '  I  '  '  '   '   '  I  '  ' 

1951  1952  1953 

Including    Overseas   Territories  includes   Military  Items 


Prices  are  Generally  Stable 


150 


100 


(Index,  1950=100) 


Wholesale  Prices 


Gold  and  Dollar  Reserves  Have  Increased 


^Excludes    Switzerland 


17 


Most  European  Countries  Raised  Production  To  Peak  Levels  In  1953 


Industrial  Production  of  Selected  OEEC  Countries 

(Index,  1950=100)' 


100 


UNITED  K/NGPOM 


l 


ri-mri 


1938  49  50  5152  53     IQ       20     30      40 


GERMANY  (Fed.  Rep.) 


100 


1938  49 '50 '51   '52 '53 


1938  49'50'5I  '52'53      IQ       2Q      30      4Q 


BELGIUM 


- 


-1952- 





938   '49 '50 '51  '52 '53      IQ       2Q      3Q      4Q 


1938  '49  '50  '51  '52  '53      IQ       2Q      3Q      4Q 


tain  a  leading  position  in  the  world  economy. 
Production  gains  have  not  kept  pace  with  new 
investment  and  technical  progress.  There  are, 
therefore,  considerable  opportunities  for  raising 
output  per  man. 

The  European  Community 

Over  the  past  eight  years,  the  nations  of  Europe 
have  taken  steps  toward  unity  which,  when 
measured  against  a  long  history  of  bitter  hostility, 
represent  real  and  remarkable  progress.  The  first 
significant  developments  were  in  the  economic 
field  and  were  largely  outgrowths  of  the  European 
recovery  program.  The  Organization  for  Euro- 
pean Economic  Cooperation  and  the  European 
Payments  Union  are  the  principal  organizations 


which  were  developed  in  this  phase  of  the  unity 
movement.  These  organizations  have  given  great 
impetus  to  actions  designed  to  remove  the  eco- 
nomic barriers  which,  for  so  many  years,  have  held 
back  the  growth  of  the  European  economy. 

The  European  unity  movement  has  now  become 
concentrated  in  the  development  of  a  six-nation 
European  community,  with  Belgium,  France, 
Germany,  Italy,  Luxembourg,  and  the  Nether- 
lands as  members.  The  outline  of  a  truly  supra- 
national organization  is  being  shaped.  The  Euro- 
pean Coal  and  Steel  Community  moved  across 
national  borders  to  open  a  common  market  for  the 
two  basic  industries  of  coal  and  steel.  This  long 
step  forward  was  followed  by  the  negotiation  and 
signing    of    the    European    Defense    Community 


18 


Treaty,  which  is  now  in  process  of  ratification  by 
the  parliaments  of  the  member  nations.  Yet 
another  step  toward  building  European  solidarity 
is  in  process.  The  six  nations  are  actively  working 
on  a  draft  treaty  to  establish  a  European  Political 
Community  which  will  round  out  the  measures 
taken  for  economic  and  military  cohesion.  These 
developments  all  have  an  important  bearing  on 
the  effort  to  build  strength  and  security  in  the 
NATO  area. 

European  Defense  Community  Ratification 
Delayed. — The  EDC  Treaty,  when  ratified,  will 
merge  French,  German,  Itahan,  Dutch,  Belgian 
and  Luxembourg  armed  forces  into  a  single  unified 
European  army.  These  forces  will  serve  under 
an  integrated  command  and  will  be  under  the 
general    direction    of    supranational    institutions. 

The  EDC  Treaty  was  signed  over  a  year  and  a 
half  ago  on  May  27,  1952.  In  spite  of  the  impor- 
tance of  the  EDC,  there  has  been  a  prolonged  delay 
in  the  completion  of  parliamentary  approvals. 
As  of  the  end  of  1953,  parhamentary  bodies  in 
three  countries  had  acted.  Last  spring,  both 
houses  of  the  German  parliament  voted  to  ratify 
with  votes  of  222  to  165  in  the  Bundestag,  and  23 
to  15  in  the  Bundesrat.  During  the  six  months 
period  covered  by  this  report,  the  lower  houses  in 
both  the  Netherlands  and  Belgium  approved  the 
Treaty.  The  Netherlands  Second  Chamber  voted 
approval  by  a  75  to  11  vote  on  July  23, 2  and  the 
Belgian  Chamber  of  Deputies  approved  on  Novem- 
ber 26  by  a  vote  of  148  to  49.  These  votes  reveal 
a  strong  margin  of  support  for  the  EDC. 

To  date,  the  principal  delays  have  been  encoun- 
tered in  France  and  Italy.  Although  the  French 
Assembly  held  a  general  debate  on  the  EDC  in 
November,  no  final  measures  were  taken.  Action 
on  this  critical  issue  has  been  delayed  further  by 
the  presidential  elections  which  took  place  in 
December.  In  Italy,  the  situation  has  been 
affected  by  the  difficulty  in  forming  a  stable 
Government. 

It  is  true  that  progress  toward  ratification  has 
been  made,  but  continuing  delay  in  the  entry  into 
force  of  the  Treaty  is  a  matter  of  serious  concern. 
There  continues  to  be  an  urgent  need  for  Germany 
to  do  its  part  in  the  common  defense  effort.  The 
EDC  provides  the  only  good  means  for  making 
possible  the  German  defense  contribution  in  a 
form   which   is   acceptable   to    those   nations   in 


2  The  Netherlands  First  Chamber  also  ratified  the  EDC 
Treaty  on  January  20,  1954. 


Europe  which  have  suffered  from  German  aggres- 
sion, since  Germany  will  contribute  its  forces  to  a 
unified  European  army  under  an  integrated 
command. 

In  addition  to  its  military  importance,  EDC 
ratification  has  become  an  essential  next  step 
forward  in  the  movement  to  eliminate  once  and 
for  all  the  conflicts  which  have  so  long  afflicted 
the  continent  of  Europe.  It  thus  provides  a  sure 
basis  on  which  to  build  greater  strength  in  the 
NATO  area. 

Coal  and  Steel  Community. — The  European 
Coal  and  Steel  Community  continued  its  efforts 
to  build  a  common,  competitive  market  in  coal 
and  steel  for  its  six  member  countries.  The 
Community,  through  its  supranational  institu- 
tions, moved  forward  with  additional  measures  to 
remove  national  barriers  to  trade  and  to  elimi- 
nate private  agreements  which  limit  the  produc- 
tion and  marketing  of  basic  commodities. 

The  Community  has  been  giving  special  atten- 
tion to  an  investment  program  designed  to  lower 
production  costs  and  raise  productivity.  Several 
members  of  the  High  Authority  held  preliminary 
discussions  in  the  United  States  with  the  Presi- 
dent and  members  of  Congress  on  the  possibilities 
of  obtaining  loan  capital  which  would  be  repaid 
from  Community  earnings.  As  a  result  of  these 
discussions,  concrete  investment  loan  proposals 
are  expected  to  be  presented  to  the  United  States 
early  in  1954. 

During  the  last  half  of  1953,  the  Community's 
commercial  policies  were  favorably  reviewed  by 
the  members  of  the  General  Agreement  on  Trade 
and  Tariffs.  Also,  an  agreement  was  signed  with 
the  International  Labor  Organization  which  pro- 
vided for  closer  collaboration  in  the  field  of  labor 
and  social  matters. 

Trade  Liberalization. — At  the  ministerial 
meeting  of  the  Organization  of  European  Economic 
Cooperation  held  in  Paris  during  October  1953,  the 
OEEC  Council  reaffirmed  the  objective  of  pro- 
ceeding toward  the  complete  abolition  of  quanti- 
tative restrictions  on  imports — that  is,  restrictions 
placed  on  the  amounts  of  certain  commodities  that 
may  be  imported  into  a  particular  country.  It 
also  noted  that  this  objective  was  part  of  the  gen- 
eral process  of  freeing  trade  on  a  world-wide  basis. 

Under  the  European  Code  of  Liberalization,  the 
standard  level  of  liberalized  trade — in  other  words, 
the  level  to  which  import  quotas  are  removed — is 
fixed  at  75  percent  of  commercial  imports  in 
1948.     At   present,    many   countries   have   freed 


290163—54- 


19 


The  OEEC  Countries,  As  A  Whole,  Have  Reached 
The  Current  Trade  Liberalization  Goal 


(Percent  of  Private  Intra-European  Trade  Liberalized) 


100 


75 


50 


(Current  75-Percent  Goal) 


1949        1950 


1951 

(End  of  Year) 


1952 


1953 


their  imports  well  beyond  that  percentage.  For 
example,  Italy  and  all  creditors  in  the  European 
Payments  Union  except  Austria  (Belgium,  Luxem- 
bourg, Germany,  the  Netherlands,  Portugal, 
Sweden,  Switzerland)  have  lifted  restrictive  quan- 
tity quotas  on  85  percent  or  more  of  their  com- 
mercial imports.  These  8  countries  account  for 
half  of  all  intra-European  trade. 

During  the  latter  part  of  1953,  3  member 
countries — the  United  Kingdom,  France,  and 
Austria — again  progressed  toward  fulfilling  their 
obligations  under  the  Code.  These  countries  had 
been  permitted  by  the  OEEC  to  suspend  or  limit 
temporarily  their  liberalization  measures  for  bal- 
ance of  payments  reasons.  The  United  Kingdom 
has  now  re-liberalized  to  80  percent.  Austria  has 
liberalized  to  50  percent,  and  France,  who  had 
been  forced  to  reimpose  quotas  on  all  its  imports, 
re-liberalized  to  the  extent  of  20  percent. 

Of  the  other  OEEC  countries,  Denmark,  Ire- 
land, and  Norway  have  reached  the  75-percent 
stage.  Turkey,  for  balance-of-payments  reasons, 
does  not  apply  liberalization  measures;  Greece,  on 
an  unofficial  basis,  has  adopted  a  system  of  almost 
complete  liberalization. 

Another  important  recent  development  in  the 
field  of  trade  liberalization  has  been  the  new  in- 
terest displayed  in  freeing  restrictions  on  imports 


from  the  United  States.  At  its  October  meeting, 
the  OEEC  Council  decided  that  member  coun- 
tries should  report  on  the  nature  of  the  restrictions 
which  they  have  been  unable  to  remove.  This 
information  should  form  the  basis  for  a  coordi- 
nated policy  to  promote  liberalization  toward  the 
dollar  area. 

Western  Europe  has  also  taken  an  important 
step  toward  achieving  a  greater  mobility  of  man- 
power across  national  borders.  It  has  been 
agreed  by  the  OEEC  countries  that  if  a  job  in 
one  country  remains  unfilled  and  listed  with  the 
employment  service  for  30  days,  the  employer 
may  bring  in  a  qualified  workman  from  another 
Western  European  country. 

Other  Programs  in  Europe 

5/2  Million  Food  Parcels  to  East  Germany. — 

On  July  4,  1953,  Chancellor  Adenauer,  in  a  letter 
to  the  President  of  the  United  States,  described 
the  concern  of  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany 
over  the  steadily  worsening  food  situation  of  the 
German  people  in  the  Soviet  Zone  and  East 
Berlin.  The  Chancellor  expressed  the  hope  that 
the  United  States  would  participate  with  the 
Federal  Republic  in  making  funds  available  for 
food  supplies  to  be  sent  to  the  Soviet-occupied 
areas  to  protect  the  population  from  hunger  to 
the  extent  possible. 

On  July  10,  the  President  replied  that  this 
Government  would  join  immediately  in  furnish- 
ing needed  food  to  the  hungry  people  of  East 
Germany.  At  the  same  time,  he  offered  to  the 
Soviet  Union,  as  the  occupying  power  for  distri- 
bution, food  shipments  valued  at  about  $15  mdlion 
and  made  up  of  items  of  high  nutritional  value. 

On  July  11,  the  Soviet  Government  rejected 
this  proposal.  On  the  same  day,  the  President 
announced  that  the  offer  of  food  to  the  German 
people,  in  their  distressed  situation,  would  stand. 
The  Director  of  the  Foreign  Operations  Admin- 
istration was  given  the  operating  responsibility 
for  carrying  the  program  through. 

FOA  initiated  procurement  of  food  at  once,  and 
late  in  July  the  first  consignment  of  American  lard, 
flour,  and  dry  milk  arrived  in  Germany.  Other 
shipments  quickty  followed,  and  included  canned 
milk,  dry  beans,  canned  meat,  and  cottonseeed  oil. 
The  Federal  Government  of  Germany  accepted 
responsibility  for  distributing  the  food  and  carried 
the  domestic  costs  of  handling. 

On  July  27,  the  distribution  of  food  parcels 
started  (in  West  Berlin.     Parcels   were   given   to 


20 


East  German  Food  Program 


300 


(Thousands  of  Parcels  Per  Day) 

Number  of  Food  Parcels  Issued  Daily,  July  27-  October  10,  1953 


Food  Content 


Number  of  Parcels 
Total  5,559,782 


>■'-'"'•-'•' 


-July 


"August- 


First  Distribution  Period 


Interim  Period 


September- 
Second  Distribution  Period 


■October- 


Dislnbulion  officially  limited  lo  Soviel  Zone  and  peripheral  area  residenls. 
2  No  distribution  on  Sundays  alter  August  23. 


the  German  residents  of  the  Soviet  Zone  and 
East  Berlin  who  came  personally  or  through  their 
representatives  to  collect  it.  Some  of  the  food 
came  from  supplies  in  Berlin,  to  be  replaced  later 
by  United  States  shipments.  To  the  unskilled 
East  Zone  worker,  parcels  for  a  family  of  4  repre- 
sented about  40  percent  of  a  month's  wages.  The 
nutritional  value  of  the  packages,  far  outweighing 
their  monetaiy  worth,  provided  the  equivalent  of 
a  family's  ration  of  fat  and  protein  for  one  month. 
The  Soviet  and  East  German  authorities 
attempted  to  hinder  distribution  by  resorting  to 
propaganda,  confiscations,  arrests,  and  restric- 
tions on  travel.  In  defiance  of  these  pressure 
tactics,  however,  the  people  of  East  Germany 
swarmed  over  the  borders  to  the  West  Berlin  food 
distribution  centers.  In  a  little  over  two  months, 
over  5}i  million  parcels  containing  nearly  18,000 
tons  of  food  had  been  distributed,  and  it  was 
estimated  that  nearly  one-sixth  of  all  Germans 
under  Soviet  domination  had  directly  benefited. 
Tbe  first  two  phases  of  the  program  ended  on 
October  10,  and  buildings  and  facilities  used  as 
distribution  centers  were  released  for  the  reopen- 


ing of  schools.  A  third -phase  of  distribution  was 
then  initiated. 

The  distribution  program  has  been  successful 
beyond  all  expectation  not  only  from  a  humanitar- 
ian standpoint  but  because  it  gave  the  people  on 
the  other  side  of  the  iron  curtain  tangible  and 
undeniable  evidence  that  the  West  stood  with 
them  in  a  time  of  crisis. 

Spanish  Program  Begins. — On  September  26, 

1953,  the  long  negotiations  with  Spain  for  over- 
seas military  bases  were  successfully  concluded 
with  the  signature  of  three  basic  agreements. 
These  agreements,  designed  to  strengthen  the 
capabilities  of  the  West  for  the  maintenance  of 
peace  and  security,  cover:  (1)  development  and 
use  of  Spanish  air  and  naval  bases  jointly  by  the 
United  States  and  Spain;  (2)  military  end-item 
assistance  to  Spanish  armed  forces;  and  (3)  eco- 
nomic   and    technical    aid.     For   the   fiscal   year 

1954,  assistance  earmarked  for  Spain  totals  $226 
million — $141  million  for  military  aid,  and  $85 
million  for  economic  aid. 

The  agreements  provide  that,  in  addition  to 
setting  aside  10  percent  of  counterpart  funds  for 


21 


exclusive  United  States  use,  Spain  will  contribute 
a  portion  of  the  counterpart  to  finance  local 
currency  costs  of  the  base  construction  program. 

To  facilitate  carrying  out  the  terms  of  the 
agreements,  a  United  States  Operations  Mission 
and  a  Military  Assistance  Advisory  Group,  both 
under  the  general  direction  of  the  Ambassador, 
have  been  established  in  Spain.  The  Mission 
will  be  responsible  for  economic  aid  and  technical 
cooperation,  while  the  Military  Assistance  Ad- 
visory Group  will  coordinate  the  military  program 
with  the  Spanish  authorities. 

The  Navy  Department's  Bureau  of  Yards  and 
Docks  will  administer  the  program  to  develop  air 
and  naval  facilities  which  will  be  used  jointly  by 
American  and  Spanish  forces.  The  Bureau  has 
appointed  representatives  of  four  firms  to  carry  out 
the  overall  architectural-engineering  phases  of  the 
program.  In  addition,  a  United  States  contractor 
has  been  appointed  to  act  as  prime  contractor  on 
a  cost-plus-fixed-fee  basis. 

Work  on  programing  the  $85  million  in 
economic  aid  is  now  going  forward.  First  priority 
is  being  given  to  economic  projects  which  support 
the  joint  military  programs  in  Spain.  In  addition, 
selected  raw  materials  and  equipment  for  con- 
sumer-goods industries  will  be  furnished  to 
counteract  as  much  as  possible  the  inflationary 
effects  of  the  base  construction  program.  Some 
United  States  surplus  agricultural  commodities 
will  also  be  useful  for  this  purpose. 

As  of  December  31,  1953,  $11  million  of  eco- 
nomic aid  had  been  allotted  Spain  under  the 
current  program.  Procurement  authorizations 
totaling  $4.5  million  had  been  issued  against  this 
allotment  for  the  purchase  and  shipment  of  crude 
rubber,  steel  plates  and  structural  shapes,  tin- 
plate,  hot-rolled  strip  iron,  copper  and  aluminum. 

Productivity  Program:  Expanded  Effort  by 
Europe. — Special  local  currency  productivity  ac- 
counts have  been  established  in  Western  Europe 
as  provided  for  in  special  agreements  concluded  in 
fiscal  year  1953.  Establishment  of  these  special 
funds  for  the  first  time  insures  the  availability 
of  substantial  European  financing  for  purposes 
which  are  directly  related  to  increasing  productiv- 
ity throughout  European  industry  and  agriculture. 
These  agreements  specify  that  as  output  rises, 
wages  are  to  be  increased  and  prices  lowered. 

As  of  December  31,  1953,  $94  million  in  dollar 
aid  was  allotted  under  agreements  with  11 
countries  which  required  counterpart  financing 
of  productivity   programs.     Ten  percent  or  the 


equivalent  of  $9.4  million,  was  reserved  for 
use  by  the  United  States.  Of  the  remaining 
$84.6  million  in  counterpart  funds,  $77.1  million 
was  allotted  for  individual  country  programs,  and 
$7.5  million  for  an  OEEC  European  Productivity 
Agency.  An  amount  of  $2 .5  million  in  dollar  funds 
was  also  allotted  for  the  Productivity  Agency. 

Moreover,  the  1 1  countries  have  contributed  an 
additional  $28.7  million  in  their  local  currencies 
for  productivity  programs.  Thus,  a  total  of 
$115.8  million  in  local  currency  and  dollar  funds 
is  now  available  for  specific  productivity  projects 
carried  on  by  the  Europeans  themselves. 

Broad  plans  for  the  individual  country  pro- 
grams have  already  been  mapped  out.  The 
equivalent  of  about  $65  million  will  be  used  to 
provide  medium-term,  low-interest  loans  princi- 
pally to  small  and  medium-sized  business  enter- 
prises in  connection  with  efforts  to  raise  their 
productivity.  The  equivalent  of  another  $45 
million  will  finance  productivity  projects  on  a 
nonrepayable  basis.  Blueprints  for  these  projects 
include  training  programs  for  management  and 
labor,  expert  management  engineering  services, 
support  for  productivity  centers,  marketing  and 
distribution  improvement,  and  better  processing 
techniques. 

The  establishment  of  local  currency  productiv- 
ity funds  under  the  European  Productivity  Agency 
and  in  the  various  countries  insures  the  continued 
growth  of  local  self-help  programs  in  Em-ope. 
Some  United  States  assistance  in  giving  direction 
to  the  programs  will,  however,  still  be  needed. 
This  assistance  will  give  particular  emphasis  to 
the  fields  of  management  development  and  mar- 
keting and  distribution,  since  they  are  the  areas 
where  our  contribution  to  the  European  produc- 
tivity effort  can  be  most  effective. 

87,000  More  Emigrants  and  Refugees  Moved 
Out  of  Europe. — The  United  States  took  the 
initiative  in  establishing  the  Intergovernmental 
Committee  for  European  Migration  (ICEM)  at 
Brussels  in  1951,  to  facilitate  the  movement  of 
emigrants  and  refugees  out  of  the  overpopulated 
areas  of  Europe.  With  the  addition  of  Colombia 
and  Uruguay,  who  joined  in  November  1953,  the 
membership  of  ICEM  was  brought  to  24  govern- 
ments. An  estimated  3  million  persons,  who  are 
unlikely  to  be  absorbed  in  the  economies  of 
Germany,  Austria,  Italy,  the  Netherlands,  and 
Greece,  face  the  need  of  emigrating  from  the 
continent  during  the  next  five  years. 

In   1952,   ICEM  moved   77,626   persons  from 


22 


French  workers  building  giant  100-ton  dynamos  in  France's  largest  electrical  construction  plant  at  Beljort. 
Greater  efficiency  of  production  has  been  achieved  at  this  plant,  due  to  the  joint  productivity  programs  oj  France 
and  the  United  States. 


Europe  to  Australia,  Canada,  Latin  America,  and 
the  United  States.  In  1953,  the  Committee 
moved  87,000  persons,  55,000  of  whom  were 
processed  and  transported  in  the  last  six  months 
of  the  year.  This  85-percent  increase  in  move- 
ment over  the  first  part  of  the  year  encouraged 
ICEM,  at  its  sixth  session  in  Venice  during 
November,  to  raise  the  1954  quota  of  movement 
to  117,600  persons. 

The  higher  quota  for  1954  was  also  justified  by 
the  improvement  in  the  selection  and  processing 
procedures  in  Europe  and  by  the  greater  oppor- 
tunities for  placement  in  many  of  the  receiving 
countries.  The  Latin  American  countries,  for 
example,  are  interested  in  limited  numbers  of 
urban  workers  and  larger  numbers  of  agricultural 
workers.  They  are  also  anxious  to  take  in  the 
families  of  earlier  migrants  who  are  already  estab- 
lished and  employed.  Over  20,000  wives  and 
children    have    been    nominated    for    immediate 


movement  to  Argentina.  Others  are  listed  for 
transportation  to  Brazil,  Chile,  and  Venezuela. 

Australia  has  increased  its  quota  of  immigrants 
for  1954;  Canada  is  expected  to  maintain  its  cur- 
rent rate  of  intake.  In  addition,  an  estimated 
30,000  refugees  who  will  receive  visas  to  the  United 
States  under  tbe  Refugee  Relief  Act  of  1953  will 
move  under  ICEM  auspices  in  1954.  For  the 
calendar  year  1953,  the  United  States  has  contri- 
buted $6.1  million  from  fiscal  year  1953  funds  to 
ICEM's  operational  budget  of  $24.3  million,  and 
$716,000  to  its  administrative  budget  of  $2.3 
million. 

At  its  November  meeting  in  Venice,  the  Com- 
mittee approved  the  final  text  of  a  draft  constitu- 
tion which  was  later  presented  to  the  member 
governments  for  acceptance.  The  constitution, 
if  adopted,  will  give  the  committee  a  more  formal 
status  and  establish  it  as  a  temporary  organization 
with  an  anticipated  life  of  3  to  5  years. 


23 


CHAPTER  III 


Near  East,  Africa,  and 
South  Asia 


THE  countries  and  territories  of  the  Near  East, 
Africa,  and  South  Asia  lack,  in  varying  de- 
grees, the  skills,  techniques,  and  institutions  that 
are  essential  if  the  700  million  people  of  the  area 
are,  through  utilization  of  their  human  and  natural 
resources,  to  eliminate  widespread  poverty  and  to 
create  stable  governments  and  sound  economies. 
In  few  parts  of  the  world  are  there  more  pressing 
needs  or  greater  opportunities  for  progress  toward 
a  society  where  the  people  can  increase  their  per- 
sonal freedom. 

The  United  States  is  eager  to  help  promote  such 
progress,  and  under  the  mutual  security  program 
is  providing  assistance  to  the  following  countries: 

In  the  Near  East:  Egypt,  Greece,  Iran, 
Israel,  Iraq,  Jordan,  Lebanon,  Turkey,  and 
Saudi  Arabia. 

In  Africa:  Ethiopia,  Liberia,  Libya,  and  the 
overseas  territories  of  certain  Western  Euro- 
pean countries. 

In  South  Asia:  Afghanistan,  India,  Nepal, 
and  Pakistan. 

The  primary  objective  of  United  States  pro- 
grams in  these  countries  is  to  aid  the  various 
governments  and  peoples  in  their  efforts  to  develop 
their  own  resources  and  build  up  their  economic 
and  social  structures.  In  some  countries,  we  are 
furnishing  military  supplies  and  training  assistance 
to  help  the  governments  increase  their  defense 
capabilities. 

United  States  technicians  work  with  the  nation- 
als of  the  various  countries  to  develop  and  spread 
locally  the  knowledge  and  techniques  which  can 
be  profitably  applied  in  agriculture,  health  and 
sanitation,  industry,  education,  transportation, 
communications,  and  government  administration. 
Technical  cooperation  efforts  are  supplemented, 
in    certain    countries,    by    special    economic    aid 


to  provide  needed  supplies  and  equipment  in 
order  to  strengthen  the  economy  and  enable  the 
people  to  make  the  best  use  of  their  new  and 
growing  skills. 

In  this  far-spread  area,  with  its  many  newly 
independent  governments  and  its  diverse  racial, 
cultural  and  economic  backgrounds,  there  is 
fertile  ground  for  friction  and  conflict.  The  ten- 
sions between  Arab  and  Israeli  have  not  abated, 
and  only  a  precarious  truce  is  maintained.  Boy- 
cott of  Israeli  goods  and  firms  has  been  extended ; 
the  Arab  refugee  problem  remains  as  a  tragic 
barrier  to  regional  harmony. 

Control  of  the  Suez  Canal  is  still  unsettled,  and 
difficulties  beset  consideration  of  integrated  de- 
velopment and  use  of  the  waters  of  the  Nile 
watershed.  Dispute  over  the  Jordan  waters  has 
stirred  hatred  and  bitterness  and  has  aggravated 
nationa'ism  to  a  degree  which  threatens  the  possi- 
bility of  cooperative  development  of  this  vital 
resource. 

In  late  summer  of  1953,  the  smoldering  unrest 
in  Iran  flared  into  rioting  and  revolt.  Prime 
Minister  Mossadegh  was  removed  from  office,  and 
the  Shah  resumed  leadership  of  his  country.  With 
the  Anglo-Iranian  oil  controversy  unsettled,  the 
new  Iranian  Government  found  itself  perilously 
near  economic  collapse. 

All  these  factors  have  made  it  essential  that 
United  States  policies  in  the  area  be  mad? 
clear  and  impartial.  The  success  of  working  rela- 
tionships between  representatives  of  our  Govern- 
ment and  those  of  the  countries  participating  in 
mutual  security  arrangements  depends  upon 
patience,  mutual  understanding,  and  common 
objectives. 

Programing  of  Funds. — Under  the  mutual 
security  program  for  fiscal  year  1954  in  the  Near 


24 


East,  South  Asia,  and  Africa,  $574  million  was 
made  available  for  military  aid,  and  $424  million 
for  economic  assistance  and  technical  cooperation. 
The  bulk  of  the  military-aid  funds  has  been  pro- 
gramed for  Greece,  Turkey,  and  Iran.  Through 
December  31,  1953,  special  economic  aid  in  the 
amount  of  $57.5  million  has  been  announced  for 
India;  $56  million  for  Iran;  $26  million  for  Israel; 
and  $11.3  million  for  Pakistan.  The  balance  of 
the  $424  million  had  been  programed  for  other  eco- 
nomic aid  and  for  technical  cooperation  for  coun- 
tries in  the  area.  A  relatively  small  part  of  these 
funds — $320,000 — was  obligated  to  pay  for  freight 
costs  of  emergency  wheat  shipments  to  Jordan 
and  Libya. 

Military  Aid  to  the  Near  East 

From  a  military  standpoint,  it  is  vital  that  the 
Near  East  remain  safe  from  external  aggression. 
The  region's  enormous  oil  reserves — almost  half 
of  the  world  total — its  key  land  and  water  ap- 
proaches, and  its  vast  human  resources  constitute 
indispensable  assets  to  free  world  security. 

A  program  of  military  assistance  to  Greece  and 
Turkey  was  initiated  by  the  United  States  in  1947. 
Military  aid  to  Iran  was  begun  in  1950.  The 
importance  to  the  free  world  of  sovereign  and 
independent  governments  in  the  three  countries 


The  Near  East  Holds  More  Than  Half  Of 
World  Oil  Reserves 

World  Crude  Oil  Reserves  as  of  January  1,  1953 

U.S.S.R.and  Satellites 

6.2% 


115  Billion  Barrels 


More  Military  Supplies  Are  Being  Sent  To  Build 
Near  East  Defense 


300 


(Millions  of  Dollars) 


Value  of  Military  Shipments  to 
Near  East  Countries' 


1950  1951 

deludes  value  of  excess  stocks 


1952 


1953 


was.  emphasized  by  these  actions.  In  February 
1952,  Greece  and  Turkey  were  admitted  to  full 
membership  in  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  Organi- 
zation. Ethiopia  has  been  declared  eligible  for 
military  assistance,  and  a  small  grant  aid  program 
was  inaugurated  with  the  first  shipment  of  mili- 
tary equipment  in  mid-1953. 

Military  aid  shipments  to  the  Near  East  as  of 
December  31,  1953,  amounted  to  $761  million; 
59  percent  of  the  total  was  directed  to  the  Army 
establishments,  19  percent  to  the  Navy,  and  22 
percent  to  the  Air  Force. 

In  addition  to  the  military  equipment  and  sup- 
plies provided  under  the  military  assistance  pro- 
grams, the  armed  forces  of  the  three  Near  East 
countries  have  been  strengthened  through  coor- 
dinated training  activities.  Instruction  has  been 
provided  in  service  schools  and  by  mobile  training 
teams.  American  technical  specialists  have  en- 
gaged in  on-the-spot  instruction  of  country  na- 
tionals in  the  maintenance  and  operation  of  the 
specialized  or  complex  equipment  furnished  under 
the  mutual  security  program.  Nationals  of  the 
countries  have  visited  installations  of  the  United 
States  armed  forces  to  familiarize  themselves  with 
the  methods  and  procedures  used  in  our  military 
establishments. 

Since  the  beginning  of  the  military  assistance 
program,  the  Greek  Army  has  changed  from  a 


25 


loosely  knit  organization,  designed  to  cope  with 
guerrilla  activity,  into  a  strong  force  with  well- 
trained  units  that  are  familiar  with  the  tactical 
use  and  technical  aspects  of  their  equipment. 
Supporting  weapons  provided  through  the  aid 
program  have  included  armor  and  anti-tank  weap- 
ons, as  well  as  light  and  medium  artillery.  Major 
items  of  equipment  have  been  integrated  within 
the  active  army  upon  arrival  in  Greece. 

The  Royal  Hellenic  Ah  Force,  in  addition  to  its 
functions  of  defending  Greece  against  air  attack 
and  furnishing  tactical  air  support  to  the  Greek 
National  Army,  has  also  had  the  responsibility, 
since  the  admission  of  Greece  to  NATO,  of  exe- 
cuting missions  assigned  by  headquarters  of  Allied 
Air  Forces,  Southern  Europe,  a  NATO  command. 

In  spite  of  its  extremely  limited  resources  and 
the  precarious  state  of  its  economy,  Greece  has 
been  spending  relatively  large  amounts  on  its  de- 
fense program.  Total  defense  expenditures  for 
the  past  4  years  have  amounted  to  the  equivalent 
of  $331  million,  or  7.5  percent  of  the  country's 
gross  national  product  for  the  period.  This  ratio 
has  been  exceeded  only  by  the  United  Kingdom 


and  France,  among  the  European  NATO  countries. 

Turkey  also  has  been  steadily  expanding  its 
rate  of  spending  for  defense.  The  Turkish  Gov- 
ernment's military  expenditures  in  the  past  4 
jrears  have  amounted  to  over  $1  billion.  This  was 
equivalent  to  6.6  percent  of  Turkey's  gross  na- 
tional product. 

When  the  military  aid  program  began,  the  Turk- 
ish defense  establishment  consisted  of  well-dis- 
ciplined personnel  with  a  will  to  fight  but  with 
little  modern  equipment,  training,  or  logistic 
support.  In  recent  years,  Turkey  has  been 
transforming  its  armed  forces  into  one  of  the  most 
powerful  and  dependable  military  organizations 
in  the  Near  East  region.  The  strategic  location 
of  the  country  makes  it  desirable  for  Turkey  to 
maintain  a  large  standing  army,  quickly  expand- 
able on  mobilization  to  receive  the  initial  impact 
of  an  overland,  amphibian,  or  airborne  invasion. 
The  Turkish  army  is  therefore  being  organized 
into  a  hard-hitting,  compact,  and  relatively  mo- 
bile force  which  can  be  quickly  deployed.  The 
air  and  naval  forces  are  being  trained  and  equipped 
for  important  supporting  roles. 


A  Turkish  armored  unit  passing  in  review  at  Ankara,  Turkey. 
States  under  the  mutual  security  program. 


The  tanks  were  furnished  by  the  United 


26 


The  military  assistance  supply  program  for 
Iran  is  in  the  form  of  items  which  will  increase  the 
strength  and  efficiency  of  the  Iranian  army  and 
gendarmerie,  so  that  the  country  can  guard  itself 
against  internal  subversion  or  external  aggression. 

The  economies  of  the  countries,  as  well  as  their 
defense,  capabilities,  have  been  aided  by  the 
United  States  program  to  finance  the  production 
of  military  supplies  in  friendly  countries-.  We 
have  entered  into  contracts  with  Greece,  for  ex- 
ample, totaling  $35  million  for  military  procure- 
ment in  that  country.  Such  procurement  was 
made  possible  by  development  of  a  new  ammuni- 
tion plant.  Our  contracts  with  Turkey  for  pro- 
curement in  that  country  amoimt  to  $8.5  million. 

Special  Economic  Aid 

India's  Development  Plan 
Aided  by  U.  S. 

Supplementing  the  technical  cooperation  pro- 
gram in  India,  the  United.  States  has  furnished 
critically  needed  supplies  and  equipment  to  rein- 
force the  efforts  of  the  Indian  Government  to 
reach  the  development  goals  set  forth  in  its  first 


5-year  plan.  This  plan,  projected  through  mid- 
1956,  is  aimed  at  improving  the  living  conditions 
of  India's  363  million  people  and  calls  for  sub- 
stantial increases  in  agr/icultural  production, 
along  with  a  general  development  of  basic  re- 
sources, and  industrial  aud  transportation  facilities. 

The  primary  emphasis  of  the  development  plan 
has  been  on  agriculture,  and  accordingly  the 
United  States  programs  in  India  for  the  past  2 
years  have  concentrated  on  measures  which  would 
increase  agricultural  production.  These  measures 
have  included  the  financing  of  fertilizer  imports,  as 
well  as  technical  cooperation  for  expanding  India's 
Sindri  fertilizer  plant,  the  largest  in  Asia.  Mate- 
rials have  also  been  supplied  for  the  production  of 
agricultural  implements  and  for  the  drilling  of 
irrigation  wells. 

For  fiscal  year  1954,  $57.5  million  was  pro- 
gramed for  India  for  special  economic  aid  which 
will  further  assist  the  country's  development 
programs.  The  bulk  of  these  funds  has  been 
allocated  for  the  supply  of  steel  and  for  rehabili- 
tation of  India's  railroad  system. 

India's  requirements  for  certain  types  of  steel  for 
the  fiscal  year  1954  have  been  estimated  at 
725,000  tons;  domestic  production  for  the  period 


India's  Food  Situation 


Production  of  Food  has  Increased 


(Index,  1936-38  =  100) 


All  Foods 


/ 


/ 


7 


Cereals 


1946-47       "47-48         '48-49        '49-50        '50-51         '51-52       '52-53 

Crop  Years 


. . .  But  Supplies  are  Below 
Population  Requirements 


2.250 


Estimated 
Requirements 


Total  Calories 


■  Cereals 


Calorie  Food  Supply 
Per  Capita  Daily- 1952-53 


290163—54 5 


27 


will  not  exceed  340,000  tons.  Without  the  needed 
steel,  India's  development  progress  would  be 
greatly  retarded.  To  help  make  up  the  de- 
ficiency in  domestic  production,  the  United 
States  has  agreed  to  finaiice  the  purchase  of 
200,000  tons  of  steel  at  a  cost  of  $25.5  million. 
The  equivalent  of  $25.5  million  in  local  currency 
proceeds  from  domestic  sale  of  the  steel  will  be 
used  for  economic  development  projects  mutually 
approved  by  the  United  States  and  India.  The 
steel  shipped  under  the  mutual  security  program 
will  be  used  for  development  projects  in  agriculture 
and  industry,  and  for  major  river-valley  proj  ects. 

The  rehabilitation  and  maintenance  of  India's 
railroad  rolling-stock,  which  had  badly  deteriorated 
during  World  War  II,  is  essential  to  the  develop- 
ment and  expansion  of  all  sectors  of  its  economy. 
India's  railway  system  is  the  fourth  largest  in 
the  world.  Each  day,  some  3,800  trains  carry 
more  than  3  million  passengers  over  34,000  miles 
of  track.  In  December  1953,  the  United  States 
agreed  to  use  $20  million  of  special  economic-aid 


funds  to  help  finance  the  purchase  of  100  new 
locomotives  and  5,000  new  freight  cars.  India 
will  deposit  the  equivalent  of  this  amount  in  a 
fund  to  be  used  for  additional  development  proj- 
ects jointly  agreed  upon  by  the  Governments  of 
India  and  the  United  States. 

During  the  latter  part  of  1953,  discussions  were 
carried  on  between  the  Foreign  Operations 
Administration  and  the  International  Bank  for 
Reconstruction  and  Development  to  explore 
the  possibilities  of  establishing  a  private  financial 
institution  to  promote  industrial  expansion  in 
India.  As  the  year  ended,  the  International  Bank 
was  planning  to  send  representatives  to  discuss 
the  matter  with  potential  private  investors  and 
the  Indian  Government. 

Iran  Gets  Aid  To  Meet  a  Crisis 

In  August  1953,  the  Government  of  Iran  faced 
economic  catastrophe.  The  Iranian  treasury  was 
virtually  empty,  the  Government  was  deeply  in 
debt,  consumer  goods  were  in  short  supply,  and 


Construction  of  the  Hirakud  River  dam  in  India.  This  multipurpose  dam  will  eventually  irrigate  almost  2 
million  acres.  The  dam  is  3  miles  wide,  with  the  dykes  extending  11  miles.  The  Indian  Government  is 
spending  the  equivalent  of  $175  million  for  this  project,  and  the  United  States  has  contributed  technical  knowl- 
edge and  earth-moving  equipment. 


28 


prices  were  rising  rapidly.  The  United  States 
acted  quickly  to  help  improve  this  critical  situation 
in  an  important  and  friendly  country  of  the  free 
world.  On  September  5,  the  President  approved 
$45  million  of  emergency  aid  to  supplement  the 
$23  million  previously  programed  for  economic 
assistance  and  technical  cooperation. 

The  Foreign  Operations  Administration  took 
immediate  steps  to  make  $10  million  of  the  $45 
million  grant  available  to  finance  Iranian  imports 
of  certain  Heeded  essentials  such  as  foodstuffs, 
drugs,  cement,  iron  and  steel  products,  and  repair 
parts.  An  additional  $12  million  was  used  to  buy 
100,000  tons  of  sugar,  since  Iran's  annual  sugar 
output  is  nearly  130,000  tons  below  its  needs. 
These  commodities  have  been  programed  and 
shipped  as  fast  as  possible.  The  first  shipment  of 
sugar,  for  example,  arrived  in  Iran  on  November  1, 
three  weeks  ahead  of  schedule. 

The  remainder  of  the  $45  million  has  been  pro- 
gramed for  additional  needed  commodities  and 
temporary  budget  support.  The  local  currency 
obtained  through  the  sale  of  the  imported  supplies 
will  be  used  in  part  for  government  operating 
expenses,  and  in  part  for  needed  projects  in 
housing,  road  improvement,  and  health. 

These  emergency  aid  actions  have  been  effective 
in  remedying  a  number  of  the  immediate  difficul- 
ties faced  by  the  Iranian  Government,  but  long- 
term  improvements  "in  Iran's  economy  depend,  of 
course,  upon  settlement  of  the  oil  dispute. 

Israel  Is  Helped  To  Stabilize 
Its  Economy 

In  addition  to  providing  the  services  of  Ameri- 
can technicians  and  to  training  Israeli  nationals 
under  the  technical  cooperation  program,  the 
United  States  has  provided  Israel  with  special 
economic  assistance. 

The  $70  million  of  economic  assistance  funds 
which  had  been  appropriated  for  the  fiscal  year 
1953  was  a  major  factor  in  helping  the  Israeli 
Government  to  stabilize  its  economy.  The  bulk 
of  these  funds — roughly  $45  million — was  used  for 
items  such  as  foodstuffs,  fuel,  fertilizer,  raw  mate- 
rials, and  medical  supplies.  The  remainder  was 
used  principally  for  resettlement,  housing  con- 
struction, and  for  capital  development  items, 
mainly  in  the  field  of  irrigation. 

In  November  1953,  an  additional  $26  million 
was  made  available.  These  funds  have  been  used 
to  finance  imports  of  consumer  and  industrial 


goods  necessary  for  the  stabilization  and  increased 
productivity  of  Israel's  economy.  Within  2 
months,  $20.5  million  worth  of  procurement 
authorizations  had  been  issued. 

Operations  under  the  grant  aid  program  have 
resulted  in  the  deposit  of  Israeli  currency  in  a 
special  counterpart  account.  Use  of  these  counter- 
part funds  has  been  closely  coordinated  with  the 
release  of  dollars  under  the  grant-aid  program, 
and  with  technical  cooperation.  In  rangeland 
development,  for  example,  purchase  of  equipment 
and  livestock  was  financed  from  grant-aid  funds, 
essential  relocation  costs  were  covered  in  part  by 
counterpart  funds,  and  specialists  working  under 
the  technical  cooperation  program  helped  to  draw 
up  the  plans  and  put  them  into  effect. 

Pakistan  Program  Stresses 
Food  Output 

In  the  latter  half  of  1953,  $11.3  million  was 
made  available  for  the  special  economic  aid  pro- 
gram to  Pakistan. 

Under  this  program,  project  agreements  have 
been  signed  for  importing  and  producing  needed 
fertilizer  to  raise  food  output.  The  sum  of  $3.5 
million  has  been  earmarked  to  assist  in  the 
construction  of  a  fertilizer  factory;  another  $3.1 
million  has  been  used  to  finance  fertilizer  imports 
into  the  country. 

Food  Program. — To  aid  the  people  of  Pakistan 
in  a  time  of  threatened  famine,  an  Act  was  passed 
authorizing  the  President  to  make  available  up  to 
1  million  tons  of  excess  reserve  stocks  of  Com- 
modity Credit  Corporation  wheat.  Operating 
under  Executive  Order,  the  Foreign  Operations 
Administration  immediately  made  available  up  to 
700,000  long  tons  on  a  grant  basis.  The  law 
making  it  possible  to  transfer  the  wheat  was 
passed  by  the  Congress  and  approved  by  the 
President  on  June  25,  1953.  The  first  shipload 
of  wheat  left  the  port  of  Baltimore  the  next  day. 

By  the  end  of  December,  about  600,000  tons 
were  already  shipped;  over  475,000  tons  of  wheat, 
requiring  71  voyages,  had  arrived  at  Karachi. 

The  main  objective  of  the  emergency  wheat 
program  was  to  alleviate  Pakistan's  food  crisis 
after  2  successive  years  of  drought.  The  program 
was  also  aimed  to  prevent  large-scale  hoarding 
and  speculation  which  would  boost  basic  food 
prices  and  start  an  inflationary  spiral  in  Pakistan's 
already  precarious  economy. 


29 


U.  S.  Surplus  Wheat  Is  Sent  To  Relieve  Pakistan's  Food  Shortage 


600 


500 


300 


100 


(Thousand  Long  Tons) 


Retail  Wheat  Prices 
in  Karachi 

tBushel  Equivalents) 


$2.95 


:i$2.5l:i 


Before  First  After  First 
U.S.  Wheat  U.S.  Wheat 
Shipment       Shipment 


Liftings  from  U.S.  Ports 
and  Arrivals  in  Karachi 
June-December.  1953- 


Shipped  by 
Dec.3l 

597 

Thous.  Tons 


Pakistan  Wheat  Bi 

Approved 

June  25 


Both  objectives  were  accomplished.  The  Am- 
bassador of  Pakistan  has  stated  that  millions  of 
his  people  were  saved  from  starvation  by  American 
wheat.  In  addition,  simultaneously  with  the 
arrival  of  the  first  relief  shipment  in  late  July, 
the  official  price  of  wheat  in  Pakistan  was  lowered. 
Quantities  of  local  wheat,  probably  being  hoarded 
after  two  consecutive  drought  seasons,  found 
their  way  into  the  nation's  food  markets. 

The  wheat  is  being  shipped  from  the  United 
States  in  bulk  and  bagged  in  the  hold  of  the 
ship  upon  arrival  in  Karachi.  The  bagged  wheat 
then  travels  by  rail,  truck,  and  even  by  camel 
to  the  villages  in  west  Pakistan.  The  Food 
Minister  of  Pakistan  has  said,  "We  can  account 
for  every  grain  of  wheat  that  we  have  received. 
There  is  nothing  we  have  lost,  there  is  nothing 
that  has  been  pilfered,  there  is  nothing  that  we 
have  squandered." 

The  legislation  provided  that  the  American 
wheat  was  to  be  distributed  without  cost  to  those 
who  through  no  fault  of  their  own  were  unable  to 
pay  for  it.  A  system  of  free  distribution  to  the 
needy  has  been  put  into  effect.  Work  relief 
projects,  which  include  a  25-percent  bonus  in 
wheat  to  the  workers,  have  also  been  initiated. 


In  addition,  wheat  has  been  issued  to  charitable 
organizations,  such  as  the  Red  Cross  and  the 
Memon  Relief  Society,  to  assist  in  the  care  of  the 
aged,  orphans,  and  refugees. 

From  the  outset,  the  Pakistan  Government  has 
given  favorable  publicity  to  the  gift  of  wheat 
through  newspaper  coverage,  radio  broadcasts, 
and  speeches  by  Government  and  local  officials. 
It  has  produced  and  issued  a  documentary  film  in 
English,  Bengali,  and  Urdu  on  the  subject.  The 
proceeds  derived  from  that  portion  of  the  wheat 
sold  provide  funds  to  support  new  projects  to 
expand  food  production  and  guard  against  future 
shortages.  The  expenditure  of  the  counterpart 
funds  is  jointly  approved  and  administered  by 
representatives  of  the  United  States  Government 
and  the  Government  of  Pakistan. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  the  expeditious  action 
by  the  Congress  and  the  prompt  implementation 
of  the  Pakistan  wheat  program  prevented  a  calam- 
ity in  that  country.  The  American  people's  gift 
of  wheat  has  served  to  strengthen  a  yoimg,  but 
large  and  important,  nation  during  a  trying  period 
of  its  early  existence. 

Emergency  Food  Programs  to  Jordan  and 
Libya. — The  Jordan  Government  in  early  August 


30 


requested  aid  from  the  United  States  in  the  form 
of  a  wheat  grant.  It  had  become  apparent  tha't 
the  1953  wheat  crop  in  a  large  area  was  almost  a 
complete  failure.  Moreover,  the  country  was 
still  suffering  from  the  effect  of  the  1951  drought. 
The  aid  was  approved  by  the  President  on  Sep- 
tember 2,  1953,  and  an  agreement  between  the 
United  States  and  Jordan  was  signed  on  October 
20.  In  early  November,  10,000  tons  of  hard 
spring  wheat  were  shipped. 

This  aid  was  extended  under  provisions  of 
Public  Law  216,  approved  in  1953,  which  au- 
thorizes the  President  to  use  stocks  of  agricultural 
commodities  held  by  the  Commodity  Credit 
Corporation  to  assist  friendly  peoples  in  meeting 
famine  or  other  urgent  requirements.  Some  of 
the  wheat  was  sold  at  prevailing  prices  to  obtain 
funds  for  defrajung  costs  of  distribution;  the 
balance  was  being  distributed  free  to  destitute  and 
unemployed  persons. 

A  serious  food  shortage  also  developed  in  Libya 
following  a  severe  drought.  In  December  1953, 
Libya  was  declared  eligible  for  assistance  under 
Public  Law  216,  and  shipment  of  2,200  tons  of 
wheat  was  made  in  December  to  relieve  suffering 
in  the  famine-stricken  areas. 

Palestine  Refugee  Program: 
Jordan  Valley  Development 

As  a  result  of  hostilities  between  the  Arab  States 
and  the  State  of  Israel,  hundreds  of  thousands  of 
Arabs  fled  from  Palestine  into  neighboring  Arab 
countries.  These  refugees — destitute,  homeless, 
and  almost  totally  dependent  on  outside  assist- 
ance— constitute  a  serious  problem  which  is  woven 
inextricably  into  the  economic,  social  and,  political 
frictions  that  afflict  the  Near  East.  The  refugee 
problem  remains  as  one  of  the  principal  unresolved 
issues  between  Israel  and  the  Arabs.  The  Arab 
refugee  population  totals  some  850,000  persons  and 
is  growing  at  the  rate  of  20,000-25,000  annually. 

The  United  Nations  Relief  and  Works  Agency 
for  Palestine  Refugees  in  the  Near  East  (UNRWA) 
gave  increased  attention  during  the  latter  half  of 
1953  to  ways  and  means  whereby  the  Arab 
refugees  may  become  self-supporting.  The  most 
significant  development  during  the  period  was  the 
preparation  of  a  plan  for  unified  development  of 
the  Jordan  Valley.  The  plan,  prepared  at  the 
request  of  UNRWA  by  an  American  engineering 
firm  under  the  supervision  of  the  Tennessee  Valley 
Authority,  was  deliberately  developed  without  re- 


gard to  political  factors  or  present  national  bound- 
aries. It  was  designed  to  show  how  the  waters  of 
the  Jordan  may  be  efficiently  stored  and  controlled 
for  irrigation  and  hydroelectric  power  for  the  bene- 
fit of  all  of  the  peoples  of  the  Jordan  watershed, 
including  the  refugees. 

In  view  of  the  economic  and  political  importance 
of  such  development,  the  President,  in  October 
1953,  sent  Mr.  Eric  Johnston  as  his  Special 
Representative,  with  the  rank  of  Ambassador,  to 
explain  the  significance  and  benefits  of  the  plan  to 
the  governments  of  the  countries  concerned.  Mr. 
Johnston  discussecl  the  proposal  for  the  coordi- 
nated development  of  the  Jordan  River  watershed 
with  the  leaders  of  Jordan,  Syria,  Lebanon,  and 
Israel.  The  statesmen  of  all  four  countries  have 
been  studying  the  proposal,  and  the  President  has 
asked  Mr.  Johnston  to  return  to  the  area  for 
further  discussions  as  soon  as  the  governments 
complete  their  review. 

It  is  estimated  that  240,000  acres  of  land,  now 
idle  and  unproductive,  can  be  put  into  production 
if  the  proposed  development  plan  is  accepted. 
Most  of  this  land  would  yield  three  crops  a  year. 
In  addition,  more  than  65,000  kilowatts  of  power 
could  be  made  available  to  aid  the  industrial 
development  of  the  area. 

In  October  1953,  UNRWA  concluded  an  agree- 
ment with  the  Egyptian  Government  for  extensive 
technical  surveys  in  connection  with  a  proposal  to 
reclaim  land  in  the  Sinai  Peninsula  for  refugee  use 
by  siphoning  water  under  the  Suez  Canal  from  a 
fresh-water  canal  fed  by  the  Nile.  These  surveys, 
expected  to  be  completed  in  mid-1954,  are  being 
made  under  a  general  program  agreement  between 
the  Egyptian  Government  and  UNRWA,  for 
which  $30  million  has  been  reserved  by  UNRWA. 

The  General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations, 
after  reviewing  the  UNRWA  program,  adopted  in 
November  a  resolution  extending  the  life  of 
UNRWA  through  June  30,  1955,  and  authorized 
a  budget  of  $24.8  million  for  continued  relief  of 
the  refugees  during  the  fiscal  year  1954. 

Pursuant  to  section  549  (a)  of  the  Mutual 
Security  Act  of  1953,  the  Director  of  the  Foreign 
Operations  Administration  appointed  a  special 
3-man  commission  to  survey  the  refugee  situation 
in  the  Near  East  and  to  recommend  means  of 
seeking  a  solution  of  the  refugee  problem.  This 
commission  had  not  yet  been  able  to  make  a  survey 
in  the  field,  and  consequently  filed  on  December 
14,  1953,  an  interim  report  which  was  transmitted 
to  the  Congress.     The  report  recommended  that 


31 


the  United  States  support  the  decision  of  the 
United  Nations  General  Assembly  to  continue 
UNRWA,  and  endorsed  the  plan  for  the  unified 
development  of  the  Jordan  River  as  the  best 
forward  step  in  a  practical  program^  for  putting 
the  refugees  on  a  self-supporting  basis. 

Technical  Cooperation 

United  States  technical  cooperation  programs 
have  matched  the  particular  needs  of  the  area. 
A  fisheries  adviser  for  Liberia;  an  engineering  sur- 
vey for  Saudi  Arabia;  a  fertilizer  expert  for  India; 
a  team  to  establish  an  agricultural  school  in 
Ethiopia;  a  tax  consultant  for  Iran;  a  wool-grading 
expert  for  Libya;  teacher  training  specialists  for 
Jordan — these  are  representative  of  the  variety  of 
technical  skills  needed  to  carry  forward  our  tech- 
nical cooperation  projects.  Within  each  country, 
however,  the  various  projects  are  being  integrated 
into  a  planned  development  program  in  order  to 
produce  results  which  will  fit  in  with  the  country's 
overall  needs. 

The  successful  impact  of  the  technical  coopera- 
tion programs  is  evident  in  the  numbers  and  types 
of  activities  in  which  the  United  States  has  been 
asked  to  participate.  Almost  800  American  tech- 
nicians are  working  with  nationals  of  the  host 
countries  in  the  area,  imparting  needed  skills  and 
teaching  them  how  to  teach  others  in  order  to 
spread  the  knowledge  among  their  countrymen. 
In  addition  to  augmenting  a  country's  own  efforts, 
this  work  is  paving  the  way  for  greater  interest  in 
private  investment,  both  local  and  foreign.  The 
increasing  participation,  not  only  in  money  but  in 
the  provision  by  the  host  governments  of  land, 
buildings,  equipment  and  labor,  is  a  healthy  sign 
of  growing  awareness  that  these  activities  are  for 
the  benefit  of  the  participating  countries,  and  that 
United  States  objectives  are  simply  to  assist  them 
in  accelerating  their  development  and  combatting 
the  ravages  of  hunger,  poverty,  and  disease. 

Land  Projects  Bring  Striking  Results 

The  water-spreading  project  in  Jordan  is  a  dra- 
matic demonstration  of  what  American  experience 
and  know-how  can  accomplish  in  helping  the  people 
of  a  less  developed  country.  As  a  direct  result  of 
the  construction  of  a  system  of  simple  earthen 
dikes  by  our  technicians  working  with  the  Jor- 
danians, lush  grass  grew  in  a  200-acre  area 
where  there  was  no  record  of  grass  ever  growing 
before.     A  hay  crop,  equivalent  in  volume  and 


nutritive  value  to  a  crop  grown  in  the  United 
States,  was  harvested  and  distributed  to  the  desert 
tribes.  It  is  now  planned  to  grow  grains  in  the 
reclaimed  area. 

Word  of  the  success  of  this  project  has  spread 
throughout  the  Near  East.  A  similar  project  has 
been  started  in  Egypt.  A  group  of  23  agricultural 
leaders  from  9  countries  was  brought  to  the  United 
States  to  observe  various  water-spreading  and 
irrigation  techniques,  and  to  take  intensive  train- 
ing courses  in  planned  water-spreading  and  related 
range  and  forage  management.  These  men,  offi- 
cials of  their  governments,  have  returned  to  their 
home  countries  to  work  there  with  United  States 
technicians  in  making  use  of  the  methods  learned 
in  this  country.  In  addition,  plans  have  been 
made  for  a  water-spreading  training  program  in 
Jordan.  Each  country  in  the  Near  East  will  be 
asked  to  send  an  official  and  two  technicians  to 
participate  in  the  course. 

The  Government  of  Iraq  has  requested  assist- 
ance in  making  a  scientific  and  practical  attack 
on  the  problem  of  land  reclamation.  Proposals 
have  been  made  to  establish  a  Grazing  Division 
in  the  government  and  to  develop  a  broad  program 
of  testing  forage  and  range  plants.  Information 
on  techniques  and  local  adaptations  will  be  sup- 
plied to  other  countries. 

A  comprehensive  land-reclamation  program  is 
under  way  in  Israel  as  part  of  a  long-range  project 
for  the  development  of  at  least  half  a  million  acres 
of  range  grazing  land  which  have  been  badly  dam- 
aged by  centuries  of  overgrazing.  The  land- 
reclamation  program  is  aimed  at  reclaiming  25,000 
to  40,000  acres  each  year  and  is  expected  to  revo- 
lutionize Israel's  cattle  industry.  When  the 
projected  program  is  completed,  about  10,000 
tons  of  dressed  beef  will  be  produced  annually,  and 
Israel  will  be  able  to  cut  down  its  heavy  expendi- 
tures for  meat  imports.  American  experts  in 
range  management  and  cattle  production  are  pro- 
viding technical  guidance. 

Programs  of  community  development  or  village 
improvement — some  of  which  include  land  recla- 
mation, land  tenure,  and  better  utilization  of  land 
resources — are  also  under  way  in  a  number  of 
countries.  Egypt  is  undertaking  a  demonstra- 
tion community  development  program  in  two 
provinces  where  landless  farmers  will  be  resettled 
on  land  which  is  being  reclaimed.  In  Iran,  the 
Shah's  land  reform  program  is  being  given  fresh 
impetus  by  United  States  technical  cooperation  in 
farm  management,   rural  credit,   sanitation   and 


32 


supervised  farming  methods.  In  Lebanon,  a  proj- 
ect to  irrigate  lands  in  the  Kasmie  Valley  includes 
technical  cooperation  in  agricultural  extension, 
education,  and  public  health . 

Water  utilization  programs  are  also  being  car- 
ried on  in  the  African  territories.  In  the^Belgian 
Congo,  a  technical  cooperation  project  is  now 
under  way  for  the  better  control  and  use  of  the 
area's  water  facilities.  In  Italian  Somaliland, 
FOA  has  completed  a  ground-water  survey,  and 
an  American,  expert  is  teaching  well-digging 
techniques  to  the  natives. 

In  Angola,  a  contract  has  been  signed  with  an 
American  firm  to  carry  out  a  program  of  explora- 
tion and  development  of  underground  water 
supplies.  Another  contract  has  been  approved 
for  a  survey  to  select  the  best  possibilities  for 
water-power  development. 

Agricultural  Gains  and  New  Techniques 

The  obstacles  to  progress  in  agriculture,  im- 
posed by  outmoded  methods  and  untrained  work- 
ers, gradually  are  being  overcome.  Production  of 
foodstuffs  and  fibers  is  beginning  to  reflect  the 
improved  techniques  introduced  under  the  tech- 
nical cooperation  program. 

In  Greece,  for  example,  agricultural  production 
reached  an  all-time  high  in  1953.  For  the  first 
time  in  many  years,  self-sufficiency  was  achieved 
in  the  production  of  such  items  as  rice,  beans, 
and  peas.  There  was  more  than  enough  olive  oil 
for  domestic  requirements,  almost  enough  fresh 
vegetables,  and  nearly  enough  fish.  Gross  agricul- 
tural output  for  the  crop  year  beginning  in  1953 
was  28  percent  higher  than  the  prewar  average. 

These  increases  are,  in  large  part,  due  to  the 
continuing  technical  and  economic  programs  which 
began  in  1947.  American  specialists  in  various 
branches  of  agriculture  have  worked  with  Greek 
officials  in  the  program  to  increase  production. 
They  helped  to  establish  the  first  agricultural 
extension  service  in  the  country;  400  trained 
experts  are  now  working  directly  with  farmers  and 
farm  families.  Land  has  been  reclaimed,  wells 
drilled,  and  irrigation  facilities  extended.  Im- 
proved seeds,  farm  equipment,  fertilizers,  and 
pesticides  have  been  provided.  Aid  in  the  form  of 
fishing  vessels  and  equipment,  and  technical 
advice  by  American  fisheries  specialists,  have 
enabled  the  Greek  people  to  raise  their  supply  of 
fish  about  20,000  metric  tons  above  prewar  levels. 
The  annual  increase  is  worth  about  $6  million; 
new  equipment  for  fisheries  costs  about  $2  million. 


A  permanent  agricultural  extension  service  is 
now  being  inaugurated  in  Iraq.  The  Iraqi 
Government  last  fall  adopted  a  plan,  prepared 
jointly  by  United  States  and  Iraqi  technicians, 
which  included  not  only  provision  for  annual 
budgeting  and  legislative  action,  but  specific  pro- 
posals for  numbers  and  types  of  workers  through 
1957,  location  and  operation  of  demonstration 
farms,  orderly  expansion  to  insure  complete 
coverage  of  all  areas  of  the  country,  and  training 
courses  in  specialized  fields.  Through  coordinated 
programs,  trained  workers  will  be  provided  from 
the  Iraq  Agriculture  College,  and  technical  support 
will  be  furnished  by  the  University  of  Arizona. 

Liberia's  new  Research  Center  at  Suakoko  was 
dedicated  in  October  1953.  The  Center  is  dis- 
seminating, through  extension  work  and  training 
courses,  information  on  improved  varieties  of 
crops  for  local  consumption  and  for  export. 
Liberia's  annual  food  shortage  is  reportedly  less 
severe  this  year  because  of  the  country's  increased 
agricultural  production.  More  fish  are  now  on  the 
market,  at  lower  prices,  because  of  more  effective 
marine  fishing  techniques  brought  about  through 
the  work  of  an  American  fisheries  expert. 

Sixty  thousand  chicks  donated  by  American 
farmers  have  been  distributed  to  villages  in  Iran  to 
bring  up  the  standard  of  farm  flocks ;  5  million  head 
of  livestock  have  been  vaccinated  or  treated  by 
mobile  veterinary  teams;  50  pure-bred  cattle  have 
been  distributed  for  breeding  purposes.  An  im- 
proved native  variety  of  wheat,  which  showed  an 
average  increase  in  yield  of  25  percent  in  test 
plantings,  has  been  developed,  and  100  tons  of  this 
variety  were  distributed  for  seed  in  1953. 

Three  forest  nurseries  have  been  completed  in 
Libya,  and  160,000  seedlings  are  being  planted  by 
farmers  and  government  workers  on  the  sand  dime 
stabilization  project.  Over  500  varieties  of  grains, 
grasses,  legumes,  and  vegetables  from  33  different 
countries  have  been  brought  into  Nepal.  It  is 
estimated  that  crop  production  in  Nepal  can  be 
increased  by  20  percent  through  higher-yielding 
and  disease-resistant  plants.  Mechanical  grading 
machines,  bought  on  the  advice  of  American 
technicians,  have  increased  the  sale  of  Lebanon's 
potatoes  and  onions  in  the  Persian  Gulf  area. 

Negotiations  have  been  started  for  programs  of 
technical  cooperation  in  Kenya,  Uganda,  and 
Tanganyika  in  vocational  training,  agricultural 
extension  work,  and  hydrology.  In  Madagascar, 
an  American  rice  specialist  is  helping  to  develop  a 
program  for  increasing  the  island's  rice  production. 


33 


Auger  supplied  by  FOA  drills  holes  for  tree  plantation,  in  Libya.  Up  to  1,000  holes  per  day  can  be  bored 
with  this  rig  in  soil  so  hard  that  output  per  man  with  pick  and  shovel  is  only  6  to  8  holes.  Planting  of 
90,000  trees  is  scheduled. 


Health  Conditions  Block 
Economic  Development 

A  major  obstacle  to  the  economic  development 
of  the  countries  in  the  area  is  the  low  productivity 
caused  by  debditating  diseases  and  the  relatively 
short  life  span.  Health  facdities  and  trained 
personnel  are  inadequate  in  most  countries.  In 
India,  for  instance,  there  is  only  1  physician  for 
6,300  persons  and  only  32  hospital  beds  for  100,000 
persons.  The  infant  mortality  rate  is  116  per 
1,000  births;  the  average  life  expectancy  is  27 
years.  Comparable  figures  for  Egypt  are  1  phy- 
sician for  5,000  persons,  110  hospital  beds  for 
100,000  persons,  an  infant  mortality  rate  of  130, 
and  an  average  life  expectancy  of  39  years.  In 
the  United  States,  by  contrast,  we  have  one  phy- 
sician for  750  people  and  900  hospital  beds  for 
100,000  persons.  The  infant  mortality  rate  is  29 
per  1,000  births,  and  our  life  expectancy  is  68 
years. 


Health  and  sanitation  activities  carried  on  under 
the  technical  cooperation  program  are  designed  to 
provide  better  health  facdities,  reduce  the  incidence 
of  preventable  diseases,  and  improve  environ- 
mental sanitation.  About  125  American  public 
health  specialists,  including  physicians,  public 
health  nurses,  and  sanitary  engineers,  are  working 
in  14  countries  of  the  region  to  foster  better 
health  practices. 

The  annual  pilgrimage  to  Mecca  gathers  to- 
gether Moslems  from  all  over  the  world.  To  re- 
duce the  threat  of  epidemic  outbreaks  caused  by 
overcrowding  and  insufficient  housing  and  sani- 
tary facihties,  assistance  is  being  given  to  the 
Government  of  Saudi  Arabia,  in  cooperation  with 
the  World  Health  Organization,  to  complete  a 
quarantine  station  at  Jidda. 

A  maternal  and  child-health  demonstration  and 
training  center  has  been  established  at  Samawa,  a 
city  in  southern  Iraq.     This  center  is  organized 


34 


Infant  Mortality  Rates 


Number  of  Deaths  Under  1  Year 
of  Age  Reported  for  1,000 
Live  Births  in  the  Same  Year1 


130 


116 


78 


40 


U.S. 


Israel      Ceylon      India       Egypt 


1  Based  on  latest  available  data 


and  'equipped  to  train  midwives  and  nurses.  A 
continuous  training  course  is  in  progress  and 
serves  as  a  model  for  the  extension  of  similar  serv- 
ices throughout  Iraq.  A  new  Division  of  Environ- 
mental Sanitation  in  the  Iraq  Ministry  of  Health 
has  also  been  organized,  and  health  technicians 
are  advising  on  sanitary  engineering  and  sanita- 
tion activities. 

I  Forty  practical  nurses  and  midwives  are  ready 
for  work  after  attending  Jordan's  first  nurses' 
training  school,  which  opened  in  1953.  Classes 
have  begun  for  a  small  group  of  women  whose 
educational  background  qualified  tbem  for  careers 
as  professional  nurses. 

Some  villages  of  the  Bekaa  Valley  of  Lebanon 
are  now  served,  for  the  first  time,  by  a  health 
center.  Medical  teams  are  attacking  trachoma  in 
Libya,  principally  among  the  school  children  and 
their  teachers.  In  Iran,  the  Ministry  of  Health 
and  the  United  States  Operations  Mission  have 
entered  into  a  cooperative  health  program  operat- 
ing under  a  joint  fund  arrangement.  The  em- 
phasis is  on  a  program  of  training  and  demonstra- 
tion, principally  in  disease  prevention. 

Education 

Schools  beyond  the  secondary  level  are  rare  in 
most  of  the  countries  in  this  area,  and  consequently 
the  facilities  for  the  training  of  teachers  have  been 
extremely    limited.      The    technical    cooperation 


program,  therefore,  has  placed  considerable  em- 
phasis on  the  development  of  teacher  training 
schools.  Training  of  teachers  creates  a  fast  "mul- 
tiplying factor"  to  accelerate  the  spread  of 
knowledge. 

Another  educational  area  in  which  the  countries 
are  particularly  deficient  is  professional  and  voca- 
tional training.  It  is  not  practicable,  of  course,  to 
develop  professional  colleges  in  aU  fields  in  each 
country,  but  technical  and  vocational  schools  are 
established  where  there  is  an  active  demand  for 
trained  personnel.  A  commercial  school  in  Saudi 
Arabia,  for  example,  was  started  with  the  support 
of  local  businessmen. 

Jordan  now  has  a  teacher  training  college  for 
women,  and  another  for  men.  These  are  the  first 
institutions  beyond  the  secondary  school  level  that 
Jordan  has  ever  had.  New  buildings  for  both 
colleges  are  now  under  construction  to  replace  the 
present  makeshift  quarters.  Training  courses  for 
nurses,  nurses'  aides,  and  midwives  have  also  been 
started.  Teacher  training  also  is  being  expanded 
in  Liberia  and  Libya. 

The  enthusiastic  cooperation  of  Oklahoma  A.  & 
M.  College,  in  little  more  than  a  year,  has  given  a 
great  boost  to  the  educational  level  and  school 
facilities  of  Ethiopia.  Its  assistance  has  enabled 
an  agricultural  secondary  school  in  Jimma  to 
begin  its  second  year  with  the  enrollment,  in 
addition  to  the  high  school  group,  of  17  students 
qualified  for  first-year  college  work.  The  college 
is  also  operating  the  technical  education  high 
school  in  Addis  Ababa  and  assisting  in  the  technical 
school  at  Asmara.  Moreover,  it  is  providing  the 
coUege  staff  for  the  Agricultural  and  Mechanical 
College  at  Harar.  The  activities  of  Oklahoma 
A.  &  M.  College,  under  an  extended  contract,  are 
to  be  expanded  not  only  in  agriculture  but  also  in 
vocational  education. 

Public    Administration    and 
Government    Services 

As  experience  has  been  gained  in  technical 
cooperation  programs,  one  problem  common  to  all 
the  underdeveloped  countries  emerges.  There  is 
a  great  lack  of  managerial  skills.  Many  of  the 
programs  undertaken  in  technical  cooperation 
must  be  operated  as  public  services.  The  under- 
lying purpose  of  United  States  programs  is  to 
enable  the  host  governments  independently  to 
carry  on  the  work  once  it  has  been  started  with 
our  help,  but  American  technicians  in  the  field 
have  found  few  established  mechanisms  for  carry- 


35 


V 


Jr\ 


Today  he  gets  well,  despite  "red  spots"  and  "choking."  This  combination — measles  followed  by  pneumonia — 
was  certain  death  before  local  nurses,  trained  under  the  United  States-Iranian  health  program,  set  up  village 
health  clinics  and  made  penicillin  available.  Nurse,  on  left,  and  mother  watch  a  life  saved  through  shared 
knowledge. 


ing  out  the  normal  functions  of  government. 
Most  of  the  governments  in  the  area  are  in  tran- 
sition from  dependency  or  highly  centralized 
power  to  a  broader  base  where  responsibility  is 
delegated  to  elected  or  appointed  representatives. 
Good  intentions  alone  cannot  bring  a  public 
health  program  or  an  agricultural  extension  serv- 
ice into  being.  Planning  and  administering 
national  programs  require  management  ability 
and  empirical  knowledge  of  how  to  get  things  done. 
Our  representatives  are  advising  the  host 
governments  on  methods  of  organization,  and 
selection  and  training  of  their  people.  Practical 
application  of  that  advice  is  woven  into  the  work 
itself.  A  step  is  taken  toward  annual  budgeting 
when  the  program  and  project  agreements  commit 


each  government  to  provide  specified  sums  at 
specified  dates.  Provision  for  continuity  leads 
to  legislative  action.  In  Jordan,  for  instance, 
cooperative  service  agencies,  jointly  staffed  and 
administered  by  United  States  and  local  tech- 
nicians, are  set  up  as  bureaus  within  the  Ministries 
of  the  host  government.  In  other  countries, 
a  joint  fund  serves  not  only  as  a  financing  and 
management  function  but  also  as  a  means  to 
prepare  nationals  for  their  orderly  assumption 
of  complete  responsibility  when  American  assist- 
ance is  withdrawn. 

The  success  of  our  technical  cooperation  pro- 
grams must  ultimately  be  measured  against  the 
principle  of  continuity  and  the  preparation  of 
nationals  to  carry  on  the  programs. 


36 


CHAPTER  IV 


Far  East 


'  I  'HE  mutual  security  program  in  the  Far  East 
-*-  is  designed  to  help  the  nations  of  the  area 
develop  the  economic  and  military  strength  they 
need  to  achieve  and  maintain  political  and  social 
stability.  This  stability  is  essential  if  the  Asian 
governments  are  to  preserve  their  independence 
and  continue  to  work  toward  improving  the  living 
conditions  of  their  masses  of  people.  In  1953,  the 
Far  East  region  was  given  greater  emphasis  in  the 
mutual  security  program  in  terms  of  both  funds 
and  activities.  In  the  last  half  of  the  year,  for 
example,  an  expanded  program  of  economic  aid 
and  technical  cooperation  was  initiated  for  the 
rebuilding  of  Korea;  over  three-quarters  of  a 
billion  dollars  of  special  financial  assistance  was 
earmarked  to  strengthen  the  military  effort  in 
Indochina. 

The  nations  in  the  Far  East  area  which  par- 
ticipated in  the  mutual  security  program  during 
the  second  half  of  1953,  were:  the  three  Associated 
States  of  Indochina,  Burma1,  the  Republic  of 
China  on  Formosa,  Indonesia,  the  Republic  of 
Korea,  the  Philippines,  and  Thailand.  Negotia- 
tions for  a  Mutual  Defense  Assistance.  Agreement 
were  under  way  with  Japan.  Together,  these 
nations  comprise  the  front  line  of  free  world 
defense  against  Communist  aggression  in  the 
Far  East.  The  fall  of  any  one  would  menace  the 
security  of  all. 

The  amounts  and  types  of  aid  provided  vary 
greatly,  depending  upon  the  nature  and  extent  of 
the  problems  individual  countries  face.  To  in- 
crease their  armed  strength,  the  nations  of  the  Far 
East  require  certain  weapons  and  materiel  to 
equip  their  forces.  They  also  require  outside  help 
in  building  up  military  production  capacity  and 
in  constructing  and  modernizing   transportation 

1  Although  Burma  has  received  no  new  aid  funds  since 
June  30,  1953,  activities  already  in  process  are  being 
completed. 


facilities  and  other  installations  necessary  to 
military  operations. 

For  greater  economic  strength,  some  countries 
need  special  support  in  financing  then  defense 
efforts;  others  need  guidance  in  improving  mone- 
tary and  fiscal  management  policies.  All  must 
expand  total  and  per  capita  industrial  and  agri- 
cultural production.  For  such  expansion,  tech- 
nical cooperation  is  urgently  needed  to  introduce 
modern  technology,  to  train  technical  and  gov- 
ernmental administrative  personnel,  to  improve 
the  utilization  of  power,  and  to  help  design  broad 
policies  favorable  to  increased  economic  activity. 

By  meshing  United  States  efforts  with  the 
efforts  of  the  individual  countries,  the  mutual 
security  program  has  helped  strengthen  the  mili- 
tary defenses  of  the  Far  East  against  armed  ag- 
gression; equally  significant,  it  has  made  impor- 
tant contributions  to  the  building  of  sound  eco- 
nomic and  social  structures.  Our  technical  and 
economic  programs  in  the  area  have  been  designed 
not  only  to  strengthen  weak  spots,  but  to  help 
lay  firm  foundations  for  further  economic  and  so- 
cial advancement.  Some  countries  are  moving 
forward  more  rapidly  than  others,  but  most  have 
made  a  good  start  toward  identifying  the  prob- 
lems obstructing  development,  toward  remedying 
their  more  critical  structural  weaknesses,  and 
toward  formulating  programs  for  further  positive 
action.  In  the  main,  our  assistance  has  served  as 
a  catalyst,  helping  the  countries  to  solve  their 
multiple  problems  through  more  effective  use  of 
their  own  resources. 

The  building  of  internal  strength  in  each  coun- 
try, however,  is  only  an  intermediate  step.  To 
achieve  mutual  security,  it  is  necessary  to  obtain 
a  greater  degree  of  regional  cooperation  among  the 
free  Asian  nations  as  a  whole.  Thus  far,  pressing 
domestic  problems,  general  inexperience  with  eco- 
nomic planning,  and  unstable  intra-area  economic 


37 


relationships  have  combined  to  retard  a  coordi- 
nated regional  effort.  Id  fact,  growing  competition 
for  markets  for  the  same  products,  such  as  rice, 
rubber  and  tin,  has  recently  become  a  compli- 
cating, divisive  force.  The  decline  during  the  past 
year  in  world  market  prices  of  these  basic  com- 
modities has  reduced  the  foreign  exchange  earnings 
of  some  of  the  Southeast  Asian  nations — notably 
Indonesia,  Malaya,  Burma,  and  Thailand — and 
made  increasingly  difficult  the  mobilization  of 
additional  resources  for  further  economic  develop- 
ment or  for  adequate  employment  of  their  expand- 
ing populations. 


Prices  Of  Key  Exports  Of  Far  East  Countries 
Have  Dropped  Sharply 


(Index,  Jan.  1950  =  100) 


Japan,  on  the  other  hand,  a  large  importer  of 
rice  and  raw  materials,  has  been  running  a  huge 
commercial  trade  deficit.  In  recent  -  years,  this 
deficit  has  been  largely  covered  by  extraordinary 
United  States  military  expenditures  in  the  country. 
The  temporary  nature  of  these  expenditures,  how- 
ever, dictates  the  urgent  need  for  Japan  to  expand 
its  exports  of  manufactured  goods.  By  mutually 
beneficial  regional  arrangements  and  by  increasing 
trade  both  among  themselves  and  with  the  rest  of 
the  free  world,  the  countries  of  the  Far  East  area 
could  greatly  contribute  to  one  another's  develop- 
ment. 

The  disruptive  economic  effects  of  the  continued 
dependence  of  the  Asian  nations  on  agriculture 


and  the  export  of  raw  materials  is  creating  another 
dilemma  for  the  area.  In  many  cases  diversifica- 
tion, with  more  emphasis  on  industrial  develop- 
ment, is  essential  to  a  satisfactorily  balanced 
economy,  to  efficient  use  of  resources,  and  to  the 
maintenance  of  satisfactory  levels  of  employment. 
The  forward  progress  of  currently  underdevel- 
oped areas  is  not  merely  an  end  to  be  sought  for  its 
own  sake,  but  is  a  necessary  means  to  the  achieve- 
ment of  economic  stability  throughout  the  free 
world.  To  bring  the  nations  of  Asia  into  closer 
partnership  requires  continued  effort  by  both  the 
Far  East  nations  and  the  United  States  to  develop 
long-term  national  and  regional  strength  in  the 
Far  East  area. 

Security  Buildup 

While  the  recent  cease-fire  agreement  stopped 
the  fighting  in  Korea,  the  Communist-backed  Viet 
Minh  warfare  in  the  Indochina  region  continues 
to  threaten  the  security  of  the  Far  East.  At  the 
end  of  1953,  a  rebel  Viet  Minh  drive  was  launched 
in  central  Laos.  The  stability  of  the  Southeast 
Asian  region  was  further  threatened  by  increased 
signs  of  intensified  Communist  agitation  in  north- 
east Thailand  and  in  Indonesia. 

Unaided,  the  free  countries  of  Asia  cannot  estab- 
list  or  maintain  the  military  forces  and  the  ex- 
pensive weapons  of  modern  war  that  they  must 
have  for  their  own  defense.  Their  resources  must 
be  supplemented  if  the  military  buildup  necessary 
to  ward  off  the  aggressive  threats  of  Communism 
is  to  be  attained. 

In  the  last  sLx  months  of  1953,  the  United  States 
military  programs  in  the  Far  East  have  resulted 
in  the  shipment  of  weapons  and  equipment  valued 
at  $205  million  to  the  Associated  States  of  Indo- 
china, the  Republic  of  China  on  Formosa,  the 
Philippines,  and  Thailand.  From  the  beginning 
of  the  military  assistance  programs  in  1949  to  the 
end  of  December  1953,  a  total  of  $2,393  million 
worth  of  materiel  had  been  programed,  of  which 
$1,179  million  worth  had  been  shipped  to  the 
Far  East. 

In  addition  to  these  end-item  shipments,  de- 
liveries to  Indochina  and  Formosa  of  "common-use 
items" — that  is,  items  such  as  petroleum,  textiles, 
construction  materials,  and  hospital  equipment 
which  can  be  used  for  both  military  and  civilian 
purposes — have  been  accelerated.  For  both  coun- 
tries also,  there  has  been  an  increase  in  military 
appropriations  for  the  fiscal  year  1954. 


38 


Military  Aid  Shipments  To  The  Far  East 
Have  Increased  Rapidly 


800 


600 


400 


(Millions  of  Dollars) 

Value  of  Military  Shipments  ' 

%$&&$$&, 

ill! 

1 

1950  1951 

1  Includes  value  of  excess  stocks 


1952 


1953 


Indochina:   French — Viet-Nam 
Effort   Reinforced 

December  of  1953  marked  the  beginning  of  the 
eighth  year  of  Communist-led  Viet  Minh  aggres- 
sion against  the  State  of  Viet-Nam.  In  the  same 
month,  the  rebel  Viet  Minh  made  a  thrust  into 
the  neighboring  state  of  Laos,  moving  across  the 
waist  of  Laos  to  the  Mekong  River.  This  attack 
on  Laos  gave  further  proof  that  Viet  Minh  activi- 
ties are  motivated  by  a  chive  for  expanded  Com- 
munist power  outside  Viet-Nam. 

For  the  past  seven  years,  the  military  contest 
in  Indochina  has  been  virtually  stalemated.  Con- 
trol over  the  battle  areas  has  seesawed  back  and 
forth,  and  net  gains  or  losses  in  territory  have 
been  small.  The  protracted  military  operations, 
however,  have  put  a  continuous  and  serious  strain 
on  France's  financial  and  military  resources, 
draining  off  the  equivalent  of  about  $1  billion  a 
year  and  thousands  of  French  officers  and  men. 
The  fighting  has  also  strained  the  already  hard- 
pressed  economies  of  the  three  States  of  Viet- 
Nam,  Laos,  and  Cambodia  and  brought  acute 
privation  and  hardship  to  thousands  of  war 
refugees.  The  rate  of  losses  incurred  by  the 
French  Union  forces  and  the  national  armies  of 
the  Associated  States  have  been  comparable  to 
United  States  losses  in  Korea. 

The  military  assistance  we  provide  to  support 


the  efforts  of  the  French  Union  and  Associated 
States  forces  in  Indochina  receives  the  highest 
priority.  The  monthly  rate  of  military  shipments 
in  1953  was  50  percent  higher  than  in  1952.  By 
the  end  of  1953,  almost  400  ships  bearing  arms  for 
Indochina  had  arrived  in  Viet-Nam  ports  and  had 
delivered  to  the  French  and  Associated  States 
forces  significant  quantities  of  mihtary  supplies, 
including  small-arms  ammunition;  transport  ve- 
hicles and  trailers;  combat  vehicles;  military  air- 
craft; naval  vessels  and  small  craft;  radio  sets; 
and  a  wide  range  of  other  essential  materiel. 
These  supplies  were  vital  to  the  efforts  of  French 
Union  and  national  forces.  Without  the  military 
aid  furnished  through  the  mutual  security  pro- 
gram, the  hope  of  Indochina's  people  for  freedom 
could  be  quickly  smothered  under  Communist 
domination. 

During  the  latter  half  of  1953,  France  intensi- 
fied her  efforts  in  Indochina.  General  Henri 
Navarre,  who  took  command  of  the  campaign  in 
late  spring,  formulated  a  comprehensive  plan  to 
retake  the  offensive  in  the  Indochina  area  by 
building  up  native  units  into  mobde,  hard-hitting 
combat  forces.  The  Navarre  Plan  was  accepted 
by  the  French  Government,  and  in  September, 
French  Union  forces  in  Indochina  were  strength- 
ened by  9  infantry  battalions,  including  the  French 
battalion  from  Korea,  as  well  as  by  additional 
naval  and  ah  forces. 

Concurrently  with  the  intensified  French  effort, 
steps  were  taken  to  build  up  the  national  armies 
of  the  Associated  States.  The  Joint  French- 
Viet-Nam  High  Military  Committee  has  decided 
to  create  additional  "Kinh  Quan"  (light)  battal- 
ions and  heavy  companies,  all  manned  and  staffed 
by  Viet-Namese.  The  new  "Kinh  Quan"  bat- 
talions are  expected  to  match  the  Viet  Minh 
guerrillas'  own  tactics,  to  safeguard  newly  liber- 
ated areas,  and  to  increase  the  total  number  of 
effectives  in  the  field. 

To  support  this  augmented  effort,  the  United 
States  in  September  1953  approved  up  to  $385 
million  in  addition  to  the  $400  million  of  financial 
aid  initially  made  available  for  fiscal  year  1954. 
These  amounts  were  exclusive  of  the  cost  of 
military  materiel  and  direct  economic  aid  to  the 
Associated  States.  The  increased  buildup  of 
French  Union  and  Associated  States'  forces,  to- 
gether with  the  financial  aid  and  military  equip- 
ment supplied  by  the  United  States,  should  permit 
an  intensified  effort  in  Indochina  without  entading 
any  basic  alterations  of  the  French  Government's 


39 


A  new  commando-type  light  battalion  of  the  Viet-Namese  national  army.     These  units,  strengthened  with 
United  States  equipment,  are  especially  trained  to  combat  the  Communist  guerrillas. 


military    commitments    to    the    North    Atlantic 
Treaty  Organization. 

Formosa's  Military  Capabilities 
Strengthened 

United  States  support  to  the  Government  of  the 
Republic  of  China  on  Formosa  is  helping  to  rein- 
force the  military  capabilities  of  that  Government. 
Our  Military  Assistance  Advisory  Group  is  aiding 
the  Chinese  military  establishment  in  the  organiza- 
tion and  training  of  its  armed  forces  and  in  the 
utilization  of  the  military  weapons  and  equipment 
provided  under  the  mutual  security  program. 

During  the  latter  half  of  1953,  particular  empha- 
sis was  placed  on  the  delivery  of  jet  planes  for  use 
of  the  Chinese  air  forces.  Four  major  airfields 
have  been  rehabilitated  and  expanded  to  accom- 
modate the  modern  aircraft  which  are  being  in- 
corporated into  the  Chinese  military  buildup. 

In  addition  to  military  end-item  aid,  the  United 
States  has  provided  defense-supporting  economic 
assistance.  Funds  have  also  been  provided  to 
finance  the  import  of  "common-use"  items  which 
are  delivered  to  the  military,  such  as  soybeans  for 
rations,    raw    cotton    for    uniforms,    petroleum 


products,  medical  supplies,  and  construction 
materials.  These  "common-use"  items  have 
helped  to  build  the  Chinese  soldier,  once  poorly 
clothed  and  undernourished,  into  a  stronger, 
better-fed,  better-housed  fighting  man. 

A  barracks  construction  program,  carried  out 
with  United  States  assistance,  has  provided  proper 
quarters  for  thousands  of  troops  who  were  formerly 
housed  in  civilian  homes,  warehouses,  schools,  and 
office  buildings.  The  program  to  rehabilitate  and 
expand  transportation  facilities  is  not  only  pro- 
moting the  economic  progress  of  Formosa  but  is 
also  assisting  in  meeting  military  needs.  For 
example,  the  Island's  principal  north-south  high- 
way is  being  hard-surfaced  to  provide  better 
mobility  of  troops  and  supplies. 

Domestic  output  of  ammunition  for  small  arms 
is  being  increased  by  providing  existing  munition 
plants  with  modern  equipment  and  technical 
guidance.  The  improved  efficiency  of  the  local 
munitions  industry  has  led  to  awards  of  offshore 
procurement  contracts  totaling  nearly  $6  million. 
Proceeds  from  these  contracts  are  being  used  to 
finance  additional  supplies  of  raw  materials  needed 
for  further  production. 


40 


U  ^sks," 


*     ^ 


fC-  -}"'-*-: 


-*■*;;  . .  £» 


Chinese  air  force  mechanics  overhauling  a  Continental  aircraft  engine  at  the  Cadet  Flying  School  in  For- 
mosa.    A  United  States  Military  Advisory  Group  is  helping  to  train  the  armed  forces  of  the  Republic  of  China. 


The  security  buildup  is  also  proceeding  in  other 
friendly  countries  of  the  Far  East.  The  Philip- 
pines, assisted  under  the  mutual  security  program, 
has  been  enabled  to  maintain  a  battalion  combat 
team  in  Korea  and  to  strengthen  further  its  security 
forces  in  the  home  islands.  Military  grant  assist- 
ance is  also  helping  to  modernize  the  armed  forces 
of  Thailand,  which  shares  its  long  border  with  the 
Associated  States  of  Indochina.  Under  the  mutual 
security  program,  the  Thai  Government  is  being 
aided  in  the  modernization  and  equipment  of  its 
ground  forces  and  the  strengthening  of  its  small, 
but  efficient,  air  force.  In  1953,  Thailand  devoted 
36  percent  of  its  total  national  budget  expenditure 
to  improving  the  combat  efficiency  of  its  armed 
services. 


Counterpart  Funds 

Through  December  31,  1953,  the  foregoing  four 
countries  deposited  the  equivalent  of  $282  million 
in  their  local  currency  counterpart  special  ac- 
counts. Of  this  total,  the  equivalent  of  about  $8 
million  was  transferred  to  the  account  of  the 
United  States  to  meet  certain  overseas  costs  in- 
curred in  administering  the  aid  program. 

Withdrawals  from  the  countries'  share  of  these 
counterpart  funds  accounts  are  made  for  purposes 
mutually  agreed  upon  by  the  United  States  and 
the  depositing  country.  By  the  end  of  December 
1953,  the  FOA  had  approved  for  withdrawal 
almost  80  percent  of  the  $274  million  of  counter- 
part funds  available  for  country  use.  Actual 
withdrawals  from  the  accounts  totaled  the  equiva- 
lent of  $210  million. 


41 


In  Formosa,  FOA  had  approved  the  withdrawal 
of  the  equivalent  of  $154  million  through  Decem- 
ber 31,  1953.  About  45  percent  of  the  total 
approvals  was  earmarked  for  military  purposes. 
Approvals  for  nonmilitary  uses  included:  $23  mil- 
lion for  operations  of  the  Joint  Commission  on 
Rural  Reconstruction,  $19  million  for  agricultural 
development,  $10  million  for  power  facilities,  $8 
million  for  highways,  and  $6  million  for  develop- 
ment of  manufacturing  and  mining. 

Counterpart  releases  in  the  Associated  States  of 
Indochina  totaled  the  equivalent  of  $29  million 
through  December  31,  1953.  Over  40  percent  of 
this  amount  was  used  for  public  administration 
and  highway  construction  and  development. 
Projects  to  improve  the  highway  system,  which 
called  for  some  $7  million  in  local  currency,  were 
of  particular  importance  to  the  conduct  of  mili- 
tary operations.  Counterpart  funds  were  also  re- 
leased for  agricultural  development,  public  health 
services,  and  low-cost  housing. 

Philippine  counterpart  funds  amounting  to  $12 
million,  or  41  percent  of  the  $30  million  approved 
for  release,  have  been  channeled  into  agricultural 
development  projects.  Other  important  projects 
for  which  counterpart  funds  were  used  included 
industrial  development,  highway  construction, 
improvement  of  government  services,  low-cost 
housing,  and  the  development  of  public  health 
services. 

In  Thailand,  counterpart  funds  have  been  used 
mainly  for  agricultural  development  and  public 
health  programs.  Counterpart  funds  released  for 
these  two  categories  amounted  to  the  equivalent  of 
$4  million  out  of  the  total  of  $7  million  approved 
for  country  use  by  the  end  of  December  1953. 
Other  significant  approvals  for  withdrawal  were 
for  the  development  of  mining  and  for  the  im- 
provement of  educational  facilities. 

Special  Aid  to  Korea 

Three  years  of  bitter  warfare  have  inflicted 
enormous  damage  on  the  Korean  economy  and 
brought  intense  suffering  to  the  Korean  people. 
Some  1  million  South  Koreans  have  been  killed. 
Five  million  people  depend  on  some  measure  of 
relief  to  stay  alive;  over  2%  million  have  been 
made   homeless. 

Immediately  after  the  suspension  of  hostilities 
in  mid-1953,  the  United  States  took  the  lead  in 
assisting  the  valiant  Korean  people  to  rebuild 
their  devastated  country.     On  July  27,  the  Presi- 


dent asked  Congress  for  $200  million  for  interim 
emergency  aid  to  be  used  for  the  rehabilitation 
and  economic  support  of  the  Republic  of  Korea. 
On  August  7,  the  Congress  approved  the  transfer 
of  this  amount  from  the  Department  of  Defense 
to  the  Foreign  Operations  Administration.  Four 
days  later,  rice,  barley,  and  cotton  left  the  ports 
of  Houston  and  San  Francisco,  bound  for  Pusan 
Harbor.  In  the  next  15  days,  5  more  ships  left 
with  aid  supplies.  By  the  end  of  the  year,  sub- 
stantial amounts  of  United  States-financed  food 
supplies,  cotton,  rubber,  and  fertilizer  had  arrived 
to  aid  the  Korean  people  in  their  reconstruction 
efforts.  Through  December  31,  1953,  about  $50 
million  had  been  allotted  from  the  $200  million 
authorization. 

Economic  Aid  Has  a 
Twofold  Objective 

The  basic  objective  of  an  economic  program  for 
South  Korea  is  to  develop  an  economy  which  can 
meet  the  needs  of  the  Korean  people  and,  at  the 
same  time,  support  the  military  forces  required  to 
deter  external  armed  aggression. 

The  Korean  Government  faces  a  number  of 
immediate  and  multi-faceted  problems.  Urgent 
relief  measures  must  be  carried  out.  Inflationary 
pressures  must  be  curbed.  A  greater  measure  of 
governmental  financial  stability  has  to  be  achieved. 
To  strengthen  the  economy,  there  is  a  growing 
need  for  more  of  almost  everything — food,  coal, 
fertilizers,  textiles,  power,  transportation  and  com- 
munication facilities.  Skilled  manpower,  trained 
technicians  and  managerial  personnel  are  in  short 
supply  in  almost  all  fields  of  endeavor. 

Over  $400  million  has  been  programed  for  fiscal 
year  1954  to  be  used  for  economic  support  to 
Korea.  These  programs  are  being  administered 
by  the  Foreign  Operations  Administration,  the 
Department  of  Defense,  and  the  United  Nations 
Korean  Reconstruction  Agency.  Since  the  eco- 
nomic aid  program  represents  a  joint  undertaking 
on  the  part  of  the  Government  of  Korea,  the 
United  States,  and  the  United  Nations,  the  Presi- 
dent on  August  18,  1953,  appointed  Mr.  C.  Tyler 
Wood  to  serve  on  the  staff  of  the  United  Nations 
Command  as  Economic  Coordinator  to  coordinate 
the  various  programs  in  order  to  avoid  duplication 
of  effort.  Mr.  Wood  also  was  given  the  task  of 
working  out  the  necessary  arrangements  with  rep- 
resentatives of  the  Korean  Government  by  which 
the  economic  program  could  move  forward  most 
effectively. 


42 


On  December  14,  an  agreement  was  signed 
under  which  the  Combined  Economic  Board — a 
joint  agency  of  the  United  Nations  Command 
and  of  the  Eepublic  of  Korea — would  insure  that 
the  funds  programed  for  economic  assistance 
will  be  used  to  produce  the  greatest  possible  bene- 
fits for  the  Korean  people. 

The  signing  of  the  agreement  and  the  establish- 
ment of  coordination  procedures  will  permit  the 
current  assistance  effort  to  move  ahead  on  a 
greatly  expanded  scale.  Much  progress  has  al- 
ready been  made.  For  example,  in  the  first  10 
months  of  1953,  electric  power  production  was  21 
percent  above  the  corresponding  period  of  1952. 
Cotton  cloth  production  was  up  84  percent,  and 
coal  production  was  up  64  percent.  Rice  output 
in  1953  was  7  percent  over  the  previous  year. 

The  programs  of  the  United  Nations  Korean 
Reconstruction  Agency  (UNKRA),  and  the  De- 
partment of  the  Army  have  been  responsible  for 
a  large  part  of  this  progress. 

In  1953,  UNKRA  delivered  $30  million  worth 
of  supplies  and  equipment  to  Korea.  The  bulk 
of  the  deliveries — about  $22  million  worth- — con- 
sisted of  .agricultural  items  such  as  grain,  fertilizer, 
irrigation  equipment,  farm  implements,  and  live- 
stock. School  books  and  school  equipment  were 
also  provided,  as  well  as  transportation  vehicles, 
a  harbor  dredge,  and  hospital  supplies.  The 
Department  of  the  Army  has  provided  subsistence 
for  2  million  persons,  and  partial  relief  for  an 
additional  million.  It  has  helped  to  keep  in 
operation  vital  highways  and  railways.  The 
Army-operated  health  programs  have  been  largely 
responsible  for  the  pronounced  reduction  in  epi- 
demic deaths;  for  example,  deaths  due  to  typhoid 
were  reduced  from  2,500  in  1951  to  30,  in  1953. 

Negotiations  With  Japan 

The  proposed  inclusion  of  Japan  in  the  mutual 
security  program  resulted  in  the  initiation  of 
negotiations  in  July  1953  for  a  Mutual  Defense 
Assistance  Agreement  between  the  United  States 
and  the  Japanese  Governments.  These  negotia- 
tions have  been  proceeding  satisfactorily  and  are 
nearing  conclusion. 

During  October  1953,  a  series  of  conferences 
was  held  in  Washington  which  covered  a  variety 
of  problems  of  common  concern,  such  as  the  appli- 
cation of  the  mutual  security  program  to  Japan, 
Japan's  defense  program,  and  its  general  economic 
situation.     These  conferences  laid  the  groundwork 


for    continued    cooperation    between    the    two 
Governments. 

Although  Japan  experienced  a  consumption 
boom  in  1953,  it  currently  faces  extremely  serious 
economic  problems.  The  lagging  export  trade 
and  increasing  requirements  for  imports  have 
progressively  widened  the  trade  gap  over  the  past 
3  years.  In  1950,  Japan's  merchandise  trade 
was  out  of  balance  by  about  $150  million.  The 
gap  between  imports  and  exports  increased  more 
than  threefold  dining  the  following  year,  and  in 

1952,  it  exceeded  $750  million.     Although  final 
trade  data  are  not  yet  available  for  all  of  the  year 

1953,  the  imbalance  in  Japan's  merchandise,  or 


Special  U.  S.  Dollar  Expenditures  In  Japan  Have 
Largely  Offset  The  Country's  Trade  Deficit 


1,200 


300 


(Millions  of  Dollars) 


1950 


1951 


1952 


1953 


visible,  trade  will  be  about  $1.1  billion — ro uglily 
half  the  value  of  Japan's  total  imports.  Taking 
into  account  a  probable  net  surplus  of  about  $150 
million  from  invisible-type  earnings,  the  country's 
total  deficit  on  both  merchandise  trade  and  invis- 
ible earnings  for  1953  will  still  be  about  $975  million. 
During  the  last  3  years,  Japan's  trade  imbalance 
has  been  largely  offset  by  special  expenditures  of 
the  United  States  related  to  the  Korean  war  and 
the  maintenance  of  our  military  forces  in  Japan 
under  the  terms  of  our  Security  Treaty.  This 
situation,  of  course,  cannot  continue  indefinitely. 
United  States  special  expenditures  are  expected 
to    taper    off    in    1955,    and    Japan's    economic 


43 


position  increasingly  will  depend  upon  the  mainte- 
nance of  a  high  level  of  economic  activity  and  trade 
throughout  the  world,  and  an  improvement  of  the 
competitive  position  of  Japan's  manufactured 
goods.  The  Japanese  Government  is  now  plan- 
ning budgetary  and  other  steps  to  strengthen  the 
nation's  economy  and  defenses. 

Negotiations  with  the  Japanese  Government  are 
in  progress  for  the  sale  of  United  States  agricul- 
tural products  under  Section  550  of  the  Mutual 
Security  Act.  A  program  of  approximately  $50 
million  has  been  tentatively  agreed  upon.  Twenty 
percent  of  the  local  currency  proceeds  are  to  be 
used  to  help  develop  Japan's  economy;  the  balance 
will  be  used  to  purchase  military  items  under 
United  States  military  assistance  programs. 

Economic  Assistance  and 
Technical  Cooperation 

The  economic  assistance  and  technical  coopera- 
tion programs  in  the  Far  East,  jointly  developed 
and  financed  by  the  Foreign  Operations  Adminis- 
tration and  the  participating  countries,  constitute 
a  tangible  expression  of  the  United  States  policy  to 
advance  the  freedom  and  welfare  of  the  Asian 
peoples  so  that  they  can  become  effective  and  self- 
reliant  partners  in  the  free  world. 

United  States  technicians  are  working  with  the 
Far  Eastern  governments  and  people  to  make  bet- 
ter use  of  available  resources,  to  increase  produc- 
tion, and  to  improve  governmental  services  and 
administration.  Our  economic  assistance  and 
technical  cooperation  activities  in  the  Far  East 
produce  results  which  go  beyond  measurable  im- 
provements in  food  output,  health  conditions, 
power  production,  and  transportation  facilities. 
A  child  cured  of  yaws  or  malaria,  a  farmer  who  is 
given  the  means  to  save  and  expand  his  crop,  a 
factory  or  a  mine  laborer  who  benefits  from  better 
working  conditions,  a  small  businessman  who  gets 
needed  credit  support — these  are  the  kind  of  re- 
sults which  cannot  be  computed  in  cold  statistical 
terms,  but  which,  taken  together,  win  popular 
support  for  the  free  governments  of  Asia,  reduce 
the  disruptive  social  factors  which  breed  discon- 
tent, and  nullify  the  efforts  of  Communist  propa- 
ganda and  attempted  subversion. 

Economic  and  technical  development,  however, 
is.  neither  a  self-starting  process  nor  a  goal  quickly 
accomplished.  Our  programs  in  the  Far  East  are 
designed  to  provide  the  impetus  and  show  the 
way.     Where  financial  and  technical  support  is 


needed  and  requested,  we  are  prepared  to  give 
such  support  within  the  limit  of  our  capabilities. 
It  is  up  to  the  countries,  themselves,  to  push  for- 
ward with  all  strength  toward  the  desired  ends. 

A  total  of  $126  million  was  programed  during 
fiscal  year  1954  for  economic  aid  and  technical 
cooperation  programs  in  the  countries  of  the  Far 
East,  exclusive  of  Korea.  Almost  one-half  of  these 
funds  have  been  earmarked  to  finance  shipments 
of  essential  commodities  to  the  Associated  States  of 
Indochina  and  the  Republic  of  China  on  Formosa. 
These  commodities  consisted  mainly  of  food,  con- 
struction materials,  machinery,  and  other  con- 
sumer-type goods  required  to  meet  the  needs  of  the 
civilian  economy,  help  control  inflationary  pres- 
sures, and  rehabilitate  war  refugees. 

The  remainder  of  the  funds  were  channeled  into 
economic  and  technical  programs  which  empha- 
sized agriculture,  manufacturing  and  mining,  and 
transportation  and  power.  These  fields  of  activ- 
ity accounted  for  38  percent  of  the  funds  pro- 
gramed for  the  fiscal  year.  The  remainder  was 
used  for  projects  in  public  health,  public  adminis- 
tration, education,  and  engineering  advisory 
services.  The  cumulative  total  programed  for 
Far  East  countries  from  July  5,  1950,  through 
June  30,  1954,  amounted  to  $770  million. 

At  the  end  of  1953,  there  were  300  American 
technicians  working  in  the  Far  East  countries 
which  participated  in  the  mutual  security  pro- 
gram. In  addition,  about  430  national  trainees 
were  taking  part  in  specialized  training  programs 
in  both  the  United  States  and  abroad. 

Some  Examples  of  Progress 
in  a  Few  Short  Years 

The  measure  of  the  overall  success  of  our  opera- 
tions in  the  Far  East  is  evident  in  the  number  of 
noteworthy  gains  made  in  the  few  short  years 
since  a  program  was  begun. 

Agricultural  Improvement. — In  the  Philip- 
pines, United  States  technical  experts,  and  sup- 
plies of  fertilizer  and  seeds,  have  helped  the  Fili- 
pino farmer  greatly  to  expand  his  output  of  rice. 
Over  50,000  tons  of  fertilizers  were  sold  to  more 
than  220,000  farmers  and  used  to  fertilize  900,000 
acres  of  farmland.  Irrigation  pump  units,  pro- 
viding water  to  22,500  acres  have  been  installed. 
One  gravity  system,  irrigating  7,500  acres  has  been 
completed,  and  at  present  3  gravity  systems,  for 
which  dollar  requirements  were  financed  by  the 
Foreign  Operations  Administration,  are  being  con- 
structed to  irrigate  over  100,000  acres. 


44 


The  1953-54  rice  crop  is  estimated  at  3.2  mil- 
lion tons,  23  percent  more  than  the  1950-51  crop 
and  about  50  percent  higher  than  prewar  harvests. 
This  yield  marks  the  attainment  of  virtual  self- 
sufficiency  in  rice  output  for  the  country. 

Also  in  the  Philippines,  a  management  contract 
to  analyze  and  reorganize  the  vital  land  registra- 
tion and  title  service  of  the  Bureau  of  Lands,  elim- 
inate the  backlog  of  title  applications,  and  install 
modern  methods  is  being  carried  out  by  an  Ameri- 
can management  consultant  firm. 

Thailand  depends  on  rice  exports  for  the  greater 
part  of  its  foreign  exchange  earnings.  Over  the 
past  2  years,  demonstrations  on  more  than  1,000 
one-half-acre  plots  have  shown  the  Thai  farmers 
that  rice  yields  can  be  doubled  and  tripled  on  cer- 
tain types  of  soil  by  proper  application  of  fertilizer. 
The  technical  cooperation  programs  in  that  coun- 
try have  been  instrumental  in  boosting  rice  output 
considerably.  The  1953-54  rice  crop  is  estimated 
at  75  percent  above  prewar. 

To  help  the  Thai  Government  in  its  efforts  to 
export  its  rice  surpluses,  work  of  United  States 
technicians  is  being  directed  toward  the  improve- 
ment of  the  country's  marketing  and  distribution 
facilities  and  efficiency.  These  efforts  are  aimed 
at  reducing  costs  so  that  Thailand  will  be  in  a 
better  competitive  position  to  meet  the  price 
requirements  of  the  area. 

Transportation  and  Power. — The  economic 
progress  of  the  Far  East  countries  is  retarded  by 
poor  transportation  facilities  and  inadequate 
power  output.  Improvement  of  these  basic 
sectors  of  the  economy  is  essential  to  development 
of  both  the  agricultural  and  industrial  bases  of 
the  area. 

Our  assistance  efforts  in  the  fields  of  transporta- 
tion and  power  have  been  particularly  effective 
in  the  case  of  Formosa.  United  States  technical 
advice  and  raw  materials  helped  the  Chinese  to 
complete  the  longest  steel-span  highway  bridge 
in  the  Far  East,  at  Silo.  The  6,500-foot  Silo 
Bridge,  links  the  main  north-south  highway  along 
Formosa's  west  coast  and  permits  through  traffic 
on  the  highway  even  during  the  annual  5-month 
rainy  season.  The  major  port  at  Kaohsiung, 
on  the  Island's  southwest  coast,  has  also  beea 
improved  so  that  the  unloading  and  "turn-around" 
time  of  ships  has  been  considerably  shortened. 
These  accomplishments  are  not  only  necessary  to 
the  progress  of  the  civilian  economy,  but  are  also 
important  to  the  buildup  of  military  strength. 


Industrial  Production  In  Formosa  Has 
Expanded  Considerably 


150 


50 


(Index,  1949=100) 

Total  Production  of  all  Industries 


1937 


Increases  in  Key  Sectors 
1949  to  1953 

~  Transportation   ...     up  30% 

Power      up  75% 

Fertilizer up  300% 

Textiles up  475% 

_l I I  I  I  i 

'47      '48      '49      '50      '51      '52 


53 

( Est) 


Mutual  security  programs  have  also  helped  the 
Chinese  Government  considerably  to  expand  the 
Island's  power  facilities.  Power  output  has  risen 
over  75  percent  from.  1949  to  1953.  This  added 
power  has  made  possible  the  increase  in  Formosa's 
fertilizer  and  textile  production  and  has  enabled 
the  expansion  of  military  and  defense-supporting 
industries. 

In  Thailand,  800  miles  of  highway  have  been 
improved  for  all-weather  use.  Nearly  100  Thais 
have  been  trained  in  highway  maintenance  at  the 
Heavy  Equipment  and  Operations  Maintenance 
School  in  Bangkok.  With  a  dredge  furnished 
under  the  mutual  security  program,  the  Thai 
Government  is  dredging  a  ship  channel  at  Bang- 
kok; the  project  is  scheduled  for  completion  in  the 
early  part  of  1954.  Our  aid  programs  in  Thailand 
have  also  helped  step  up  the  country's  power  out- 
put. Electric  power  production  in  Bangkok  for  the 
first  half  of  1953  was  recently  reported  at  over 
34  percent  above  1951. 

These  improvements  have  encouraged  the  Thai 
government  to  procure  substantial  amounts  of 
modern  equipment  with  its  own  funds  to  carry 
forward  additional  rehabilitation  and  expansion 
projects  in  the  fields  of  transportation  and  power. 

Better  Health  and  Sanitation. — A  great  need 
exists  for  expanding  and  improving  medical  edu- 
cation programs  in  all  Far  East  countries  to  in- 


45 


crease  the  number  of  competent  physicians  and 
trained  health  workers.  In  Indonesia,  the  present 
ratio  of  doctors  to  population  served — about 
1  per  70,000 — is  one  of  the  lowest  in  the  world. 
The  Foreign  Operations  Administration  has  en- 
tered into  contractual  arrangements  with  American 
medical  schools  to  provide  for  exchange  of  medical 
school  professors  and  training  of  local  doctors  and 


teachers  in  the  United  States.  At  present  such 
an  arrangement  is  in  effect  in  Thailand  and  is 
pending  for  Indonesia  and  Formosa. 

Rural  health  units  of  various  types  have  been 
established  to  demonstrate  both  preventive  and 
curative  health  services,  and  public  health  doctors, 
nurses,  and  sanitarians  are  giving  special  in-service 
training.     In    Indochina,    United    States    public 


Viel-Namese  children  now  enjoy  clean  water  from  village  pump  near  Saigon.  United  States  technicians 
and  supplies  have  helped,  build  thousands  of  village  pumps  and  wells  like  this  in  the  underdeveloped  areas. 
Simple  and  inexpensive,  these  pumps  not  only  improve  living  conditions  but  prevent  diseases  spread  by  polluted 
water. 


46 


health  technicians,  supported  by  aid  shipments  of 
medical  supplies  and  equipment,  have  helped  to 
set  up  more  than  1,700  rural  dispensaries  which 
now  give  first  aid  and  treatment  to  almost  3  million 
people  annually. 

In  rural  areas,  the  drilling  and  installation  of 
artesian  wells  and  construction  of  springs  and  other 
dug-wells  are  demonstrating  the  value  of  a  sanitary 
water  supply.  Over  800  sanitary  wells  for  villages 
have  been  completed  in  Indochina,  principally  in 
north  Viet-Nam. 

Mass  campaigns  against  malaria,  trachoma, 
yaws,  and  beri-beri  are  in  various  stages  of  devel- 
opment. A  6-year  program  for  the  con  trol  of  malaria 
is  under  way  in  the  Philippines,  where  economic  de- 
velopment has  been  retarded  because  of  the  high 
incidence  of  malaria.  More  than  a  million  persons 
have  so  far  been  protected  by  this  program,  and 
three-fourths  of  the  local  technical  personnel 
utilized  in  this  large-scale  program  have  received 
training.  The  6-year  program  provides  for  the 
extension  of  protective  measures  to  all  malarious 
areas  in  the  Phdippines,  and  it  is  anticipated  that 
upon  completion  the  Philippine  Government  will 
assume  total  financial  responsibility  for  continu- 
ing malaria-control  work. 

Effective  malaria-control  programs  also  are 
showing  results  in  Indonesia,  Formosa,  and 
Thailand.  It  has  been  estimated  that  the  1953 
program  in  Thailand  prevented  600,000  primary 
cases  of  malaria.  This  means  600,000  individuals 
who,  instead  of  being  dependent  or  ineffective, 
can  contribute  fully  to  the  support  and  develop- 
ment of  themselves  and  their  country. 

Public  Administration. — The  acute  shortage 
of  skilled  local  technicians  and  trained  officials  is 
a    powerful    inhibiting    factor    on    governmental 


efforts  to  meet  the  growing  demands  of  their 
people  for  better  living  standards.  The  lack  of 
competent  professionals  at  the  government  level 
is  felt  perhaps  most  strongly  in  the  field  of  public 
administration.  It  is  in  this  field  that  our  aid 
programs  can  make  a  valuable  contribution  with 
relatively  small  expenditures  of  funds. 

Our  efforts  to  build  effective  public  administra- 
tion systems  have  been  especially  emphasized  in 
the  Philippines.  United  States  experts  have 
worked  closely  with  Philippine  Government  plan- 
ning agencies  to  help  formulate  plans  and  policies 
for  the  broad  economic  development  of  the 
country.  Technical  advice  has  also  been  furnished 
to  the  Department  of  Finance  to  achieve  a  better 
tax  structure  and  to  improve  enforcement  pro- 
cedures. 

An  Institute  of  Public  Administration  was  estab- 
lished at  the  University  of  the  Philippines  with  the 
advice  and  assistance  of  the  University  of  Michi- 
gan. Over  700  government  officials  have  taken 
supervisor  courses  at  the  institute;  600  govern- 
ment employees  have  enrolled  in  specialized  in- 
service  training  courses.  The  Institute  is  ex- 
pected to  assume  importance  as  a  regional  training 
center  in  management  skills.  Negotiations  are 
under  way  with  another  United  States  university 
to  provide  assistance  in  connection  with  a  proposed 
Labor-Management  Relations  Center. 

An  American  management-consulting  firm  is 
presently  engaged  in  making  a  wage  and  position 
classification  survey  for  the  Philippine  Budget 
Commission  and  the  Bureau  of  Civil  Service. 
United  States  technicians  have  also  cooperated 
with  the  Philippine  Government  in  improving  its 
administration  of  the  minimum  wage  and  indus- 
trial relations  laws. 


47 


CHAPTER  V 


American  Republics 


Close  economic  and  military  cooperation  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  our  Latin  American 
neighbors  is  essential  to  Inter-American  well-being 
and  security.  Such  cooperation  is  mandatory  if 
there  is  to  be  a  solid  foundation  to  the  Inter- 
American  Treaty  of  Reciprocal  Assistance  which 
was  signed  by  the  United  States  and  the  Republics 
of  Latin  America  in  1947  at  Rio  de  Janeiro. 
Hemispheric  solidarity  in  the  conference  diplomacy 
of  the  United  Nations  also  is  dependent  upon 
mutual  understanding  and  joint  interests. 

Report  by  Dr.  Milton  Eisenhower 

Dr.  Milton  S.  Eisenhower,  in  reporting  to  the 
President  on  United  States-Latin  American  rela- 
tions, stressed  the  fact  that  this  country  and  our 
neighbors  to  the  South  share  common  aspirations 
and  common  goals.  "While  there  is  a  wide  gulf 
between  the  most  authoritarian  and  the  most 
democratic  of  the  regimes,"  Dr.  Eisenhower 
stated,  "*  *  *  virtually  all  the  nations  of  Latin 
America  seek  the  goals  of  permanent  peace,  inde- 
pendence, rising  levels  of  economic  well-being, 
and  the  attainment  of  the  basic  values  of  Western 
civilization. 

"In  our  conversations  we  developed  the  convic- 
tion that  common  dedication  to  the  achievement 
of  these  goals  is  the  greatest  single  guarantee  we 
have  that  the  nations  of  this  hemisphere  will 
continue  to  work  amicably  together.  This  co- 
operation can  be  made  more  effective  as  under- 
standing among  peoples  and  governments 
increases." 

Dr.  Eisenhower  and  his  group  spent  several 
months  in  studying  ways  to  strengthen  the  bonds 
between  the  United  States  and  the  American  Re- 
publics. These  studies  included  not  only  intensive 
discussions  with  government  and  private  leaders  in 
this  country,  but  also  a  20,000-mile,  fact-finding 
trip  to  the  cities  and  farms,  the  factories  and 
schools  of  the  South  American  countries. 


Dr.  Eisenhower's  report  made  several  observa- 
tions on  the  current  political  and  economic  situa- 
tion in  the  Latin  American  region.  On  the 
political  aspect,  he  noted:  "Highly  disciplined 
groups  of  communists  are  busy,  night  and  day, 
illegally  or  openly,  in  the  American  Republics, 
as  they  are  in  every  nation  of  the  world.  While 
many  persons  may  now  think  of  Latin  America 
as  not  being  in  the  line  of  attack  in  the  modern 
world  struggle,  success  by  the  communists  in  these 
nations  could  quickly  change  all  the  maps  which 
strategists  use  in  calculating  the  probabilities  of 
the  future. 

"One  American  nation  has  succumbed  to  com- 
munist infiltration.  With  this  exception,  however, 
the  other  American  Republics  share  our  desire 
for  peace,  freedom,  and  independence  and  continue 
to  cooperate  effectively  in  the  political  councils 
of  the  world." 

On  the  economic  picture,  the  report  emphasized 
the  interdependence  of  the  United  States  and 
Latin  America  with  respect  to  commodity  trade, 
investment  capital,  and  raw  materials. 

Latin  America's  Economic  Importance 

The  three-way  economic  interdependence  which 
Dr.  Eisenhower's  report  cited  is  basic  to  any 
consideration  of  United  States  policy  toward  the 
American  Republics.  This  country's  export  and 
import  trade  with  Latin  America  in  1952  amounted 
to  nearly  $7  billion.  In  the  first  9  months  of  1953, 
it  was  running  at  about  the  same  rate.  Latin 
America  is  second  only  to  Western  Europe  as  a 
market  for  United  States  exports,  and  supplies  a 
larger  part  of  our  imports  than  any  other  trade 
area. 

Our  direct  private  investment  in  the  Latin 
American  countries  at  the  end  of  1952  totaled 
almost  $6  billion,  or  about  39  percent  of  all  United 
States  direct  private  investment  in  foreign  coun- 
tries.    In   1952,   also,   our  income  receipts  from 


48 


Latin  Ai 
Materia 

Commodity 
Quebracho 

(  For  Tanning) 

Asbestos 
(  Crocidolite) 

Quartz 
Crystols 

Bauxite 

Antimony 

Beryl 

Sisal 

Cadmium 

Copper 

Fluorspar 

Manganese 

Vanadium 

Tin 

Tungsten 

1  Based  on  la 

nerica  Is  A  Key  Supplier  Of  Our  Strategic 
Is  Needs 

(Percent  of  U.S.  New  Supply  from  Lotirt  Americo)1 

J                        20                      40                       60                       80                       100 

1                           1                           1                           1                           i 

1 

III 

1 

1                           1                            1 

1 

1 

1                           1                            1 

I                           ,         ' 

1 

1 

! 

1 

~   ""■   r 

,.„■     \^ 

' 

1 

_J 

„,„;„„„ ! 

test  available  data 

this  private  investment  capital  was  about  $600 
million,  or  over  40  percent  of  such  receipts  from 
all  areas. 

Latin  America  ranks  high  on  the  list  of  major 
sources  for  basic  raw  materials.  The  area  is  our 
biggest  supplier  of  petroleum  imports — almost  300 
million  barrels  annually.  It  furnishes  important 
quantities  of  copper,  tin,  bauxite,  manganese,  and 
other  minerals  so  vital  to  our  civilian  and  defense 
production  and  to  our  strategic  stockpile. 

The  recent  economic  growth  of  the  American 
Republics  indicates  that  the  region  will  assume  an 
even  greater  importance  both  to  this  country  and 
to  the  free  world  as  a  whole.  Since  the  end  of  the 
war,  the  gross  national  product  of  20  Latin 
American  countries — that  is,  the  total  value  of  all 
goods  and  services  produced — has  increased  at  the 
rate  of  nearly  5  percent  a  year. 

Pressing  Problems  Retard 
Economic  Progress 

Latin  America's  rapid  economic  growth  has 
highlighted  some  of  the  basic  weaknesses  which 
exist  throughout  the  area.  These  weaknesses 
must  be  overcome  if  the  Latin  American  people 
are  to  move  ahead  to  greater  accomplishment. 

Lag  in  Food  Production. — Farm  output  has 
risen  only  slightly  and  has  not  kept  pace  with  the 


rapid  growth  of  population.  The  postwar  rate  of 
population  increase  has  been  about  2.5  percent  a 
year.  Agricultural  production  on  the  other  hand, 
increased  only  about  2  percent  in  the  entire  8-year 
period  1945-52.  As  a  result,  Latin  America's 
postwar  food  imports  have  been  double  their 
prewar  average. 

Non-Diversification. — Many  countries  look  to 
one  or  two  commodities  or  industries  for  a  sub- 
stantial portion  of  their  national  income  and  the 
bulk  of  their  foreign  exchange  earnings.  Bolivia, 
for  example,  is  almost  wholly  dependent  on  tin. 
Colombia  relies  on  coffee;  Chile,  on  copper;  Cuba, 
on  sugar;  Venezuela,  on  oil;  Costa  Rica,  on  coffee 
and  bananas.  A  crop  failure  or  an  upset  in  the 
world  market  can  seriously  damage  the  economies 
of  these  single-crop  or  single-industry  countries. 

Lack  of  Transportation. — Transportation  fa- 
cilities in  Latin  America  are  generally  inadequate. 
Better  roads,  highways,  railroads,  inland  water- 
ways, ports,  and  coastwise  shipping  facilities  are 
needed  to  make  possible  greater  economic  develop- 
ment in  the  area. 

Need  for  Power. — The  shortage  of  power  and 
fuel  is  another  roadblock  in  the  way  of  further 
economic  advancement.  Countries  short  of  capital 
find  it  difficult  to  keep  up  with  the  ever-growing 
demands  for  hydroelectric  and  other  power-gen- 


Many  Latin  American  Republics  Depend  Primarily 
On  One  Product  For  Foreign  Exchange 


Country 


(Exports  os  Percent  of  Total  Exports)' 


Venezuela 

Petroleum                                                     j 

El  Salvador 

Coffee 

%  88 

Cuba 

Sugar 

Ij  85 

Colombia 

Coffee 

H  82 

Guatemala 

i>  Coffee 

M$  82 

Brazil 

Coffee 

PHI 

74 

Haiti 

I?  Coffee 

m  66 

Honduras 

Bananas 

B  66 

Chile 

Copper 

3 63 

53 
59 

Bolivia 

Tin 

Costa  Rica 

f£.  Bananas 

Nicaragua 

H  Coffee 

1  %  5, 

Dominican 
Republic 

Sugar 

msi  50 

'  Based  on  latest  available  data 


49 


erating  facilities.    This  is  one  field  in  which  foreign 
capital  could  provide  invaluable  support. 

Better  Health  and  Education. — Improve- 
ment in  the  health  and  education  of  the  growing 
numbers  of  Latin  American  people  is,  of  course, 
basic  to  any  real  progress.  Widespread  disease 
and  mass  illiteracy  greatly  retard  efforts  to  develop 
greater  productive  capacity  and  move  on  to  higher 
living  standards. 


The  countries  of  Latin  America  generally  possess 
in  abundance  the  human  and  natural  resources 
they  need  for  further  economic  growth.  These 
resources,  coupled  with  proper  incentives,  stable 
political  and  economic  conditions,  and  necessary 
capital,  can  expand  development  and  raise  living 
standards  in  the  American  Republics  to  unprece- 
dented levels  in  the  years  ahead. 

Economic  and  Technical 
Programs 

The  primary  purpose  of  the  technical  coopera- 
tion program  in  Latin  America  is  to  help  the  par- 
ticipating countries  achieve  an  accelerated  and 
balanced  economic  development.  To  this  end, 
cooperative  efforts  are  concentrated  on  two  broad, 


Technical  Cooperation  In  Latin  America  Has 
Emphasized  Agriculture  And  Health  Projects 

Program  For  Fiscal  Year  1954 
By  Field  Of  Activity 


Transportation,  Power 
and  Communications 


$24  3  Million 


interrelated  objectives:  (1)  to  increase  the  produc- 
tivity per  worker  and  the  number  of  skilled 
workers  by  carefully  planned  programs  in  health, 
nutrition,  housing,  and  education;  and  (2)  to  in- 
crease total  production  by  selected  programs  in 
agriculture  and  industry,  public  administration, 
natural  resources,  power,  and  transportation. 

These  efforts  involve  helping  the  host  govern- 
ments to  correct  imbalances  in  the  national  econ- 
omies which  result  from  concentration  on  single 
industries  and  products  or  from  too  rapid  indus- 
trialization at  the  expense  of  needed  agricultural 
development.  Our  program,  in  Latin  America  has 
been  successful  in  some  instances  in  creating 
incentives  for  private  investment,  both  local  aad 
foreign.  Special  study  is  presently  being  given  to 
additional  measures  which  might  attract  the 
private  capital  needed  for  basic  development 
projects. 

An  important  factor  in  carrying  out  a  country 
plan  for  economic  development  is  to  have  at  hand 
a  sufficient  number  of  local  technicians  who  can 
perform  the  work  required.  Local  training  is  pro- 
vided to  Latin  American  nationals  through  semi- 
nars, adult-education  courses,  on-the-job  training, 
summer  schools,  normal-school  training  of  teach- 
ers, and  day-by-day  association  with  their  United 
States  colleagues.  In  the  last  1 1  years,  more  than 
20,000  Latin  Americans  have  been  trained  on  the 
job.  In  addition,  more  than  3,000  trainees  have 
been  brought  to  the  United  States  for  study. 

Competent  Latin  American  technicians  are  now 
becoming  increasingly  available  to  carry  programs 
through  successfully.  International  lending  agen- 
cies have  pointed  out  that  there  is  a  need  for  major 
improvements  in  the  management  of  develop- 
mental enterprises  and  that  the  amount  and  types 
of  loans  are  determined,  in  large  measure,  by  the 
degree  of  administrative  knowledge  demonstrated 
by  Latin  Americans. 

The  Cooperative  Approach 

The  principal  method  used  to  carry  forward 
programs  in  agriculture,  health,  and  education  is 
the  Servicio,  or  cooperative  service.  The  Servicio 
in  essence,  is  an  agency  set  up  by  a  Latin  American 
Government  to  carry  out  a  particular  program  of 
technical  cooperation  in  which  the  United  States 
participates  by  supplying  technicians  and  a  por- 
tion of  the  necessary  funds.  Operations  under 
the  Servicio  are  jointly  planned,  directed,  and  ad- 
ministered by  United  States  and  Latin  American 
personnel.     The  Servicio  device  is  used  with  ap- 


propriate  modifications  in  new  fields  which  the 
technical  cooperation  program  is  called  upon  to 
enter. 

As  the  Latin  American  people  have  seen  at  first 
hand  the  real  and  growing  benefits  of  the  technical 
cooperation  programs,  the  proportionate  contri- 
butions of  the  host  governments  have  increased. 
For  the  fiscal  year  1954,  the  host  governments  will 
make  available  the  equivalent  of  $44.6  million  as 
compared  with  the  United  States  programed  con- 
tribution of  $24.3  million.  Programs  for  use  of 
these  fimds  emphasized  projects  in  agriculture, 
forestry  and  fisheries,  as  well  as  public  health. 
These  broad  fields  of  activity  accounted  for  almost 
60  percent  of  the  funds  allotted  to  the  various 
Latin  American  countries  for  the  12  months  ended 
June  30, 1954.  Almost  25  percent  of  the  remaining 
funds  were  earmarked  for  training  and  education 
programs,  and  projects  in  industrial  and  natural 
resources  development.  The  cumulative  total 
programed  for  the  Latin  American  Republics  from 
June  30,  1950,  through  December  31,  1953 
amounted  to  about  $65  million. 

On  December  31,  1953,  there  was  a  total  of  44 
Servicios  and  joint-fund  arrangements  in  opera- 
tion— 16  in  the  field  of  health,  welfare,  and  housing; 
15  in  agriculture  and  natural  resources  develop- 
ment; 10  in  education,  and  3  in  industry.  Many 
projects  in  public  administration  such  as  budget- 


Host  Country  Contributions  Keep  Pace  With 
The  Expanded  Program 

Programmed  Contributions  to  Technical  Cooperation 
Projects  in  Latin  America 

(Millions  of  U.S.  Dollars) 

68.9 


60.7 


49.8 


:MlTBv/// 


United  States 
Contribution 

::::::::::  22.3  ;:>:>: 


952 


:?>>:24.3::>> 


1954 


Fiscal  Years 


ing,  personnel,  statistics,  and  census  were  also 
being  carried  out  on  the  basis  of  specific  agree- 
ments with  12  host  countries.  Approximately  600 
United  States  technicians  were  participating  in 
these  activities,  working  with  more  than  14,000 
Latin  American  nationals.  In  addition,  about 
600  Latin  American  trainees  were  participating  in 
training  programs  in  the  United  States. 

Illustrative  Projects  Show 
Scope  of  Joint  Efforts 

Technical  cooperation  programs  are  being 
carried  out  in  19  countries  of  Latin  America: 
Bolivia,  Brazil,  Chile,  Colombia,  Costa  Rica, 
Cuba,  the  Dominican  Republic,  Ecuador,  El 
Salvador,  Guatemala,  Haiti,  Honduras,  Mexico, 
Nicaragua,  Panama,  Paraguay,  Peru,  Uruguay, 
and  Venezuela. 

Since  it  is  not  possible  within  the  space  of  this 
report  to  describe  all  of  the  technical  cooperation 
programs  in  each  of  these  19  countries,  a  number 
of  key  projects  have  been  singled  out  as  illustrative 
of  the  type  of  activities  now  in  progress. 

Health. — A  good  example  of  what  has  been 
accomplished  in  the  health  and  sanitation  program 
is  to  be  found  in  Brazil.  In  the  Amazon  River 
Valley,  56  health  centers  and  their  subposts 
minister  to  2  million  people  scattered  over  an 
immense  area.  Efforts  have  been  concentrated  on 
reducing  malaria  and  intestinal  diseases  that  had 
affected  almost  the  entire  population.  As  a 
result  of  cooperative  measures,  these  diseases  have 
been  substantially  reduced.  When  the  health 
program  for  the  area  was  first  initiated  in  1942,  life 
expectancy  at  birth  was  estimated  at  37  years. 
Results  of  a  study,  recently  made  available,  show 
that  by  1952  the  longevity  figure  had  risen  to 
nearly  48  years,  a  gain  of  almost  30  percent. 
Also,  when  work  was  begun  in  1942,  there  were 
40  United  States  technicians  cooperating  with  500 
Brazilians.  Today,  not  a  single  United  States 
technician  is  permanently  stationed  in  the  Amazon 
Valley.  The  work  is  being  carried  forward  almost 
entirely  by  1,000  Brazilians,  most  of  whom  were 
trained  as  a  part  of  the  cooperative  program. 

Another  interesting  example  is  the  industrial 
hygiene  program  being  carried  on  in  the  mines  of 
Peru.  Many  of  the  mines  in  the  Andes  Moun- 
tains of  Peru  are  from  14,000  to  16,000  feet  above 
sea  level,  and  only  Peruvians  who  are  native  to 
these  high  altitudes  can  work  there.  This 
valuable  labor  force  is  a  diminishing  one,  however, 


51 


A  mass  vaccination  campaign  carried  out  jointly  by  FOA  and  Panamanian  personnel  was  completed  Decem- 
ber 31,  1953.    Seventy  percent  of  all  the  people  under  30  were  vaccinated. 


since  occupational  diseases,  including  silicosis,  are 
incapacitating  men  who  cannot  be  replaced 
These  high-altitude  mines  contain  copper,  zinc, 
lead,  vanadium,  antimony,  bismuth,  and  other 
important  strategic  products. 

The  Peruvian  Government  in  1947  passed  a  law 
making  an  industrial  hygiene  program  mandatory 
and  made  provision  to  finance  it.  The  Govern- 
ment then  asked  the  Health  Sermcio  staff  to  accept 
responsibility  for  supervising  this  program.  A 
Department  of  Industrial  Hygiene  within  the 
Peruvian  Ministry  of  Health  was  established  at 
Lima  under  the  technical  direction  of  United 
States  health  specialists.  These  specialists  have 
helped  to  train  personnel,  start  education  and 
health  control  measures,  and  win  the  support  of 
labor  and  industry.  Medical  and  engineering 
studies  have  been  carried  out  in  the  mining 
industries,  and  almost  10,000  workers  have 
received  physical  examinations. 

This  industrial  hygiene  program  has  been  so 
successful  that  other  Latin  America  countries  are 
sending   personnel    to    be    trained    at    the   Lima 


laboratory.  Industrial  hygiene  programs  have 
been  established  in  5  countries  besides  Peru — ■ 
Bolivia,  Brazil,  Chile,  Colombia,  and  Mexico; 
preliminary  work  in  this  field  has  been  started  in 
Costa  Rica,  El  Salvador,  Uruguay,  and  Venezuela. 
These  10  countries  contain  75  percent  of  the 
working  population  of  Latin  America. 

Agriculture. — In  Costa  Rica,  marked  increases 
have  been  achieved  in  food  production  and  exports 
through  the  development  and  operation  of  30 
agricultural  extension  agencies  throughout  the 
country.  By  the  end  of  1953,  these  agencies  were 
staffed  100  percent  by  Costa  Ricans.  Urgent 
requests  have  been  received  from  local  farmers  to 
establish  extension  agencies  in  three  new  areas  to 
impart  basic  agricultural  knowledge  and  tech- 
niques to  Costa  Rican  farmers  and  to  develop 
rural  youth  organizations  and  home  demonstra- 
tion programs. 

The  technical  cooperation  program  has  assisted 
Costa  Rica  in  increasing  production  of  food  items. 
The  country  is  now  exporting  certain  foods  that  it 
formerly  had  to  import,  such  as  corn,  rice,  and 


52 


Members  of  a  Costa  Rican  4-H  Club  learn 
agricultural  -program. 


modem  j arming  methods.     This  work  is  part  of  the  cooperative 


beans.  Fresh  tomatoes  are  being  shipped  to  the 
Panama  Canal  Zone  in  growing  volume.  Estab- 
lishment of  approximately  10,000  family  gardens, 
combined  with  programs  of  extension  work  in  food 
preservation,  has  helped  to  increase  and  diversify 
the  rural  diet.  Milk  supplies  have  increased  by 
25  percent,  and  annual  losses  of  beef  cattle  have 
been  reduced  materially  so  that  imports  of  cattle 
have  ceased  despite  the  increase  in  local  consump- 
tion. 

The  Government  of  Haiti  is  being  helped  under 
the  technical  cooperation  programs  to  develop  a 
150,000  acre  agricultural  project  in  the  Artibonite 
Valley.  In  cooperation  with  Haitian  technicians, 
a  United  States  held  party  prepared  the  develop- 
ment plans  which  included  permanent  irrigation 
for  70,000  acres  and  land  reclamation.  Provisions 
were  also  made  for  project  management,  operation, 
and  maintenance.  The  Export-Import  Bank  has 
approved  a  $14  million  loan  to  assist  the  Haitian 
Government  in  financing  the  project,  and  construc- 
tion is  now  under  way.  In  time,  this  project 
should  narrow  the  gap  between  crop  production 
and  food  needs  in  overpopulated  Haiti. 


Similar  projects,  which  point  the  way  to  a  new 
agricultural  economy,  are  being  carried  forward 
in  other  countries  of  Latin  America. 

Education. — In  the  field  of  education,  there 
are  currently  programs  in  10  Latin  American  coun- 
tries with  special  activities  in  3  additional 
countries.  These  programs  are  designed  to  assist 
in  improving  public  elementary  school  systems, 
mainly  in  rural  areas,  and  vocational  education, 
primarily  in  urban  areas. 

The  education  program  in  Paraguay  mav  illus- 
trate the  progress  made  in  both  these  tields.  A 
technical  cooperation  program  has  been  operating 
to  help  Paraguay  establish  a  system  of  vocational 
training.  Starting  from  a  situation  in  which 
Paraguay  had  no  trades  school  and  no  vocational 
teachers,  technicians  working  under  the  program 
have  helped  to  build  and  equip  a  school  in  Asuncion, 
organize  its  curriculum,  train  its  teaching  and 
administration  staff,  and  guide  its  first  few  years  of 
operation.  At  first,  all  instruction  had  to  be 
given  by  United  States  instructors;  now,  the  school 
is  entirely  staffed  by  Paraguayans.  Courses  are 
being  offered  in  automotive  mechanics,  radio,  re- 


53 


frigeration,  carpentry,  leather  work,  plumbing, 
and  black-smithing.  The  school  is  currently  ex- 
panding operations  by  building  new  shops  and 
adding  courses  in  graphic  arts  and  electricity. 

The  Asuncion  school  is  running  at  a  capacity 
enrollment  of  about  240,  with  a  long  list  of  waiting 
applicants.  In  November  1953,  the  third  gradu- 
ating class  of  53  received  diplomas.  The  school  is 
now  planning  to  establish  both  trades  courses  and 
industrial  arts  courses  in  other  parts  of  the  Re- 
public of  Paraguay. 

In  the  rural  education  field,  a  new  demonstra- 
tion school  has  been  established  at  San  Lorenzo, 
which  not  only  tests  and  demonstrates  improved 
methods  of  rural  teaching,  but  also  serves  both  as 
a  center  for  in-service  training  for  normal  school 
facilities  and  rural  teachers  throughout  Paraguay, 
and  as  a  laboratory  for  working  out  an  improved 
curriculum  for  rural  elementary  and  rural  normal 
schools.  A  new  "laboratory"  normal  school  with 
a  5-year  course  is  also  planned  for  establishment 
at  San  Lorenzo;  the  curriculum  is  now  before  the 
Minister  of  Education  for  approval. 

Industrial  and  Natural  Resources  Develop- 
ment.— The  concept  of  balanced  economic  de- 
velopment- has  prompted  numerous  requests  for 
assistance  in  a  range  of  activities  going  beyond  the 
basic  fields  of  health,  agriculture,  and  education. 
These  requests  cover  particularly  projects  to  de- 
velop industrial  enterprises  and  natural  resources. 

At  present,  industrial  development  programs 
are  operating  mainly  along  the  lines  of  increasing 
industrial  productivity,  since  a  program  in  this 
field  should  begin  with  already  existing  industries 
to  help  them  improve  their  methods,  cut  costs, 
increase  quality,  and  lower  prices.  This,  of  course, 
is  only  one  phase  of  a  total  industry  program,  but 
it  is  an  excellent  place  at  which  to  begin  making 
efforts  toward  broad  industrial  development. 

The  organizational  pattern  which  has  been 
adopted  in  industrial  productivity  programs  is  to 
establish  cooperative  technological  and  invest- 
ment advisory  centers  for  small  and  medium  in- 
dustries. In  addition,  field  staffs  of  vocational 
industrial  programs  are  aiding  small  industries  to 
increase  productivity  by  selecting  machinery 
adapted  to  their  needs  and  to  their  resources,  and 
by  assisting  in  the  solution  of  shop  organization 
and  management  problems.  This  program  is  also 
concerned  with  technical  cooperation  in  the  field 
of  handicrafts,  such  as  weaving,  ceramics,  leather 
working,  and  carving. 


A  significant  development  in  the  natural  re- 
sources field  in  recent  months  was  the  initiation 
of  a  mining  and  a  geological  survey  project  in 
Cuba.  Under  the  mining  project,  the  Cuban 
Development  Bank  is  being  helped  to  train  engi- 
neers in  improved  methods  of  appraising  mine 
properties  for  the  extension  of  credit.  This  proj- 
ect also  provides  for  the  establishment  of  a  metal- 
lurgical testing  laboratory  for  which  Cuban  per- 
sonnel are  now  being  trained  in  the  United  States. 
Under  the  geological  survey  project,  the  Ministry 
of  Agriculture  is  being  given  assistance  in  reorgan- 
izing its  own  geological  work  and  in  carrying  out 
field  work  with  Cuban  geologists  to  define  specific 
deposits  to  the  point  required  for  commercial 
development.  Technical  cooperation  in  various 
phases  of  minerals  development,  including  coal, 
is  being  given  also  in  Brazil,  Chile,  Colombia, 
Mexico,  and  Peru. 

Public  Administration 

United  States  technicians  in  public  administra- 
tion have  been  requested  by  many  Latin  American 
governments  to  serve  as  advisors  on  management 
and  administrative  methods  to  ministry  officials, 
agencies,  and  special  commissions. 

The  Brazilian  Board  of  Advisors  on  Public  Ad- 
ministration is  the  main  body  responsible  for 
improvements  in  public  administration  in  Brazil. 
United  States  technicians  are  working  with  the 
Brazilian  Board  on  various  public  administration 
studies,  such  as  a  position  classification  survey  of 
the  Federal  Government  and  the  State  of  Sao 
Paulo,  budget  management  assistance  for  the 
State  of  Minas  Gerais,  organization  and  man- 
agement study  of  the  Institute  for  the  Retirement 
and  Pensions  of  Commercial  Employees,  and  the 
establishment  of  a  school  and  institute  of  public 
administration  at  the  University  of  Minas  Gerais 
in  Belo  Horizonte.  In  this  cooperative  program., 
the  Brazilian  Government  contributes  about  $4 
for  every  $1  contributed  by  the  United  States. 

The  United  States  public  administration  advisor 
in  Panama,  at  the  request  of  the  Panamanian 
Government,  worked  with  the  manager  of  the 
Colon  Free  Zone  in  carrying  out  an  extensive  man- 
agement survey  of  the  Free  Zone's  operations. 
As  a  result  of  this  joint  study,  the  flow  of  goods 
through  the  Free  Zone  is  being  expedited.  Also 
in  Panama,  a  United  States  expert  is  helping  to 
carry  out  a  government-wide  training  program  in 
records  management. 


54 


In  Costa  Rica,  the  United  States  public  admin- 
istration advisor  is  helping  the  Costa  Rican  Direc- 
tor of  Civil  Service  to  carry  out  plans  to  establish 
a  government  civil  service  system. 

Special  Aid  to  Bolivia 

Bolivia's  economy  is  exposed  to  the  dangers 
inherent  in  a  one-product  economy,  since  exports 
of  tin  account  for  about  60  percent  of  the  coun- 
try's total  exports.  In  spite  of  the  Government's 
current  efforts  to  remedy  the  situation  by  a  pro- 
gram of  diversification,  the  major  portion  of  the 
country's  food  requirements,  as  well  as  a  sizeable 
volume  of  other  essential  commodities  and  equip- 
ment, must  still  be  imported.  The  price  of  tin  in 
the  world  market  determines  the  amount  of  ex- 
change earning  available  to  Bolivia  to  satisfy  these 
essential  needs  of  its  economy. 

During  1953,  a  sharp  decline  in  the  world  price 
of  tin  precipitated  a  serious  economic  crisis.  Since 
the  Bolivian  Government  had  virtually  no  finan- 
cial reserves,  extraordinary  assistance  was  ur- 
gently needed  to  cover  foreign  exchange  costs  of 
essential  imports,  primarily  agricultural  com- 
modities. 

The  President,  on  October  5,  1953,  authorized 
assistance  to  Bolivia  in  the  amount  of  $5  million 
worth  of  surplus  agricultural  commodities. 

This  authorization  was  made  under  Public  Law 
216,  83rd  Congress.  The  Bolivian  Government 
indicated  that  its  most  urgent  need  was  for 
wheat  and  flour,  and  it  was  agreed  that  the  entire 
$5  million  grant  would  be  used  for  these  com- 
modities. On  November  13,  1953,  FOA  author- 
i  ed  the  first  transfer  of  3,000  tons  of  wheat  from 
the  stocks  of  the  Commodity  Credit  Corporation 
for  shipment  in  November  and  December.  An- 
other authorisation  followed  for  42,000  tons  of 
wheat,  of  which  half  is  to  be  milled  into  flour  in 
the  United  States.  Shipments  are  scheduled  at 
the  rate  of  4,000  tons  of  wheat  and  3,000  tons  of 
flour  monthly. 

In  addition  to  the  $5  million  worth  of  wheat 
authorized  under  Public  Law  216,  the  President, 
determined  that  up  to  $4  million  of  economic  and 
defense-support  funds  might  be  transferred  from 
the  European  area  to  furnish  urgent  economic 
assistance  to  Bolivia.  A  portion  of  these  funds 
is  being  used  to  cover  costs  of  ocean  transportation 
and  miscellaneous  handling  charges  for  the  wheat 
and  wheat  flour,  and  approximately  $1.7  million 
will  be  used  for  cotton,  lard,  and  cottonseed  oil. 


The  disposition  of  the  balance  of  funds  will   be 
determined  at  a  later  date. 

Moreover,  $2  million  for  an  expanded  food  pro- 
duction program  was  added  to  fiscal  year  1954 
technical  cooperation  funds  of  $1.5  million  for 
Bolivia.  The  bulk  of  this  money  is  being  used 
for  agricultural  supplies  and  equipment  needed  by 
Bolivia  in  its  efforts  to  diversify  its  economy  and 
to  accelerate  domestic  production  of  vital  food- 
stuffs now  in  short  supply. 

Overseas  Territories 

The  European  overseas  territories  in  the  West- 
ern Hemisphere  provide  strategic  bases  for  the 
free  world  and  supply  many  critical  raw  materials. 
Their  continued  stability  and  economic  growth  is 
essential  to  hemispheric  security. 

The  technical  cooperation  programs  in  the  over- 
seas territories  have  moved  forward  with  good 
results.  In  Surinam,  Antigua,  Jamaica,  Barbados, 
and  the  Windward  Islands,  United  States  special- 
ists have  helped  the  local  authorities  in  their 
efforts  to  develop  low-cost  housing  facilities.  In 
Barbados,  St.  Lucia,  and  St.  Vincent,  soil  con- 
servation and  land-use  studies  are  under  way. 

As  the  year  ended,  a  survey  team  was  being  sent 
to  Surinam  and  British  Guiana  to  discuss  the 
initiation  of  technical  cooperation  programs  in 
those  countries. 

Hemispheric  Defense 

The  purpose  of  military  grant  aid  program  for 
the  American  Republics  is  to  enable  them  to 
accomplish  the  military  roles  and  missions  as- 
sumed in  the  mutual  defense  of  the  Western 
Hemisphere  and  to  strengthen  their  collective 
effort  against  possible  Communist  or  other 
aggression. 

In  pursuance  of  this  policy,  military  assistance 
appropriations  for  the  American  Republics  from 
the  beginning  of  the  mutual  security  program  until 
the  present  time  have  totaled  $105  million.  Of 
this  amount,  $83  million  has  been  used  to  furnish 
these  countries  with  equipment  which  will 
strengthen  their  armed  forces;  $900,000  has  been 
spent  in  training  programs,  the  majority  of  which 
have  been  carried  on  in  the  United  States. 

The  Latin  American  countries  have  devoted 
much  of  their  own  budgets  to  support  the  basic 
policy  of  hemispheric  defense.  They  have  de- 
frayed the  major  portion  of  the  costs  of  such  a 


55 


policy  by  using  their  own  funds  for  pay,  rations, 
and  uniforms,  and  for  purchasing  in  the  United 
States  a  total  of  $38.3  million  worth  of  military 
items. 

Although  most  Latin  American  countries  are 
hampered  by  a  lack  of  adequate  facilities  and  by 
a  preponderance  of  obsolete  military  equipment, 
they  have  shown  themselves  fully  capable  of 
utilizing  and  maintaining  modern  ships  and  air- 


craft. Colombia  is  a  good  example.  Throughout 
the  Korean  conflict,  Colombia  maintained  forces 
in  Korea.  The  majority  of  the  Latin  American 
Republics  have  requested  assistance  from  the 
United  States  in  the  form  of  military  missions  or 
advisors.  The  military  assistance  we  furnish  will 
help  insure  that  these  countries  will  be  able  to 
continue  to  develop  military  establishments  of 
increased  size  and  effectiveness. 


56 


CHAPTER  VI 


Other  Parts  of  the  Program 


There  are  a  number  of  activities  carried  out 
under  the  mutual  security  program  which  are 
global  in  scope  and  cannot  be  grouped  regionally. 
A  report  on  these  activities  is  contained  in  this 
section. 

Farm  Surpluses  Sold 
to  Friendly  Countries 

Section  550  of  the  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1951, 
as  amended,  provides  for  the  purchase  of  between 
$100  million  and  $250  million  worth  of  surplus 
agricultural  commodities  to  be  sold  by  the  United 
States  to  friendly  countries  for  foreign  currencies. 
Commodities  bought  by  a  foreign  country  under 
section  550  must  not  substitute  for  or  displace 
usual  marketings  by  the  United  States  or  friendly 
countries.  The  surplus  commodities  are  generally 
sold  at  prevailing  United  States  export  prices,  as 
required  to  meet  the  price  criteria  set  by  Congress, 
and  private  trade  channels  are  being  used  to  the 
maximum  extent  practicable. 

Illustrative  of  the  types  of  commodities  that 
may  be  included  in  the  program  are  cotton, 
tobacco,  corn,  wheat,  beef,  dairy  products,  fruits, 
fats,  oils,  and  some  oilseeds.  This  list  is  subject 
to  change  upon  recommendation  of  the  Secretary 
.of  Agriculture. 

Congress  did  not  appropriate  additional  money 
to  cover  the  purchase  of  these  surplus  commodities, 
but  provided  that  a  portion  of  the  funds  appro- 
priated for  the  mutual  security  program,  including 
those  for  military  assistance,  defense  support  and 
economic  aid,  should  be  used  to  carry  out  the 
provisions  of  section  550.  The  foreign  currencies 
received  from  the  sale  of  surplus  agricultural 
products  will  be  used  for  military  production 
programs,  payment  for  offshore  procurement  of 
military  materiel  for  use  in  the  country  where 
purchased  or  elsewhere,  and  for  other  purposes  as 
prescribed  by  this  section  and  in  accordance  with 
agreements  reached  with  each  government. 


Negotiations  with  a  number  of  countries, 
including  Afghanistan,  Formosa,  France,  Finland, 
Germany,  Indochina,  Italy,  Israel,  Japan,  Nether- 
lands, Norway,  Spain,  the  United  Kingdom,  and 
Yugoslavia,  have  been  actively  carried  on  to 
develop  programs  for  the  direct  sale  of  surplus 
agricultural  commodities.  Plans  are  also  being 
made  to  use  section  550  sales  proceeds  to  promote 
triangular  trade  arrangements;  that  is,  FOA 
would  sell  agricultural  commodities  to  one  country 
in  return  for  local  currency  to  be  used  to  purchase 
and  export  items  required  for  the  economic  aid  of 
another  country. 

Through  December  31,  1953,  allotments  of  $59.1 
million  have  been  announced,  including  $55 
million  to  the  United  Kingdom,  $2.1  million  for 
Norway,  and  $2.0  million  for  West  Germany. 
Procurement  authorizations  providing  for  sales  of 
$20  million  worth  of  tobacco,  $5  million  of  prunes, 
and  $19  million  of  fats  and  oils  were  issued  to  the 
United  Kingdom.  By  the  end  of  the  year,  also, 
nearly  $60  million  of  additional  sales  were  in 
process  of  negotiation.  Shipments  of  all  purchases 
will  be  subject  to  the  usual  requirement  that  50 
percent  be  sent  in  American  ships.  Authoriza- 
tions, which  are  issued  on  the  basis  of  requests 
submitted  by  the  foreign  government,  provide  the 
terms  and  conditions  of  sale.  The  commodity 
may  not  be  re-exported  without  prior  agreement 
of  the  United  States  Government,  and  the  foreign 
currency  is  to  be  deposited  to  United  States 
account  and  used  for  the  approved  purposes. 

In  evaluating  requests  received  from  the  foreign 
governments  for  surplus  agricultural  commodities, 
appropriate  consultations  are  held  with  the  De- 
partments of  Agriculture  and  State  to  determine 
that  the  furnishing  of  each  commodity  in  the 
amount  requested  would  be  consistent  with  the 
provisions  of  section  550. 


57 


The  Christmas  Food-Package  Program 

The  Christmas  food-package  program  pro- 
vided for  the  distribution  of  special  food  packages 
during  the  period  of  the  Christmas  season  to  needy 
families  in  a  number  of  countries  in  Western 
Europe,  Latin  America,  and  the  Near  East.  The 
program  was  conceived  as  a  means  of  bringing 
a  sense  of  direct  participation  in  the  programs  of 
the  United  States  to  people  in  the  various  countries 
of  the  world.  Most  of  the  gift  food  was  shipped 
in  individual,  consumer-sized  packages,  and  later 
assembled  into  special  parcels  stamped  with  the 
FOA  clasped-hand  emblem  and  holding  about  12 
pounds  of  food  for  each  family. 

Prunes,  raisins,  rice,  dry  beans,  evaporated  milk, 
canned  beef  and  gravy,  shortening,  cheese,  and 
sugar — all  foodstuffs  in  abundant  supply  in  the 
United  States — were  included  in  the  parcels. 
Funds  to  finance  the  program,  totaling  $15.5 
million,  were  drawn  from  mutual  security  appro- 
priations under  the  provisions  of  Section  513  (b) 
of  the  Mutual  Security  Appropriation  Act  of  1954. 

According  to  arrangements  made  by  the  foreign 
governments,  the  food  was  distributed  on  a  family- 
by-family  basis  through  local  charitable  groups 
and  other  agencies.  CARE,  Hadassah,  and  the 
American  Middle  East  Eelief  also  participated  in 
the  program,  as  did  units  of  the  United  States 
Armed  Forces  which  helped  to  distribute  some  of 
the  food  to  individual  families,  or  through  local 
Christmas  parties  in  institutions  such  as  orphan- 
ages and  refugee  camps. 

Transportation:  Over  50  Percent 
in  U.  S.  Ships 

The  urgency  and  speed  required  to  carry  forward 
the  special  programs  of  the  Foreign  Operations 
Administration  in  the  last  6  months  of  1953  posed 
difficult  ocean  shipping  problems.  The  shipment 
of  600,000  tons  of  wheat  to  Pakistan,  other  grain 
shipments  to  Jordan  and  Bolivia,  the  East  German 
food  program,  the  Christmas-package  program, 
the  rush  shipments  of  commodities  to  Korea — all 
these  necessitated  the  most  careful  coordination 
and  scheduling. 

It  was  also  necessary  to  obtain  the  complete 
cooperation  of  the  steamship  industry  inasmuch  as 
the  time  requirements  for  procurement,  packaging 
and  shipment  in  each  case  involved  numerous 
schedule  changes,  re-routing  and  diversion  of 
vessels.  Despite  the  many  complexities  of  the 
situation,  all  programs  were  expedited  and  carried 
forward  in  excellent  time. 


Congress,  in  establishing  the  Foreign  Operations 
Administration,  renewed  the  provision  requiring 
that  at  least  50  percent  of  the  tonnage  financed 
from  FOA  funds  and  shipped  from  the  United 
States  must  move  in  United  States-flag  vessels. 
This  requirement  has  been  met  in  each  fiscal  year 
period  since  1949.  Only  preliminary  reports  for 
the  first  four  months  of  fiscal  year  1954  are  avail- 
able, but  on  the  basis  of  these  preliminary  figures, 
American-flag  vessels  in  the  liner  category  carried 
50  percent  of  the  tonnage  shipped  during  July- 
October  1953  to  European  destinations,  and  72 
percent  of  the  tonnages  moving  to  Far  East 
destinations. 

For  this  same  4-month  period,  unofficial  re- 
ports show  that,  in  the  "tramp"  category,  Ameri- 
can vessels  carried  50  percent  of  the  total  of 
575,000  tons  shipped  to  Europe.  There  were  no 
other  bulk  movements  on  shipments  reported  to 
date.  Four  vessels  in  the  tanker  category  had 
been  FOA-financed,  two  of  which  were  American- 
flag  vessels. 

Homebound  cargoes  of  strategic  materials 
procured  under  the  Foreign  Operations  Adminis- 
tration program  similarly  are  subject  to  the  flag 
rule.  For  the  last  6  months  of  1953,  77  percent 
of  these  shipments  was  carried  in  American  vessels, 
all  in  the  liner  category. 

At  least  50  percent  of  the  tonnage  financed 
under  the  military  assistance  portion  of  the  mutu- 
al security  program  also  is  required  to  be  shipped 
in  United  States  vessels.  Through  October  1953, 
American-flag  vessels  carried  66  percent  of  all 
military  items  shipped  under  grant  aid. 

Ocean  Freight  Paid  on  Voluntary 
Relief  Shipments 

For  the  fiscal  year  1954,  Congress  appropriated. 
$1.8  million  for  financing  the  freight  costs  of 
voluntary  relief  shipments.  Another  $2.5  million 
was  authorized  by  the  President  as  essential  to 
support  this  program,  so  that  a  total  of  $4.3 
million  was  made  available. 

From  July  1  through  December  31,  1953, 
$2.1  million  was  expended  to  subsidize  transpor- 
tation of  relief  shipments  of  American  voluntary 
nonprofit  relief  agencies  registered  with  the  Ad- 
visory Committee  on  Voluntary  Foreign  Aid. 
This  brought  to  a  total  of  $29.4  million  the  pay- 
ments since  July  1948  to  subsidize  the  cost  of 
ocean  transportation  of  voluntary  relief  shipments. 
Of  this  total  amount,  $18.6  million  or  63  percent 


58 


was  used  to  pay  for  parcel-post  packages  sent  by 
individual  donors.  The  parcel-post  subsidy  pro- 
gram was  ended  on  March  31,  1953. 

The  ocean  freight  subsidy  at  present  is  paid  on 
voluntary  agency  shipments  to  Austria,  France 
(including  Morocco  and  Tunisia),  Germany, 
Greece,  Italy,  Trieste,  Yugoslavia,  India,  Pakistan, 
Korea,  Formosa,  Lebanon,  and  Iran. 

Since  May  1953,  the  Department  of  Agriculture 
has  made  available  under  Section  416  of  the  Agri- 
culture Act  of  1949,  70,000  tons  of  dried  milk, 
25,000  tons  of  cheddar  cheese,  and  25,000  tons  of 
butter  for  distribution  to  needy  persons  abroad. 
By  the  end  of  December  1953,  the  freight  costs  of 
over  45,500  tons  of  these  commodities  were  either 
financed  or  marked  for  financing  under  this  sub- 
sidization program. 


Escapee  Program  for  Those  Who 
Flee  Communist  Oppression 

Through  the  escapee  program,  the  United  States 
provides  help  to  those  who  flee  from  Communist 
oppression  by  supplementing  the  considerable 
assistance  rendered  these  refugees  by  the  countries 
which  give  them  first  asylum.  The  escapee  pro- 
gram also  provides  major  assistance  in  the  re- 
settlement of  the  escapees  by  migration  to  other 
countries  of  the  free  world.  At  the  end  of  1953, 
there  were  14,500  escapees  registered  for  care  and 
resettlement  assistance  under  projects  adminis- 
tered through  United  States  Operations  Missions 
in  Europe.  More  than  half  of  this  number  were 
located  in  West  Germany  and  Austria.  In  addi- 
tion, about  3,000  persons  were  registered  for  re- 
settlement assistance  onlv. 


Albanian  and  Bulgarian  escapees  from  Communism  at  a  vocational  school  in  Athens,  Greece,  are  being 
trained  for  resettlement  opportunities  under  the  Escapee  Program.  By  the  end  of  1953,  almost  8,000  persons 
had  been  resettled  in  various  free  world  countries. 


59 


For  the  6  months  ended  December  31,  1953, 
2,700  escapees  were  resettled  in  the  United  States, 
Canada,  Brazil,  Australia,  and  other  countries  of 
the  world.  This  brought  to  a  total  of  7,800  the 
number  of  persons  resettled  since  the  inception  of 
the  program.  Screening  procedures  provide  for 
thorough  interrogation  and  examination  of  all 
escapees.  Although  the  escapee  program  thus 
far  has  operated  mainly  in  the  European  area, 
special  projects  have  been  undertaken  for  reset- 
tlement of  recent  anti-Communist  escapees  from 
the  China  mainland  and  in  the  Near  East,  and 
this  phase  of  the  program  has  been  expanded  and 
intensified  in  accordance  with  the  expressed  wish 
of  the  Congress. 

Resettlement  projects  provide  visa  opportunity 
searches  and  visa  processing,  give  counseling  and 
legal  aid,  and  furnish  language  and  vocational 
training  so  that  the  escapee  is  better  able  to  take 
advantage  of  existing  emigration  opportunities. 
In  addition,  CAEE  projects  are  undertaken  to 
supplement  the  food,  clothing,  lodging,  and  medi- 
cal aid  which  are  provided  for  the  escapees  by 
the  countries  of  asylum  and  by  relief  organizations. 

These  care  and  resettlement  assistance  projects 
are  administered  in  most  instances  by  private 
voluntary  agencies  under  contract.  Transpor- 
tation to  the  countries  of  resettlement  is  secured 
through  a  contract  with  the  Inter-Governmental 
Committee  for  European  Migration.  In  carry- 
ing out  the  escapee  program,  close  liaison  is  main- 
tained with  the  Department  of  State  in  order  to 
utilize  added  resettlement  possibilities  made  avail- 
able under  the  Refugee  Relief  Act  and  to  insure 
proper  coordination  in  regard  to  escapee  resettle- 
ment activities. 

The  escapee  program  gives  tangible  evidence  of 
the  concern  of  the  West  for  populations  behind 
the  iron  curtain,  and  interviews  with  recent  ar- 
rivals indicate  that  knowledge  of  the  favorable 
treatment  accorded  escapees  is  spreading  within 
the  Soviet  orbit. 

Basic  Materials  Development 

For  the  fiscal  year  1954,  $19  million  was  ap- 
propriated for  a  basic  materials  program  to  finance 
projects  which  will  contribute  to  the  supply  of 
essential  raw  materials  for  the  collective  defense 
of  the  free  world. 

Under  the  basic  materials  program,  paramount 
consideration  has  been  given  to  country  efforts 
which  are  geared  to  the  development  of  primary 
supporting  facilities,  such  as  the  construction  of 


roads  and  railways,  and  the  improvement  and 
expansion  of  port  facilities.  Governmental  as- 
sistance is  particularly  required  in  the  transport 
field  because,  as  a  rule,  private  capital  flows  into 
projects  which  are  directly  tied  to  materials  pro- 
duction rather  than  into  supporting-type  projects. 
The  development  of  their  transportation  base 
will  permit  underdeveloped  countries  to  exercise  a 
greater  attraction  for  foreign  and  domestic  private 
investment  capital. 

Present  plans  for  use  of  the  basic  materials 
program  funds  are  limited  to  the  geographical 
areas  of  Africa  and  Asia  and  call  for  some  9 
projects,  primarily  in  port  and  road  development, 
which  will  aid  in  the  increased  production  or 
transportation  of  critical  materials.  A  number 
of  these  projects  are  still  in  the  engineering  survey 
stage.  In  others,  the  initial  surveys  have  been 
completed  and  applications  are  being  prepared. 
Some  projects  are  still  subject  to  negotiations 
with  the  foreign  government  concerned. 

Guaranty  Program  for 
U.  S.  Investments  Abroad 

Through  the  investment  guaranty  program,  the 
United  States  Government  has  offered,  for  a  fee, 
insurance  protection  to  new  American  investments 
abroad  against  the  risks  of  currency  inconverti- 
bility and  loss  through  expropriation  or  confisca- 
tion. The  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1953  provides 
that  guaranties  shall  be  available  to  protect 
investments  in  any  country  in  which  the  United 
States  has  agreed  to  institute  the  guaranty 
program. 

Agreements  in  connection  with  the  program 
provide  certain  assurances  by  the  government  of 
the  foreign  country  concerned  regarding  claims 
settlement  to  the  United  States.  By  December 
31,  1953,  the  required  assurances  had  been  ob- 
tained from  18  countries  with  respect  to  con- 
vertibility guaranties;  bilateral  agreements  with 
16  of  these  countries  also  were  made  with  respect 
to  expropriation  guaranties. 

The  Mutual  Security  Act  of  1953  also  provides 
that  guaranties  may  be  written  for  a  maximum 
term  of  20  years  from  the  date  of  issuance  and 
extends  the  authority  to  issue  guaranties  to  June 
30,  1957. 

Through  December  31,  1953,  57  industrial 
investment  guaranties  totaling  $42.4  million  had 
been  issued  to  cover  private  investments  in  7 
European  countries.  Of  the  total,  $40.6  million 
insured   against   inconvertibility   of  foreign   cuf- 


60 


rency  receipts,  and  $1.8  million  against  loss  from 
expropriation  or  confiscation.  Total  fees  col- 
lected amounted  to  $888,600;  no  payments  under 
the  guaranty  contracts  have  been  required. 

Small  Business  Informed 
on  Export  Opportunities 

During  the  last  6  months  of  1953,  the  Foreign 
Operations  Administration,  through  its  Office  of 
Small  Business,  maintained  a  steady  flow  of 
advance  procurement  information  to  the  American 
business  community.  In  this  way,  American 
small  business  has  been  able  to  keep  in  touch  with 
opportunities  for  export  trade  financed  under  the 
various  FOA  programs.  During  the  period,  455 
small  business  circulars  and  memos  of  advance 
procurement  were  issued  to  manufacturers,  sup- 
pliers, and  exporters  who  had  expressed  active 
interest  in  receiving  such  information.  These 
circulars  and  memos  now  include  information  on 
procurement  handled  by  the  United  Nations 
Korean  Reconstruction  Agency.  Arrangements 
were  also  completed  to  have  the  General  Services 
Administration  publicize  its  purchases  which  are 
financed  with  FOA  funds. 

The  Directory  of  Combination  Export  Mana- 
gers, listing  commodities  and  services  which 
United  States  small  business  enterprises  could 
supply  tlirougn  combination  export  managers,  was 
distributed.  A  total  of  37,500  copies  were  issued, 
33,000  abroad  and  4,500  in  this  country.  This 
Directory  has  given  valuable  assistance  to  Amer- 
ican manufacturers  and  suppliers  who  cannot 
afford  export  departments  of  their  own.  By  ar- 
ranging for  combination  export  managers  to  carry 
out  the  necessary  export  functions,  these  manu- 
facturers and  suppliers  are  able  to  participate 
more  fully  in  the  procurement  programs  financed 
by  the  FOA. 

The  FOA  conducts  a  Contact  Clearing  House 
Service  which  is  designed  to  establish  direct  con- 
tact between  private  American  and  foreign  firms 
interested  in  exploring  specific  opportunities  for 
entering  into  investment  agreements.  This  serv- 
ice has  been  operating  in  13  Western  European 
countries,  Israel,  and  Formosa.  During  the 
period  under  review,  it  was  established  in  the 
Philippines  and  the  British  overseas  territories. 
Arrangements  for  clearing  house  services  are  in 
their  final  stages  in  Japan,  and  preliminary  nego- 
tiations are  under  way  to  extend  these  services  to 
India,  Iraq,  Switzerland,  and  Mexico. 


During  the  period,  approximately  220  specific 
investment  proposals  from  American  and  foreign 
concerns  have  been  published.  This  brought  to 
a  total  of  nearly  2,000  the  proposals  made  since 
the  operation  was  started  in  1950.  It  is  intended 
to  extend  the  Contact  Clearing  House  Service  to 
all  free  countries  of  the  world  where  encouragement 
of  private  investment  would  promote  the  ob- 
jectives of  the  mutual  security  program. 

Reimbursable  Military  Assistance 
to  46  Countries 

Under  existing  legislation,  the  President  is 
authorized  to  transfer  equipment,  materials,  and 
services  to  certain  nations  and  international  organ- 
izations on  a  reimbursable  basis  and  to  provide 
them  with  procurement  assistance,  without  cost 
to  the  United  States.  Assistance  of  this  type  is 
characteristic  of  the  basic  philosophy  of  the  mutual 
security  program  as  a  whole.  It  provides  a  means 
whereby  the  United  States  can  help  the  friendly 
nations  of  the  world  to  help  themselves.  More- 
over, it  permits  requests  from  friendly  nations  to 
be  merged  with  the  overall  procurement  programs 
of  the  military  departments,  thus  avoiding  con- 
flicting demands  on  the  productive  capacity  of 
the  United  States. 

As  of  December  31,  1953,  46  countries  have 
contracted  to  buy  $676  million  worth  of  equip- 
ment, materials,  and  services.  Their  purchases 
were  allocated  as  follows:  Army,  $214  million; 
Navy,  $113  million;  Air  Force,  $349  million.  By 
the  same  date,  the  purchasing  governments  had 
advanced  $543  million,  the  remainder  of  $133 
mfilion  will  be  liquidated  by  cash  payments  to 
the  military  departments  concerned  before  the 
materiel  or  services  are  furnished  by  the  United 
States. 

The  purchases  made  under  the  reimbursable 
assistance  program  have  covered  the  whole  range 
of  military  end-items  and  have  included:  6  light 
cruisers,  5  destroyer  escorts,  5  coast  guard  utility 
vessels,  4  patrol  frigates,  464  aircraft  of  all  types, 
486  tanks,  187  gun  motor  carriages,  318  armored 
cars  and  such  items  as  motor  vehicles,  weapons, 
ammunition,  and  electronic  equipment. 

Canada  has  been  the  largest  purchaser.  Not 
only  has  Canada  bought  for  cash  from  the  United 
States  the  munitions  required  to  convert  her  armed 
forces  from  British  to  United  States-type  equip- 
ment, but  it  also  has  transferred  substantial 
quantities  of  its  military  stocks  to  other  North 


61 


Atlantic  Treaty  Organization  nations  on  a  grant 
basis. 

Among  the  Latin  American  countries,  purchases 
to  maintain  equipment  of  United  States  origin 
already  in  their  possession  have  been  particularly 
important.  A  number  of  naval  vessels  have  been 
sold  to  members  of  the  Inter-American  Com- 
munity. Argentina,  Brazil,  and  Chile  purchased 
2  light  cruisers  each.  Three  destroyer  escorts 
have  been  sold  to  Peru,  2  destroyer  escorts  to 
Uruguay,  and  2  patrol  frigates  to  Colombia. 

These  ships  added  new  strength  to  hemispheric 
defense  by  providing  vessels  manned  by  trained 
crews  who  are  prepared  to  protect  strategic  com- 
munication lines. 

Military  Training  for  Effective 
Use  of  Equipment 

The  combat  effectiveness  of  our  allies  is  growing- 
daily  as  unit  after  unit  is  being  furnished  with 
modern  equipment.  To  insure  that  this  equip- 
ment is  employed  and  serviced  in  the  most  effective 
manner,  foreign  military  students  of  the  allied 
governments   are   being   trained   by   the   United 


States  under  the  military  assistance  program. 
Through  the  end  of  1953,  over  33,000  allied  stu- 
dents had  been  given  specialized  training  courses 
both  in  this  country  and  abroad. 

The  particular  type  of  training  given — whether 
it  be  formal  courses  of  instruction,  orientation 
tours,  or  special  training  in  the  use  of  a  particularly 
complex  piece  of  equipment — is  based  upon  the 
recommendations  of  the  United  States  Military 
Advisory  Group  in  each  country.  One  example 
of  the  kind  of  training  given  is  the  pilot  program. 
Over  $100  million  has  been  used  to  train  pilots  to 
fly  the  latest  type  of  jet  planes.  Program  students 
are  given  exactly  the  same  training  as  our  own  air 
cadets,  and  today  allied  pilots  are  capable  of  flying 
the  powerful  F-84  Thunderjets  from  any  one  of 
the  free  world's  far-flung  air  bases.  In  the  same 
way,  the  latest  electronic  equipment  is  being  effi- 
ciently operated  and  maintained  on  a  world-wide 
basis  by  crews  trained  under  the  military  assist- 
ance program. 

The  large-scale  military  training  program  is  en- 
abling the  countries  which  receive  our  defense 
weapons  and  equipment  to  maintain  high  stand- 


French,  Italian,  and  Portuguese  armor  personnel  being  trained  in  the  operation  of  the  United  States  M-4-6 
medium  tank  at  the  NATO  Training  Center  in  Mailly-le-Camp,  southeast  of  Paris,  France. 


62 


ards  of  operating  and  servicing.  In  addition,  close 
association  of  foreign  trainees  and  American  in- 
structors and  students  has  helped  promote  a  better 
understanding  abroad  of  the  characteristics  and 
capabilities  of  our  form  of  government  and  way 
of  life. 

Participation  in  International 
Organizations 

United  Nations  Expanded  Program  of  Tech- 
nical Assistance. — The  United  Nations  technical 
assistance  program  is  an  international  effort  to 
enlist  specialized  skills  from  many  nations  to  help 
the  governments  and  peoole  of  underdeveloped 
areas  expand  their  economies.  The  United  States 
has  supported  this  program  at  the  same  time  that 
it  has  developed  and  carried  on  its  own  bilateral  pro- 
gram of  technical  cooperation.  Each  approach — 
the  multilateral  and  the  bilateral — has  its  par- 
ticular merits,  and  the  use  of  both  produces  more 
substantial  results  than  the  exclusive  use  of  either. 

Continuous  attention  has  been  given  to  the 
problem  of  coordinating  the  United  Nations  and 
the  United  States  programs  so  that  the  two  com- 
plement each  other,  rather  than  overlap.  As  a 
result,  coordination  between  the  programs  is  good, 
and  is  based  primarily  on  active  cooperation  both 
in  the  field  and  at  headquarters  level  to  assure  the 
best  use  of  total  resources. 

As  of  October  1953,  about  1,100  United  Nations 
experts,  drawn  from  60  countries  all  over  the 
world,  were  at  work  in  the  field.  Of  this  number, 
17  percent  were  technicians  of  underdeveloped 
countries  whose  particular  skills  were  desired  by 
the  governments  of  other  underdeveloped  areas; 
21  percent  were  drawn  from  the  United  States. 
In  addition,  as  of  the  same  date,  1,528  new  fellow- 
ships had  been  awarded  under  the  1953  program, 
and  788  fellows  from  45  countries  had  completed 
their  studies. 

Contributing  governments  have  increased  their 
financial  support  of  the  United  Nations  program 
for  1954.  The  fourth  Technical  Assistance  Con- 
ference met  in  New  York  in  November  1953  to 
raise  on  a  voluntary  basis  funds  for  the  calendar 
year  1954  program.  Fifty-eight  countries  made 
valid  pledges  totaling  slightly  over  $23  million. 
Twenty-three  of  these  pledges  represented  in- 
creases over  the  previous  year. 

The  United  States  had,  at  previous  conferences, 
offered  to  contribute  60  percent  of  total  pledges. 
At  the  November  meeting,  however,  the  United 
States   representative  declared   the   intention   of 


his  Government,  subject  to  Congressional  ap- 
proval, to  match  the  first  $8.5  million  validly 
pledged  by  other  nations  at  a  60-40  ratio  and  to 
match  up  to  $3  million  in  additional  pledges  at 
a  40-60  ratio.  This  formula  was  designed  both 
to  elicit  greater  financial  support  of  the  technical 
assistance  program  from  other  governments  and 
to  reduce  the  United  States  share  below  60 
percent. 

Subsequent  to  the  pledging  conference  and 
prior  to  December  31,  1953,  the  cut-off  date  for 
making  pledges  for  the  purpose  of  matching 
contributions,  10  more  countries  made  pledges, 
bringing  total  pledges  for  1954  to  $24  million. 
Under  the  new  formula,  the  United  States  pledge 
to  the  1954  program  is  $13.9  million,  of  which 
about  $10  million  is  subject  to  appropriation  by 
the  Congress.  The  United  States  pledge  is  58 
percent  of  total  pledges. 

The  United  States  has  contributed  $11.1  million 
toward  the  calendar  year  1953  expanded  program. 
This  sum  was  approximately  60  percent  of  the 
total  contributions  received  through  December 
31,  1953. 

Technical  Cooperation  Program  of  the 
Organization  of  American  States  {OAS). — 
In  contrast  to  the  United  States  and  United 
Nations  programs  of  technical  cooperation  in 
Latin  America,  which  emphasize  direct  assistance 
to  individual  countries  on  specific  projects,  the 
OAS  program  is  presently  limited  to  the  estab- 
lishment and  support  of  regional  training  centers 
to  which  all  participating  governments  may  send 
persons  for  technical  education.  With  funds 
contributed  voluntarily  to  the  OAS  technical 
cooperation  account,  training  centers  are  devel- 
oped by  enlarging  existing  facilities  in  institutes 
and  universities  located  in  various  Latin  American 
nations. 

During  the  latter  half  of  1953,  there  were  5 
centers  in  operation,  giving  training  in  the  fields 
of  agricultural  extension,  housing,  child  welfare, 
economic  and  financial  statistics,  and  animal 
husbandry.  The  proposed  program  for  1954, 
now  under  review  by  the  Inter-American  Eco- 
nomic and  Social  Council,  would  continue  these 
centers  and,  if  sufficient  funds  become  available, 
would  provide  for  additional  projects  in  rural 
education  and  natural  resources. 

A  special  meeting  of  the  Council  in  November 
1953  opened  the  pledging  of  funds  for  the  1954 
program.  By  the  year's  end,  12  governments 
including   the  United   States,   had   pledged   $1.3 


63 


k 


Children  in  a  day  nursery  at  Athens,  Greece,  try  on  their  new  shoes  made  from  the  leather  supplied  by  the 
United.  Nations  Children's  Fund. 


million.     Five  pledges  represented  increases  over 

1953  contributions.  As  in  earlier  years,  the 
United  States  pledged  $1  million,  provided  that 
its  contribution  would  not  exceed  70  percent  of 
total   contributions.     Additional   pledges    to    the 

1954  program  are  expected  to  be  made  early  in 
1954. 

By  December  31,  1953,  the  United  States  had 
paid  in  $716,968  toward  the  1953  program,  and 
other  countries  had  contributed  $98,489. 

United  Nations  Children's  Fund. — In  Oct- 
tober  1953,  the  United  Nations  General  Assembly 


voted  unanimously  to  continue  the  International 
Children's  Fund.  The  name  of  the  agency  was 
changed  officially  to  "United  Nations  Children's 
Fund";  however  the  initials  UNICEF  were  re- 
tained. The  word  "Emergency"  was  chopped 
from  the  title  in  accord  with  the  General  As- 
sembly's desire  that  the  fund  emphasize  the 
establishment  of  basic  child  care  programs  in  the 
underdeveloped  countries. 

UNICEF's  program  in  1953  was  directed 
principally  to  assisting  underdeveloped  countries 
of  Asia,  Africa,  and  Latin  America  in  the  develop- 


64 


ment  of  their  own  permanent  maternity  and  child 
welfare  programs.  These  programs  included 
assistance  to  rural  maternal  and  child  welfare 
centers  in  areas  where  child-care  services  have 
previously  been  non-existent;  the  training  of 
auxiliary  medical  personnel,  such  as  village  mid- 
wives,  to  staff  these  services;  and  extensive  health 
campaigns  against  diseases  affecting  large  numbers 
of  children,  such  as  tuberculosis,  malaria,  and  yaws. 
Aid  for  these  long-range  programs  rose  from  25 
percent  of  the  total  in  the  period  1947-50  to  66 
percent  in  1951-52,  and  to  82  percent  in  1953. 

UNICEF  is  currently  aiding  213  programs  in 
75  countries  and  territories.  This  aid  will  reach 
over  60  million  children.  During  1953,  approxi- 
mately 17  million  persons  were  protected  from 
malaria.  Also,  10  million  children  were  tested  for 
tuberculosis,  approximately  37  percent  of  whom 
were  vaccinated.  In  the  3  years  1951-53,  some 
10  million  children  were  examined  for  yaws,  and 
nearly  3  million  treated  with  penicillin.  During 
this  same  3-year  period,  aid  was  approved  for 
5,300  maternal  and  child  health  centers. 

UNICEF  has  provided  emergency  assistance  to 
the  victims  of  catastrophes.  This  emergency  aid, 
primarily  in  the  form  of  food,  clothing  and  drugs, 


was  provided  in  1953  to  children  in  the  famine 
areas  of  India  and  Pakistan,  the  earthquake-ridden 
Ionian  Islands  of  Greece,  the  flood-stricken  areas 
of  southern  Japan,  and  the  war-torn  regions  of 
Korea.  For  example,  the  Greek  earthquake  in 
August  included  among  its  victims  40,000  children 
and  3,000  expectant  mothers.  UNICEF  im- 
mediately made  available  20,000  blankets,  300,000 
pounds  of  milk  powder,  and  fish  liver  capsules 
and  soap. 

A  significant  development  in  the  latter  half  of 
1953  was  the  increase  of  UNICEF  assistance  to 
central  Africa,  particularly  for  the  control  of 
disease  rampant  in  that  area.  An  allocation  for 
leprosy  control  in  Nigeria  constituted  the  first 
UNICEF  aid  for  this  disease. 

At  its  September  meeting,  the  Executive  Board 
of  UNICEF  allocated  $9.9  million.  This  amount, 
plus  subsequent  allocations  of  $276,000  brought 
the  total  allocation  for  1953  to  $15.9  million. 
These  funds  from  UNICEF 's  central  account 
were  more  than  matched  by  contributions  made 
from  local  resources  by  governments  receiving 
aid.  In  the  latter  part  of  1953,  the  United  States 
paid  its  contribution  of  $9.8  million  for  the 
calendar  year  1953  program. 


65 


r